London Kensington Guide

Guide to London’s coolest places to visit

Things To Do

30 Things To Do In South London: Exploring The Best Of The City

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

Last Updated on 2 September, 2023

South London is a vibrant and diverse part of the city that offers a multitude of exciting experiences and attractions for both locals and visitors. From historical landmarks to cultural hotspots, this area is brimming with things to do and places to explore.

We have covered many parts of London, from East London , North London , Central London , West London and now things to do in South London.

In this comprehensive guide, we will delve into the notable areas of South London, highlight the top attractions, and provide recommendations for the best tours in the area. So, grab your map and get ready to embark on an unforgettable journey through South London!

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

Notable Areas of South London

Battersea is a trendy district known for its iconic power station and beautiful riverside views. Take a stroll along the Thames Path and enjoy the picturesque scenery.

If you’re a fan of contemporary art, don’t miss the chance to visit the renowned Battersea Arts Centre, which hosts a variety of performances and exhibitions throughout the year. Be sure to also stroll through Battersea Park .

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

Brockley is a hidden gem nestled between Peckham and Lewisham. This up-and-coming area is known for its thriving arts scene and independent businesses. Explore the vibrant Brockley Market, held every Saturday, and indulge in delicious street food and local produce.

Camberwell is a vibrant and diverse neighbourhood with a thriving arts community. Visit the South London Gallery, a contemporary art space that showcases both local and international artists.

For a taste of Camberwell’s culinary scene, head to Camberwell Green and discover a range of cafes, pubs and restaurants offering flavours from around the world.

Brixton is a lively and culturally diverse neighbourhood that offers a rich mix of music, food, and entertainment. Visit Brixton Market, where you can find an array of international cuisine, fresh produce, and unique shops.

Don’t forget to check out the Brixton Academy, a legendary music venue that has hosted some of the world’s biggest acts. There are plenty of amazing restaurants , cool pubs and even more fun cafes to check out .

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

Clapham is a popular residential area with a lively atmosphere and plenty of green spaces. Grab some brunch in Clapham and then take a leisurely stroll through Clapham Common, a picturesque park with ponds, sports facilities, and a Victorian bandstand.

In the evening, explore the bustling Clapham High Street, which is lined with bars, restaurants, and live music venues.

Crystal Palace

Crystal Palace is known for its namesake park, which offers stunning views of London and a range of recreational activities. Explore the Crystal Palace Museum, which tells the fascinating history of the area and the famous Crystal Palace exhibition of 1851.

Don’t forget to visit the Crystal Palace Dinosaurs, a collection of life-size statues that represent the first ever reconstructions of prehistoric animals.

London Bridge

London Bridge area with its namesake landmark bridge that offers breathtaking views of the city skyline. Take a walk across the bridge and enjoy the vibrant atmosphere of Borough Market , where you can sample delicious food from around the world. Visit The Shard, the tallest building in the United Kingdom, and take in panoramic views of London from its observation deck.

While you are in the area be sure to grab some popcorn and a movie at Borough Yard Everyman Cinema, a luxury movie experience which we mentioned in our list of cinemas in Southwark .

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

Dulwich is a leafy and affluent part of South London, known for its picturesque streets, prestigious art galleries and cute neighbourhood pubs . Explore the Dulwich Picture Gallery, the world’s first purpose-built public art gallery, which houses an impressive collection of Old Master paintings. Take a stroll through Dulwich Park, a tranquil green space with a boating lake and a beautiful rose garden.

East Dulwich

East Dulwich is a vibrant and trendy neighborhood with a thriving independent business scene. Browse through the boutiques, antique shops, and art galleries on Lordship Lane, and stop by the East Dulwich Tavern for a refreshing drink. Don’t miss the chance to visit the Horniman Museum and Gardens, which offers a fascinating insight into natural history and world cultures.

Greenwich is a UNESCO World Heritage site that offers a blend of history, culture, and natural beauty. Visit the iconic Cutty Sark, a restored 19th-century tea clipper that serves as a fascinating maritime museum.

Take a leisurely stroll through Greenwich Park and make your way to the Royal Observatory, where you can stand on the Prime Meridian line.

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

Herne Hill is a charming and family-friendly area with a bustling market and beautiful green spaces. Explore Brockwell Park, which features a lido, sports facilities, and a delightful walled garden. Indulge in the delicious food offerings at Herne Hill Market, held every Sunday, showcasing a range of local produce and street food.

Kennington is a historic district located near central London. Visit the Imperial War Museum, which offers a comprehensive insight into the impact of war on people’s lives. Take a walk around Kennington Park and admire its beautiful flowerbeds and ponds.

Nunhead is a charming neighborhood with a village-like feel. Discover Nunhead Cemetery, a hidden gem known for its Gothic architecture and overgrown greenery. Take a walk along Nunhead Green and visit the Old Nun’s Head pub, which offers a warm and welcoming atmosphere.

Peckham is a vibrant and multicultural area with a thriving arts scene. Explore Peckham Levels, a multi-story car park transformed into a creative hub with studios, shops, and food vendors. Visit the Bold Tendencies sculpture park and rooftop bar, which offers stunning views of the London skyline.

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

Kingston upon Thames

Kingston upon Thames is a picturesque riverside town with a rich history and vibrant shopping scene. Take a boat trip along the River Thames or explore the historic market town center, where you can find a mix of high-street and independent shops.

Don’t miss the chance to visit the impressive Kingston Museum, which showcases the town’s fascinating heritage.

Putney and Barnes

Putney and Barnes are charming riverside neighborhoods located along the banks of the River Thames. Enjoy a leisurely walk or bike ride along the Thames Path and soak in the tranquil ambiance.

Don’t miss the opportunity to explore the beautiful Putney Heath, a vast green space perfect for picnics and outdoor activities.

Richmond is a picturesque town known for its stunning parks, riverside pubs and historic landmarks. Take a stroll through Richmond Park, one of the largest royal parks in London , and spot the resident deer roaming freely.

Visit the magnificent Hampton Court Palace , a former royal residence with stunning gardens and a fascinating history.

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

Wandsworth is a vibrant district with a mix of residential and commercial areas. Explore Wandsworth Common, a beautiful green space with ponds, tennis courts, and a nature trail. Visit the iconic Young’s Brewery, a local institution known for its traditional ales and cozy pub atmosphere.

Rotherhithe

Rotherhithe is a historic area with a rich maritime heritage. Explore the Brunel Museum and take a tour of the Brunel Tunnel, a remarkable engineering feat of the 19th century.

Visit the Mayflower Pub, which is said to be the departure point of the Mayflower ship that carried the Pilgrims to America.

Waterloo and Lambeth

Waterloo and Lambeth are vibrant areas located near the South Bank of the River Thames. Take a walk along the South Bank and enjoy stunning views of the river and iconic landmarks such as the London Eye and the Houses of Parliament.

Visit the renowned Southbank Centre, a cultural hub that hosts a variety of art exhibitions, concerts, and performances. Grab some food from the Southbank food market or visit the many cool bars and restaurants on Southbank .

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

Tooting and Balham

Tooting and Balham are vibrant neighbourhoods known for their bustling markets and diverse food scene. Visit Tooting Market, where you can find an array of international cuisine, vintage shops, and artisanal products.

Explore the tranquil Tooting Bec Common, home to the iconic Tooting Bec Lido, one of the largest freshwater swimming pools in the UK.

Vauxhall is an up-and-coming area that offers a blend of modern development and historic landmarks. Visit the historic Vauxhall Pleasure Gardens, which date back to the 17th century and host various events throughout the year.

Don’t miss the opportunity to visit the iconic Oval Cricket Ground, known for its historic matches and lively atmosphere.

Deptford is an eclectic neighbourhood with a rich maritime history. Visit the Deptford Market Yard, a creative hub that houses a range of independent shops, restaurants, and bars. Take a walk along Deptford Creek and discover its hidden gems, including art studios, boatyards, and charming riverside pubs.

Wimbledon is internationally known for its prestigious tennis tournament, but there’s much more to explore in this leafy suburb. Take a walk around Wimbledon Common, a vast green space with woodland, ponds, and even a windmill. Explore the Wimbledon Village, which offers a mix of boutique shops, cafes, and restaurants.

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

Elephant And Castle

Elephant and Castle is a bustling hub of activity with a multicultural atmosphere. Explore the newly regenerated Elephant Park and enjoy its green spaces, cafes, and community events. For a taste of Latin American culture, visit the nearby Latin American Mercado, where you can find authentic food, crafts, and live music.

Forest Hill

Forest Hill is a charming neighborhood with a relaxed and friendly vibe. Discover the Horniman Museum and Gardens, which houses an extensive collection of artifacts, natural history exhibits, and beautiful gardens. Take a walk up to One Tree Hill and enjoy panoramic views of the London skyline.

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

Things To Do in South London

1. climb the o2 arena.

Have you ever wanted to conquer an iconic landmark? Climb The O2 Arena and enjoy stunning panoramic views of London from its summit. This exhilarating experience will give you a unique perspective of the city while challenging your physical abilities. Suitable for all fitness levels, this guided climb is an adventure you won’t forget.

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

2. Bermondsey Beer Mile

Beer lovers, rejoice! The Bermondsey Beer Mile is a must-visit destination for craft beer enthusiasts or for those looking for fun things to do in Bermondsey . This stretch of breweries and taprooms offers a variety of unique brews to suit every taste. Embark on a beer-tasting adventure and discover the rich flavours and innovative creations of London’s vibrant craft beer scene.

3. Dance the Night Away at Phonox

For those who love to dance, Phonox in Brixton is the place to be. This renowned nightclub hosts some of the best DJs and electronic music acts in the city. Put on your dancing shoes and groove to the pulsating beats in this vibrant and energetic venue.

4. Visit Cutty Sark

Step aboard the historic Cutty Sark, a 19th-century clipper ship that once sailed the world’s oceans. Explore its well-preserved decks and discover the fascinating stories of its voyages. From the cargo hold to the captain’s cabin, this maritime gem offers a glimpse into the golden age of sail.

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

5. Dulwich Picture Gallery

Art aficionados will appreciate a visit to the Dulwich Picture Gallery, England’s oldest public art gallery. This neoclassical masterpiece houses an impressive collection of European Old Master paintings, including works by Rembrandt, Rubens, and Van Dyck. Explore the gallery’s beautiful gardens and attend one of the many art events and exhibitions held throughout the year.

6. Maltby Street Market

Food lovers, rejoice! Maltby Street Market is a hidden culinary gem tucked away in Bermondsey. This vibrant market offers a mouthwatering array of street food, artisanal products, and local produce. From gourmet burgers to delectable pastries, this is the perfect place to satisfy your taste buds. This is indeed one of the best Saturday markets in London that you should check out.

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

7. Nunhead Cemetery

Take a peaceful stroll through Nunhead Cemetery, one of London’s magnificent Victorian cemeteries. This tranquil oasis is a haven for wildlife and offers a serene setting for reflection and contemplation. Explore the picturesque pathways, admire the beautiful gravestones, and learn about the fascinating history buried within its grounds.

8. Borough Market

Satisfy your culinary cravings at Borough Market , one of London’s oldest and most renowned food markets in addition to being the most popular of South London Markets . From fresh produce to gourmet street food, this bustling market is a feast for the senses. Indulge in artisanal cheeses, delectable pastries, and international flavours that reflect the vibrant multiculturalism of the city.

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

9. Eltham Palace

We have covered a lot on must-see palaces in London and this is one not to miss. Experience the perfect blend of medieval grandeur and Art Deco elegance at Eltham Palace. This stunning historic site boasts magnificent gardens, an impressive Great Hall, and luxurious Art Deco interiors. Immerse yourself in the opulence of the 1930s and marvel at the unique fusion of architectural styles.

10. Pop Brixton

Pop Brixton is a vibrant community project that brings together local entrepreneurs, artists, and food vendors. This creative space features an eclectic mix of independent shops, bars, and street food stalls. From fashion to art, there’s something for everyone at this dynamic pop-up destination.

11. Forza Wine in Peckham

Wine enthusiasts shouldn’t miss the opportunity to visit Forza Wine in Peckham . This trendy wine bar offers a carefully curated selection of natural wines from around the world. Sip on a glass of your favorite vintage and savor the unique flavours while soaking in the cozy atmosphere.

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

12. Horniman Museum

The Horniman Museum is a treasure trove of natural history, anthropology, and musical instruments. Explore the museum’s vast collection, which includes artifacts from around the world, interactive exhibits, and an aquarium. Don’t miss the chance to admire the stunning views of London from the museum’s beautiful gardens.

13. Swim at Brockwell Lido

Looking for a refreshing dip? Head to Brockwell Lido, a charming outdoor swimming pool located in Brockwell Park. Take a leisurely swim or simply relax by the poolside and soak up the sun. With its art deco features and stunning surroundings, this lido offers a unique swimming experience.

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

14. Explore Peckham Levels

Peckham Levels is a multi-story car park transformed into a vibrant creative space. This cultural hub features artist studios, independent shops, food vendors, and even a rooftop bar. Immerse yourself in the artistic atmosphere and discover the hidden gems that make Peckham such a dynamic and diverse neighborhood.

15. Explore Kew Gardens

Nature lovers will delight in a visit to Kew Gardens , a UNESCO World Heritage site and one of the world’s most famous botanic gardens. Explore the vast collection of plants, stroll through the stunning landscapes, and marvel at the iconic glasshouses. From the Temperate House to the Palm House, Kew Gardens is a paradise for plant enthusiasts.

16. Brixton Village

Indulge in a culinary adventure at Brixton Village, a bustling indoor market with a diverse range of food stalls and restaurants. From Caribbean cuisine to Vietnamese street food, this vibrant market offers a mouthwatering selection of flavours that will satisfy any palate. Explore the narrow passageways and discover hidden gems serving up delicious dishes made with passion and creativity.

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

17. Enjoy African Food at Kudu

Experience the vibrant flavours of African cuisine at Kudu, a popular restaurant in Peckham. Indulge in dishes inspired by the diverse culinary traditions of South Africa, from grilled meats to flavourful stews. With its cozy atmosphere and exquisite food, Kudu offers a unique dining experience that will tantalize your taste buds.

18. Ride on the London Eye

Take a ride on the iconic London Eye and enjoy breathtaking views of the city’s skyline . This giant Ferris wheel offers panoramic vistas that stretch for miles, allowing you to marvel at famous landmarks such as Big Ben, the Houses of Parliament, and St. Paul’s Cathedral. Capture unforgettable memories from the top and see London from a whole new perspective.

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

19. Imperial War Museum

Step into history at the Imperial War Museum and gain a deeper understanding of the impact of war on society. Explore the extensive collections that document the stories of those who lived through conflicts, from World War I to the present day. From tanks and aircraft to personal testimonies, this museum offers a poignant and educational experience.

20. See a Show at the Old Vic Theatre

Immerse yourself in the world of theater at the historic Old Vic Theatre. This renowned venue has been showcasing world-class performances for over two centuries. From classic plays to innovative productions, the Old Vic offers a diverse program that caters to all tastes. Grab a ticket, sit back, and let the magic of live theater unfold before your eyes.

21. Walk the Glass Floor at Tower Bridge

Feel the thrill of walking on air as you step onto the glass floor of Tower Bridge . This iconic landmark offers a unique opportunity to admire the bustling river traffic beneath your feet. Explore the bridge’s exhibition and learn about its fascinating history and engineering marvels. Don’t forget to capture the perfect photo from the panoramic walkways, where you can enjoy stunning views of the River Thames.

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

22. Shakespeare’s Globe

Transport yourself back in time to the world of William Shakespeare at the reconstructed Globe Theatre. Experience the magic of his plays in the very place they were originally performed. From tragic dramas to uproarious comedies, the Globe offers a theatrical experience like no other. Immerse yourself in the atmosphere of Elizabethan London and be captivated by the power of Shakespeare’s words.

23. Royal Observatory

This is not to be missed for those exploring Greenwich . Embark on a celestial journey at the Royal Observatory in Greenwich. Stand on the Prime Meridian line, which marks the division between the Eastern and Western Hemispheres. Explore the fascinating history of navigation and astronomy, and gaze at the stars in the state-of-the-art Peter Harrison Planetarium. The Royal Observatory offers a unique blend of science, history, and breathtaking views of the city. 

24. Richmond Park

Escape the hustle and bustle of the city and immerse yourself in the tranquility of Richmond Park . This vast green space is home to herds of deer, picturesque landscapes, and a peaceful oasis away from the urban jungle. Take a leisurely walk, have a picnic, or simply enjoy the beauty of nature in one of London’s most beloved parks.

25. Bermondsey Street

Wander along Bermondsey Street and discover a hidden treasure trove of art galleries , boutiques, restaurants and trendy cafes. This vibrant street is a hub of creativity and offers a unique blend of old and new. From contemporary art to vintage fashion, there’s something to pique everyone’s interest along this eclectic and lively stretch.

26. Wimbledon Open

Experience the excitement and grandeur of professional tennis at the Wimbledon Open. This prestigious tournament draws the world’s top players to compete on the iconic grass courts of the All England Club. Join the passionate crowd, indulge in strawberries and cream, and witness the thrill of the game as tennis history is made before your eyes.

27. Tate Modern

Immerse yourself in the world of modern and contemporary art at the Tate Modern. Housed in a former power station, this iconic gallery showcases an impressive collection of works by renowned artists such as Picasso, Warhol, and Hockney. Explore the vast exhibition spaces, attend thought-provoking installations, and discover the ever-evolving landscape of modern art.

28. Take in Views from the Shard

Elevate your London experience by ascending to the dizzying heights of the Shard. This architectural marvel is the tallest building in the United Kingdom and offers unparalleled views of the city. Enjoy a drink at one of the sky-high bars or restaurants and marvel at the sprawling urban landscape beneath you.

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

29. Learn to Make Sake at Kanpai in Peckham

Embark on a unique cultural experience and learn the art of sake making at Kanpai in Peckham. Join a hands-on workshop and discover the traditional methods and techniques behind this beloved Japanese beverage. From rice fermentation to tasting sessions, this immersive experience will deepen your appreciation for sake and its cultural significance.

30. Greenwich Maritime Museum

Discover the rich maritime history of Greenwich at the Maritime Museum. Explore interactive exhibitions, learn about famous explorers, and delve into the fascinating world of navigation and trade. From historical artifacts to immersive displays, this museum offers a captivating journey through time.

Discover the vibrant charm of South London! 🇬🇧 Uncover hidden gems, historic landmarks, and a diverse array of activities in our curated guide. From trendy markets to scenic parks and captivating museums, there's something for everyone in this bustling metropolis. Let your South London adventure begin! #London #TravelGuide #SouthLondon #CityExploration

The Best Tours in South London

Historical Walking Tour of Southwark : Explore the rich history of Southwark on a guided walking tour. From the ancient Borough Market to the historic Southwark Cathedral, this tour will take you on a journey through time. Learn about the area’s fascinating past, its connections to famous literary figures, and the tales of hardship and triumph that have shaped its identity.

River Thames Cruise : Embark on a leisurely cruise along the River Thames and discover the iconic landmarks that line its banks. From the Tower of London to the Houses of Parliament, this tour offers a unique perspective of the city’s history and architectural wonders. Sit back, relax, and let the gentle waves carry you through the heart of London.

Secret Gardens of London Tour : Escape the urban jungle and discover the hidden green spaces of London on a secret gardens tour. From private squares to secluded parks, this tour will unveil the serene oases tucked away amidst the city’s bustling streets. Experience the tranquility of these hidden gems and learn about their fascinating histories and botanical wonders.

Food Tour of Brixton : Embark on a culinary journey through the diverse flavours of Brixton on a food tour. Sample delicious Caribbean dishes, authentic African cuisine, and vibrant street food while learning about the cultural heritage of the area. From jerk chicken tocraft cocktails, this tour will tantalize your taste buds and introduce you to the vibrant culinary scene of Brixton.

Thames Path Cycling Tour : Explore the beauty of the River Thames on a cycling tour along the Thames Path. Pedal along the riverbanks, passing iconic landmarks and scenic landscapes. From Tower Bridge to Greenwich, this tour offers a unique way to experience the city’s sights while enjoying the freedom of cycling.

Architectural Tour of Greenwich : Discover the architectural gems of Greenwich on a guided tour that highlights the area’s rich history and stunning buildings. Visit the grandeur of the Old Royal Naval College, marvel at the innovative design of the Cutty Sark, and explore the intricate details of the Queen’s House. This tour offers a captivating journey through the architectural heritage of Greenwich.

Ghost Tour of South London : Embark on a spine-chilling adventure with a ghost tour of South London. Explore the haunted corners and eerie tales of the area, from haunted pubs to ghostly sightings. Listen to chilling stories of paranormal encounters and uncover the dark secrets that linger in the shadows. This tour is not for the faint of heart but promises an unforgettable experience for thrill-seekers.

Vintage Shopping Tour in East Dulwich: Step back in time and indulge in a vintage shopping tour in East Dulwich. Discover hidden boutiques, retro clothing stores, and antique markets that offer a treasure trove of unique finds. From vintage fashion to quirky collectibles, this tour will transport you to the bygone eras of style and nostalgia.

Wine Tasting Tour in Wimbledon:  Savour the flavours of the vine on a wine-tasting tour in Wimbledon. Visit local wineries and vineyards, sample a variety of wines, and learn about the winemaking process. From crisp whites to robust reds, this tour offers a delightful journey through the world of wine. Cheers to a memorable experience in Wimbledon.

FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions)

1. what are the notable areas to visit in south london.

Notable areas to visit in South London include Battersea, Brixton, Brockley, Camberwell, Clapham, Crystal Palace, Deptford, Dulwich, East Dulwich, Elephant And Castle, Forest Hill, Greenwich, Herne Hill, Kennington, Kingston upon Thames, London Bridge, Nunhead, Peckham, Putney And Barnes, Richmond, Rotherhithe, Tooting And Balham, Vauxhall, Wandsworth, Waterloo And Lambeth, and Wimbledon.

2. What are some popular things to do in South London?

Some popular things to do in South London include climbing The O2 Arena, visiting Cutty Sark, exploring Maltby Street Market, experiencing the beauty of Eltham Palace, enjoying the vibrant atmosphere of Pop Brixton, tasting exquisite wines at Forza Wine in Peckham, admiring the art at Dulwich Picture Gallery, swimming at Brockwell Lido, discovering the Bermondsey Beer Mile, and exploring the unique Peckham Levels, among many others.

3. Can I visit historical sites in South London?

Yes, South London is rich in historical sites. You can visit landmarks such as Tower Bridge, Shakespeare’s Globe, the Imperial War Museum, the Old Vic Theatre, and the Royal Observatory. These sites offer a glimpse into London’s history and provide an immersive experience for history enthusiasts.

4. Are there any green spaces to relax in South London?

Absolutely! South London boasts several beautiful green spaces where you can relax and unwind. Some notable parks include Richmond Park, Wimbledon Common, Southwark Park, Burgess Park, Brockwell Park, and Greenwich Park. These tranquil oases offer a welcome escape from the bustling city and provide opportunities for picnics, walks, and recreational activities.

5. Can I take tours to explore South London?

Yes, there are various tours available to explore South London. You can join a historical walking tour of Southwark, take a river Thames cruise, go on a street art tour in Shoreditch, discover the secret gardens of London, indulge in a food tour of Brixton, or embark on a cycling tour along the Thames Path. These tours provide unique perspectives and insights into the vibrant culture and history of South London.

6. Where can I find more information about South London attractions?

For more information about South London attractions, you can visit official websites, travel guides, and online resources such as Visit London and Time Out London . These sources provide detailed information about attractions, events, and recommendations to make the most of your visit to South London.

South London offers a wealth of attractions, activities, and hidden gems waiting to be discovered. From the vibrant neighbourhoods to the historic landmarks, there is something for everyone in this diverse and culturally rich part of the city.

Whether you’re exploring the notable areas, indulging in culinary delights, or immersing yourself in the arts and history, South London promises a memorable and rewarding experience. So, pack your bags, grab your camera, and embark on an adventure to explore the many things to do in South London.

Bianca

My name is Bianca and welcome to my local guide of London's Royal Borough of Kensington & Chelsea. Everything you need to know about exploring London in addition to the coolest hangouts and Instagrammable spots.

You may also like

Explore the world of Armani shops in London and indulge in the epitome of Italian luxury fashion. Discover the iconic designs and impeccable tailoring that define the Armani brand. From sophisticated suits to elegant evening wear and stylish accessories, Armani offers a curated selection of timeless pieces. Immerse yourself in the world of Armani at their London boutiques and experience the fusion of classic elegance and contemporary style. | armani store london | emporio armani london store

Armani Shops In London: Discover the Timeless Sophistication

Discover the best Italian restaurants in Canary Wharf, London. From Capeesh's exquisite dishes to Dez AMORE's charming ambiance, explore a diverse range of dining experiences. Check out the detailed guide with insights, FAQs, and more.

Italian Restaurants in Canary Wharf: A Culinary Journey Through London’s Finest

Embark on a culinary journey around Tower Bridge's finest restaurants. From riverside elegance to hidden gems, explore a diverse array of dining experiences that capture the vibrant spirit of this iconic London locale. Indulge in delectable cuisines and stunning views, all while immersing yourself in the rich tapestry of tastes that Tower Bridge has to offer. | Restaurants Near Tower Bridge | Coco | Gaucho | Places To Eat Near Tower Bridge | best restaurants near tower bridge

Best Restaurants In Tower Bridge: A Culinary Adventure

Leave a reply cancel reply.

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

Hand Luggage Only

  • Travel Journal
  • Travel Advice
  • Travel Inspiration
  • Photo Diary
  • Photography Tips
  • Photography Inspiration
  • Destinations
  • Home Inspiration
  • Blogging Tips
  • Work With Us

Hand Luggage Only

13 Best Things To Do In South London

Best Things To Do In Greenwich (20)

With all the incredible places to see , London is the kind of city you visit and never fully see it all – in fact, I think that task is almost impossible. This is why I think it’s easier to focus a visit on each of the areas of London ; with South London being no exception. Honestly, there’s a ton of spots and heaps of the best things to do in South London that are dotted all across the river. 

This makes it a fun-filled place that’s got heaps of history, gorgeous areas (like Greenwich ) and palaces , too! 

Best Things To Do In Greenwich (25)

Now, you’ve probably realised that I’m totally biased? I just can’t help it, London is my favourite city and South London is a gem that I love so much. 

So, to help you get the most out of your time south of the river, I wanted to share my very favourite spots you need to explore on the first trip to South London. 

Some spots might seem obvious, whilst others a little more ‘off the beaten track’. Whatever the case, I’m sure you’ll find a fair few spots to explore whilst heading around South London.

Best Things To Do In South London (1)

Take a look, below, at the best things to do in South London.

1.) London Eye

Best Things To Do In South London (6)

You kinda can’t start off a list of best things to do in South London without mentioning the iconic London Eye – especially if you’ve never been to London before! 

Now, t he London Eye is probably one of the most recognizable landmarks in the South of London and well worth a 30-minute ride on the wheel for views all across London. 

We’ve been on it a few times (over the years of living here) and it’s always so nice.

Though my favourite time to head up is at sunset and I’d recommend you book these fast-track London Eye tickets for this time of day if you want to see the orange hues all across the city. 

The View of London from The London Eye and a Walk Around London (11)

Yes, it’s very popular with visitors but rightly so – the views are fantastic. Afterwards, take a stroll east (along the Thames) towards the Southbank area.

Here, you can watch a performance, visit some of the foodie spots and make the most of the seasonal fairs and markets that line the area. It’s lovely. 

If you’re lucky enough to visit on New Year’s Eve, you’ll be blown away by the immense fireworks display that we try and catch every year.

With the London Eye being the centrepiece of the show, it’s best to book tickets (to view from the street) way in advance so you get a space on the cordoned-off streets themselves. 

Read more: Best things to do in London

2.) Tower Bridge

Best Things To Do In South London (10)

Built back in the 1800s, Tower Bridge is one of the most quintessential sights to see in London .

Of course, you can take a wander over Tower Bridge, towards the Tower of London and see the views over the River Thames. 

Oh, and don’t forget to book your Tower of London tickets if you’re heading north of the Thames. This way, you’ll be guaranteed entry. 

Not only that, nowadays you can now tour the inside of the towers themselves and discover the Tower’s fascinating history. Plus, you’ll get to stand on its glass floor and enjoy outstanding panoramic views of London from the very top walkway on Tower Bridge. 

Feeling peckish? Head over to nearby Santo Remedio for the most delicious Mexican food in South London. We love this spot for its fresh fish and tacos. Plus, they have a pretty potent bottomless brunch, too! 

Read more: Best tours in London to book

3.) Crystal Palace

Best Things To Do In South London (3)

Quite far away from the riverfront, visiting Crystal Palace is one of the best things to do in South London that’s a little away from the busier touristy spots. 

Now, one thing you can’t miss is the large dinosaurs that call Crystal Palace park home! First created as part of a Victorian-era theme park, the dinosaurs, which were restored in 2002, provide a peek into the 1850s’ understanding of palaeontology. Though, to be honest, they just look super cool and they’re probably Crystal Palace’s most famous residents. 

Also, the best part, Crystal Palace Park is totally free to visit, making it a perfect way to spend a family-friendly day out.

Read more: Best places for coffee in London

4.) Cutty Sark

Best Things To Do In South London (8)

Built back in 1869, the Cutty Sark is a British tea clipper ship that’s steeped in history (see what I did there? Steeped!). 

Now one of the last tea clippers to ever be built, it’s set pride of place right in the heart of Royal Greenwich .

Long ago, the Cutty Sark used to transport tea to England from Asia and was prized for its speedy service and luxury tea leaves that fetched quite a pretty penny! 

Best Things To Do In Greenwich (20)

Nowadays, the Cutty Sark is a gorgeous museum that’s well worth an hour (or so) visit.

Best Things To Do In Greenwich (22)

Plus, you can easily partner this with a visit to all the great spots in Greenwich , like the; Painted Hall and the Royal Navy College. 

Oh, and you can climb the roof of the O2 , too. Just book these tickets before arriving ! It’s such a cool experience. 

Read more: Best things to do in Greenwich

5.) Maltby Street Market

Best Things To Do In South London (9)

A food lover’s paradise, be sure to check out the Maltby Street Market in the Bermondsey area of South London. Here, you’ll get to devour a shed load of tasty delicacies and treats from around the world.

Typically a weekend market, it has delicious street food being sold by loads of food and drinks stalls that line the route. 

Open on Saturday and Sunday from 9 am-5 pm and 11 am-5 pm, it’s a place that’s visited by locals and visitors alike. To beat the majority of the crowds, arrive early and give yourself plenty of time to pursue and devour everything in sight! 

Afterwards, for a night of immersive theatre and creative spaces, head to Waterloo and explore the Vaults . Here they host a range of theatre spots underground, right within the arches of the railway itself. It’s totally cool and you get to see some epic shows. 

Read more: Best markets in London

6.) Eltham Palace

Best Things To Do In Greenwich (17)

Nestled in wider Greenwich , Eltham Palace is often forgotten in lieu of London’s more iconic palaces . That being said, it’s one of the best things to do in South London if you want to explore our city’s vast history. 

Presented to King Edward II in 1305, and later serving as King Henry VIII’s childhood home, Eltham Palace was once a royal treasure that is nowadays open to the public.

Best Things To Do In Greenwich (19)

Eltham Palace is one of London’s best-kept secrets and is typically less crowded than some of London’s other attractions due to being located a train ride away from the busier Zone 1 area of Central London.

That said, it is definitely worth a visit from the well-travelled part of town to experience the English Heritage Site that has so much going for it.

Once here, make sure to explore Tudor Palace’s original moat (with the oldest working bridge in the city), the lush lavender gardens on the grounds and explore the Medieval Great Hall and Art Deco Rooms.

We loved it! 

7.) Shakespeare’s Globe

Best Things To Do In South London (4)

Nestled on the banks of the River Thames, not too far from the original site of the theatre, Shakespeare’s Globe is great to visit for a tour or even watching a performance. 

Originally built in 1599, the Globe theatre was destroyed in 1644, but visitors can still experience history as Shakespeare’s Globe is an incredible rebuilding of what the original Globe Theatre was like during the Elizabethan Era. 

It’s beautiful.

Read more: Free things to do in London

8.) Royal Observatory

Best Things To Do In South London (2)

Famous for having the prime meridian run through it, the Royal Observatory is located in Greenwich Park and overlooks the River Thames towards Canary Wharf.

Best Things To Do In South London (5)

Commissioned in 1675 by King Charles II, the Greenwich location of the Royal Observatory serves almost entirely as a museum.

Greenwich Park In Winter London

Now, after the observatory’s scientific work moved to a different location. If you’re at all interested in the history of astronomy, exploration, or navigation, be sure to check it out. 

Best Things To Do In Greenwich (2)

Plus, afterwards, you can head for a stroll around Greenwich Park and stop for a bite to eat in Greenwich Market that’s been around for centuries. The local food vendors serve up some real treats. 

9.) South London’s foodie spots 

Best Things To Do In London (14)

Gosh, there are so many to tell you about! 

If it’s Piri-Piri chicken you’re after, head across to Casa do Frango in London Bridge. Their chicken is everything and they serve up some tasty Portuguese green wine, too. 

Best Things To Do In London (23)

Alternatively, head across to Kricket Brixton for their delicious Indian-inspired dishes that are so flavourful.

Situated within the railway arches, it’s a spot that’s totally cool and so tasty. 

Best Things To Do In London (22)

Finally, for some of the best gelato in London, head over to Gelataria 3Bis which serves up a treat in a cone. 

If it’s chocolate you’re after, visit Dark Sugars Cocoa House in Greenwich. Here, they’ll serve you up some incredible truffles and treats to try.

Read more: Best food markets in London

10.) Peckham 

Things to see and do in Peckham, London (6)

Sometimes an overlooked area of London , visiting Peckham is one of the best things to do in South London for an evening out. 

You see, in Peckham, there’s a heap of spots to eat, have a few tipples with friends and just chill out. A totally local haunt for Londoners, you’ll be in good company on the rooftop at the Bussey Rooftop Bar .  

Things to see and do in Peckham, London (28)

Also, don’t forget to check out Peckham Levels , with the art spaces and foodie vendors that focus on local enterprises. 

Things to see and do in Peckham, London (19)

Finally, if you want to try some traditional pie, liquor and mash, head over to M.Manze on Peckham High Street. These lots know their stuff when it comes to pies! 

Read more: Best beaches near London to visit

11.) Richmond

Best Things To Do In London (20)

Exploring Richmond is easily one of the best things to do in South London if you want a slice of nature! 

You see, Richmond has one of the few remaining deer parks in London, Richmond Park. For centuries, the deer have roamed freely and openly and you’ll easily spot them all across the park. 

Best Things To Do In London (10)

Afterwards, take a ramble towards, nearby, Kew Gardens and explore the stunning grounds and Palm House, too. They even have a treetop walk that’ll take you through the trees. 

If you’ve got time, take a gander around Ham House and Garden which dates back to the 1600s. Here, you’ll be able to explore the rooms, see the world-class paintings and stroll the historic gardens. 

12.) Wimbledon 

A DAY IN WIMBLEDON... || Watching Andy Murray, Rafael Nadal and Johanna Konta's Tennis Matches (22)

You probably know Wimbledon for its tennis competition, yeah?

Well, that’s incredible and totally fun to visit. We’ve been a few times and it’s always been so much fun – though, we always end up with a sore head the next morning (after all the bubbles and strawberries and cream). 

Best Things To Do In South London (7)

If you’re not visiting around the time of Wimbledon, check out Wimbledon Common with the historic windmill that sits proudly in the greenery. 

Read more: Our day at Wimbledon’s Centre Court

13.) Bermondsey Street

The Best Places To Go Shopping In London (20)

Around a 10-minute stroll from London Bridge Station, Bermondsey Street has a small-town feel even though it’s right within Central London. 

After heading to some of the bars and restaurants along the way, make sure to visit the White Cube Gallery for their seasonal exhibitions and shows. It’s a forever-changing space that we love. 

Best Things To Do In London Watch House Coffee

Also, for some great coffee, head to WatchHouse Bermondsey which serves up some of the best brews south of the river. 

Nestled within a historic Victorian watchhouse, it’s a cosy little spot to chill after a morning exploring South London. 

Best Things To Do In London (2)

Finally, head over to the Tate Modern (a 25-minute stroll) and see some of the world’s best modern art galleries!

We love it. 

28 Very Best Things To Do In London

Check Out The Very Best Of Great Britain!

Hand Luggage Only Great Britain Travel Book Advert Banner

Pop Over To Our YouTube Channel For Travel Videos!

' src=

Puppy Defender. Foodie. Chocolate Fiend and Custard Lover. Dip, Cover or Wrap anything in sugar and I'm Yours!

trip south london

24 Hours In The Amalfi Coast, Italy

trip south london

Exploring Provence: Mont Ventoux, Séguret And Dentelles de Montmirail

You may also like.

best things to do in New Orleans (20)

12 Very Best Things To Do In New Orleans

The Sights, Sounds And People Of Chitwan, Nepal (17)

The Sights, Sounds And People Of Chitwan, Nepal

This Is An Amazing Way To Experience Niagara Falls! (5)

The Best Helicopter Tour Over Niagara Falls

Looking for something, fellow connected travellers.

  • 555k Facebook
  • 0 Pinterest
  • 1,202,450 TikTok
  • 340,142 Instagram
  • 23,800 X (Twitter)
  • 33,251 Email Subscribers

Adventure Awaits!

Hand Luggage Only Find Out More

Have You Seen These Yet?

11 Best Things To Do In Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania

11 Best Things To Do In Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania

Important Travel Selfie Lesson!

Important Travel Selfie Lesson!

14 Best Things To Do In Arizona

14 Best Things To Do In Arizona

We’re Partnering With Apple To Host A Free Photography Class For You!

We’re Partnering With Apple To Host A Free Photography Class For You!

Arrival In The Eastern Cape Of South Africa

Arrival In The Eastern Cape Of South Africa

  • Privacy Policy

trip south london

Email address:

web analytics

National Geographic content straight to your inbox—sign up for our popular newsletters here

South London's Crystal Palace Park is home to the world’s first lifesize dinosaur statues.

Five of south London’s best sightseeing walks

From medieval palaces and manicured Victorian parks to brutalist masterpieces and Black heritage hubs, these five walks pack in some of the capital’s most iconic sights.

1. Green Chain Walk

Distance: 5.5 miles Start:   Crystal Palace Park End: Nunhead Cemetery Terrain: A little hilly with uneven footpaths

South London’s Green Chain Walk is a beautifully meandering route covering 50 miles in 11 sections of the capital’s southern side. The five-mile stretch which makes up the last section, starting at Crystal Palace Park , is one of the leafiest, taking you through manicured parks and dappled woodland with a natural history museum thrown in for good measure. The Grade II-listed, 198-acre park is also the proud home of the world’s first full-scale dinosaur reconstructions. Created by natural history artist Benjamin Waterhouse Hawkins in 1854, these comical-looking statues were surprisingly important in paleontology terms as they showcase the first three species discovered and were the most accurate constructions in existence at the time. Next, pant your way up into Sydenham Hill Wood , and keep your eyes peeled for the ruins of a Victorian folly and rockery. This quiet expanse of London wilderness was once the site of a grand house that was destroyed by fire in the 1950s. Now it’s home to bats and woodpeckers, as well as a healthy population of tawny owls. Follow a disused train track through the trees (the line once connected Nunhead with Crystal Palace), cross Cox’s Walk footbridge and continue straight on to reach the Horniman Museum and Gardens . Here, eclectic collections — including an enormous stuffed walrus — explore   valuable lessons on the development of the natural world. If you still have   energy left, head   into Dulwich Village, a charming part of the city with an art gallery, independent cafes, Georgian townhouses and a strong community vibe.

2. South Bank

Distance: 3 miles Start:   Westminster Bridge End:   Tower of London Terrain: Flat and nicely pathed

For this walk, which ticks off lots of the capital’s must-sees, start at the south side of Westminster Bridge. On the opposite bank stands The Houses of Parliament . This extraordinary gothic palace is the seat of government, beside which stands Elizabeth Tower (so named to commemorate the Queen’s Diamond Jubilee). Although it’s commonly referred to as Big Ben, strictly speaking this is actually the name of the bell at the top of the tower. Keep walking east, and you’ll soon encounter the London Eye . Built to usher in the Millennium, it’s Europe’s tallest cantilevered observation wheel. Stop at one of the myriad riverside pop-up stalls in front of the Southbank Centre — the UK's largest arts space. On offer is everything from Pimm’s to Korean barbecue and pizza. Next up, either admire or abhor the National Theatre , one of the capital’s most divisive brutalist buildings. Continue round the bend of the Thames, and you’ll shortly be in for another dose of brutalism, in the form of the Tate Modern . The gallery regularly hosts exhibitions dedicated to world-renowned modern artists, including Henri Matisse, Andy Warhol and Damien Hirst, while major installations often occupy its cathedral-sized Turbine Hall. Shakespeare’s Globe theatre appears soon after the Tate — a reconstruction of the Tudor original but beautiful nonetheless. This is followed by HMS Belfast , a Second World War navy warship that played a pivotal role in the treacherous D Day landings of 1944. With The Shard watching over you, walk across Tower Bridge to your final stop, the Tower of London , famous for being the site of numerous executions, including two of Henry VIII’s wives.

Brixton Market is a warren of alleyways and home to a brilliant array of stalls and pop-up restaurants.

3. Afro-Caribbean heritage walk

Distance: 2 miles with lots of stops Start:   Brixton Station End: Black Cultural Archives Terrain: Flat and urban all the way

Brixton has long been at the beating heart of the capital’s Black British communities. To really get under the skin of this charismatic part of south London and learn about its history, there are several brilliant walking tours, including those offered by Black History Walks and Brixton Society . Alternatively, a more informal option would be to start at Brixton underground station, weaving between the crowds and buskers who congregate at its entrance. Next, cross over to Tunstall Road, pausing to read the messages of love scrawled around the David Bowie mural (the musician was born in Brixton). Next, it’s on to Geneva Road, where many immigrants settled in the post-Windrush years, including Claudia Jones, the founder of the Notting Hill Carnival and creator of Britain's first major Black community newspaper, the West Indian Gazette . Walking towards Brixton Market , you’ll pass the former site of Blacker Dread Musik Store, on Coldharbour Lane. The shop, which closed in 2014, was once the epicentre of London’s reggae music scene, and Blacker Dread (real name Steve Burnett-Martin) remains a local legend. Take your time to really mooch around Brixton Market. This rabbit warren of alleyways is home to a brilliant array of stalls and pop-up restaurants. Finally, walk off your food at the Black Cultural Archives — a centre celebrating African and Caribbean culture, where you can learn about history-shaping events such as the 1981 Brixton riot.

With its village-like high street, grand Victorian houses and excellent pubs, leafy Richmond feels both part of the capital and totally separate at the same time.

4. Thames Path

Distance:   8 miles Start:   Richmond   End:   Hampton Court Terrain: A paved towpath cutting through greenery on both sides

Richmond is the picturesque starting point for this riverside amble. This lovely, leafy area of London feels both part of the capital and totally separate at the same time. Here, you’ll find a village-like high street, grand Victorian houses and excellent pubs (get a pre-walk takeaway pint from the Roebuck ). The views of the river and rolling fields beyond are among London’s finest. If you can tear yourself away, head south from Richmond Bridge. There’s only one path along the river, so it’s impossible to get lost — always a plus on any walk. The route meanders gently through greenery, passing Petersham Meadow, Marble Hill Park on the opposite bank and Ham House and Garden — a somewhat prosaic description for this stately, Stuart mansion. Onwards to Kingston upon Thames, and in perfect time for another pub stop or two. Try The Ram , renowned for its roasts, or The Mill for riverside views. To continue on the Thames Path , cross Kingston Bridge. You’re now just a short hop from the start of Hampton Court Park . The gardens of this specular palace — once home to Henry VIII — are free to wander round, but the £25.30 entry fee to go inside is well worth it: a step back in time to Tudor England.

The hustle and bustle of the city seems far away on the Wandle Trail, where the only noises disturbing your stroll are likely to be the breeze and the rush of the river.

5. The Wandle Trail

Distance: 6 miles Start: Morden Tube station End: Wandsworth Town railway station Terrain: Flat, but narrow and uneven in places

Ninety working mills once lined the River Wandle, a Thames tributary that powered the manufacture of products as varied as wheat and gunpowder, copper and snuff. While most of their wheels no longer turn, several still dot this path. It only takes a little imagination to envisage what life would’ve been like here during the Industrial Revolution. Jump off the Tube at the very end of the Northern Line and head to the Wetlands Boardwalk . The city seems very far away here, where the only noise to disturb your stroll is likely to be the breeze singing through the reeds that line the river. Next up, you’ll reach Dean City Farm , where the resident pigs are both friendly and greedy. If you’re there at feeding time, you’ll be welcome to muck in, but if not, linger anyway and say hello to the other resident animals. Following the river onwards, looking out for the Wandle Art Trail that runs for its entire route. Designed by Andrew Sabin, it features viewing platforms, bridges and hand-carved markers. If you’ve timed your walk right, you should reach your next stop, Merton Abbey Mills , around lunchtime. A former textile market, the site now has several pubs and cafes, as well as a weekend craft market and working mill wheel. No fewer than 10 parks line this river, and the latter half of the walk passes through four of them, each more picturesque than the last. London proper appears on the horizon as you enter your final green space, King George’s Park . As you’ve earned it, end your walk with a drink at The Ship , less than a five-minute walk from Wandsworth Station.

Subscribe to National Geographic Traveller (UK)

Follow us on social media  

Twitter | Facebook | Instagram

Related Topics

  • WALKING TOURS

You May Also Like

trip south london

5 of north London's most scenic walking routes

trip south london

Bluebell walks in the UK: eight of the best woodlands to visit

Free bonus issue.

trip south london

Whales and butterflies are the real celebrities in Santa Barbara

trip south london

The new Sri Lankan hiking trail that leads to the heart of the hill country

trip south london

Looking for a truly remote, off-the-grid adventure? Try Panama.

trip south london

Fiordland on foot: New Zealand adds another Great Walk to its hiking hit list

trip south london

Atlanta isn’t all that Georgia has to offer. Here are 7 other worthy trips.

  • Environment
  • Paid Content

History & Culture

  • History & Culture
  • History Magazine
  • Gory Details
  • 2023 in Review
  • Mind, Body, Wonder
  • Terms of Use
  • Privacy Policy
  • Your US State Privacy Rights
  • Children's Online Privacy Policy
  • Interest-Based Ads
  • About Nielsen Measurement
  • Do Not Sell or Share My Personal Information
  • Nat Geo Home
  • Attend a Live Event
  • Book a Trip
  • Inspire Your Kids
  • Shop Nat Geo
  • Visit the D.C. Museum
  • Learn About Our Impact
  • Support Our Mission
  • Advertise With Us
  • Customer Service
  • Renew Subscription
  • Manage Your Subscription
  • Work at Nat Geo
  • Sign Up for Our Newsletters
  • Contribute to Protect the Planet

Copyright © 1996-2015 National Geographic Society Copyright © 2015-2024 National Geographic Partners, LLC. All rights reserved

36 Hours in London

By Desiree Ibekwe Updated Dec. 22, 2022

  • Share full article

scoop

To the casual observer, London may present itself as a capital wedded to traditional and, at times, perplexing institutions, particularly over the past year, from the rotating cast of prime ministers to the choreographed schedule of mourning following Queen Elizabeth II’s death. In actuality, London is a complex knot of old and new. It is also an almost insurmountable task to try conquering the city in one weekend. This itinerary — which traverses an 1800s wine bar loved by a new generation, a night out in South London’s Caribbean heart, centuries of British art under one roof and riverside strolls — is here to help you unlock some of the city’s sprawling, youthful and diverse nature.

Recommendations

  • Tate Britain is a museum in Millbank that charts centuries of art created in Britain.
  • E Pellici is a 122-year-old traditional “caff” in East London.
  • Gay’s the Word , established in 1979, is considered the oldest L.G.B.T.Q. bookstore in London.
  • Brick Lane Vintage Market is a subterranean thrifter’s bazaar, selling vintage and independently made clothing and accessories.
  • Gordon’s Wine Bar , established in 1890 and thought to be London’s oldest wine bar, is situated next to Victoria Embankment Gardens.
  • Cafe TPT and Four Seasons are beloved restaurants in Chinatown, in the city’s West End, known for their roast meats.
  • Speedboat Bar is a new Thai-Chinese fusion restaurant and bar in Chinatown.
  • Fish, Wings and Tings is a South London restaurant serving Caribbean cuisine in Brixton Village market.
  • Negril is a small Caribbean restaurant on Brixton Hill.
  • The Old Queens Head is a pub in Islington, in North London, serving a hearty Sunday roast.
  • The Quality Chop House is a modern British restaurant in Farringdon, in Central London, with an impressive Sunday set menu.
  • Hootananny is a music venue in Brixton with diverse live acts and D.J. sets.
  • Skoob Books and Judd Books are secondhand bookstores with buckets of charm in Bloomsbury.
  • London Review Bookshop is a store connected to the literary magazine London Review of Books with a much-loved cafe.
  • Spitalfields Market in East London is home to independent sellers, food stalls, restaurants and boutiques.
  • Rajmahal Sweets is a cornucopia of treats on Brick Lane where you can get everything from jalebi and Turkish delight to bhajis and pakoras.
  • Atika is a vintage store that spans two floors off Brick Lane; it also sells independent art.
  • Jen’s Plants and Florist is a small, Black-owned plant store off Brick Lane.
  • Queen’s Walk is a walking route that stretches along the South Bank of the River Thames. Highlights on the walk include Shakespeare’s Globe Theater and the Southbank Center.
  • Regent’s Canal is a scenic waterway that stretches for almost nine miles.
  • London’s Tube network is the best way to navigate the city. Many lines run a 24-hour service called the “ Night Tube ” on Fridays and Saturdays. You can also hail a black cab in most areas, or order a car with ride-hailing apps like Uber and Bolt.
  • London’s outpost of The Standard is sleek and stylish with a perfect location — it’s a two-minute walk from King’s Cross Station and a short train ride into Central London. A double room hovers around £349 a night, or about $425.
  • For those after amazing views of the Thames, Sea Containers on the South Bank is an excellent option. A double room starts at £261 a night.
  • The Zetter Townhouse , a 13-room Georgian townhouse in Clerkenwell, is full of charm and eccentric decor. Rooms here start from £249 a night.
  • For those on a budget, rooms at the trendy Mama Shelter in Shoreditch start at around £100 a night, while Assembly in Covent Garden puts you at the center of the city without breaking the bank (rooms start at £100).
  • Shoreditch in East London can be ridiculously hip, but it is a perfect, slightly off-the-beaten-track location for short-term rentals. Marylebone is also a good option for those who want to be closer to the center of town.

trip south london

More From 36 Hours

Have a weekend to explore a destination we’ve got the perfect travel itinerary..

Paris: A different side of the French capital reveals smaller museums, under-the-radar spots in Montmartre and a diverse performance scene .

Montreal : Climb a mountain, wander the waterfront and enjoy a smoked-meat sandwich  in a city with a surprise around every corner.

Cartagena: With a limonada de coco in hand, explore two walkable neighborhoods over a weekend  in this coastal Colombian city.

Glasgow:  Take in Gothic architecture, green riverside walks and a global banquet  in Scotland’s largest city.

Chicago:   ​​ Cycle miles of urban trails, tour a restored Frank Lloyd Wright masterwork and catch golden hour  along Lake Michigan.

Advertisement

facebook pixel

The Best Museums To Visit in South London

The CInema Museum

London Travel Writer

London has a range of incredible museums that are ideal for anyone looking for an educational day out. While West London and Central London are home to some of the capital’s most famous museums, there are an array of enlightening, often-overlooked institutions on offer in South London too.

Horniman museum and gardens.

Just over a 10 minute walk from Forest Hill station, the Horniman Museum and Gardens houses taxidermy and natural history specimens, collections of musical instruments and an aquarium. Set in a 16 acre landscaped garden, the museum was opened in 1901, three years after Frederick John Horniman initially commissioned it. Perhaps the most appealing factor is that visitors are invited to pick up, try on and play with some of the objects.

The Conservatory, Horniman Museum

National Maritime Museum

The type archive.

Situated near the middle of the triangle formed by Oval, Stockwell and Brixton stations, The Type Archive is housed in a building that formerly served as a veterinary hospital during the Victorian era. The museum is brimming with a collection of movable typeface and specimen books, as well as a collection of artefacts that pay homage to the legacy of type founding in England, where famous foundries supplied the world with type in over 300 languages.

people cheering on a mountain

Become a Culture Tripper!

Sign up to our newsletter to save up to 500$ on our unique trips..

See privacy policy .

Imperial War Museum

Located just 5-10 minutes’ walk from Lambeth North station, the Imperial War Museum chronicles the tumultuous history of war. Founded in 1917, the museum encourages visitors to understand the nature of modern warfare and the ‘wartime experience’ by immersing guests in a range interactive exhibits, as well as showcasing an array of military hardware that includes tanks, planes and everything in between.

Planes from the Second World War suspended from the ceiling at Imperial War Museum

Royal Observatory

Commissioned by King Charles II in 1675, the Royal Observatory in Greenwich opened a year later and has since become the home of the prime meridian, marking the international epicenter of time as we know it. The observatory, located on the peripheries of Greenwich Park, has served as an astronomical hub for British stargazers ever since.

Asylum Chapel

Found within Peckham’s northeastern peripheries, Asylum Chapel is based in Caroline Gardens Chapel. The 120-capacity theatre-style, artist-led organisation founded in 2010 is used as a project and exhibition space, a location for film and photography, as well as being available to hire for events, weddings and funeral wakes.

London Dungeon

Immerse the family in the dark and dreary history of the dastardly dungeons that have held captive London’s most notorious criminals and traitors over the years. Situated on the Southbank, between the London Aquarium and the London Eye, the London Dungeon draws visitors in with its cast of committed actors, who tease and terrify passers by. Beware: the actors are far scarier in the darkened dungeons.

The Torturer interactive show at the London Dungeon

Cinema Museum

Founded in 1986 as a charitable organisation, the Cinema Museum is roughly a 10 minute walk from both Kennington and Elephant & Castle stations. The museum is devoted to keeping the grandeur of cinema’s early days alive, cherishing the art form all the way through from the 1890s to the present day. Ronald Grant and Martin Humphries established the museum using their own private collection of cinematographic history and memorabilia.

Garden Museum

Celebrate the history of horticulture at the Garden Museum , found tucked away next to Lambeth Bridge, just over a 10 minute walk from Lambeth North station. Originally established to rescue an abandoned church and knot garden in which famous 17th century gardener John Tradescant is buried, the museum is now a shrine to soft landscaping and its history.

landscape with balloons floating in the air

KEEN TO EXPLORE THE WORLD?

Connect with like-minded people on our premium trips curated by local insiders and with care for the world

Since you are here, we would like to share our vision for the future of travel - and the direction Culture Trip is moving in.

Culture Trip launched in 2011 with a simple yet passionate mission: to inspire people to go beyond their boundaries and experience what makes a place, its people and its culture special and meaningful — and this is still in our DNA today. We are proud that, for more than a decade, millions like you have trusted our award-winning recommendations by people who deeply understand what makes certain places and communities so special.

Increasingly we believe the world needs more meaningful, real-life connections between curious travellers keen to explore the world in a more responsible way. That is why we have intensively curated a collection of premium small-group trips as an invitation to meet and connect with new, like-minded people for once-in-a-lifetime experiences in three categories: Culture Trips, Rail Trips and Private Trips. Our Trips are suitable for both solo travelers, couples and friends who want to explore the world together.

Culture Trips are deeply immersive 5 to 16 days itineraries, that combine authentic local experiences, exciting activities and 4-5* accommodation to look forward to at the end of each day. Our Rail Trips are our most planet-friendly itineraries that invite you to take the scenic route, relax whilst getting under the skin of a destination. Our Private Trips are fully tailored itineraries, curated by our Travel Experts specifically for you, your friends or your family.

We know that many of you worry about the environmental impact of travel and are looking for ways of expanding horizons in ways that do minimal harm - and may even bring benefits. We are committed to go as far as possible in curating our trips with care for the planet. That is why all of our trips are flightless in destination, fully carbon offset - and we have ambitious plans to be net zero in the very near future.

trip south london

See & Do

The 41 best things to do in london.

trip south london

How the Metaverse can help you plan your next trip

trip south london

Bars & Cafes

The best bars in london for stylish nights out.

trip south london

Food & Drink

The best international afternoon teas in london.

trip south london

Places to Stay

Five london hotels to familiarise yourself with.

trip south london

The Coolest Hotels in London

trip south london

Guides & Tips

Must-visit attractions in london.

trip south london

Pillow Talk: Between the Sheets of the Beaumont, Mayfair

trip south london

Top European Cities for a Plant-Based Foodie Fix

trip south london

A High-Rollers Guide to a London Staycation

trip south london

A West End Performer’s Guide to London With Sam Harrison

  • Post ID: 1520414
  • Sponsored? No
  • View Payload

The Working Line

20 Best Hidden Gems in South London, Unusual Views & Food

By: Author The Working Line and

Posted on Published: October 21, 2023  - Last updated: December 16, 2023

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

There may be affiliate links throughout the content you're about to read. When you purchase from my links, I may earn a small commission (at no extra cost to you) which helps me provide even more awesome content for you :)

London’s famous attractions and museums have, in my opinion, nothing on the city’s hidden gems .

From East London to the West End, you’ll find plenty of secret things to do, like for instance, checking out the Leicester Square sculpture trail .

Many hidden gems in South London only await our curious eye – street food markets tourists visiting London for the first time will probably never see, secret gardens, medieval sites.. .

Since we’ve told you here about some really cool hidden gems in North London , the West and the East End, now’s the time to wrap it up with all the secret, unusual places you can visit if you want to tread off the beaten path!

20 Best Hidden Gems in South London, Unusual Views & Food

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

If you’ve been here before, you know that despite having to work on the blog, Pinterest and other Flipboard posts, I would rather walk around in search of new secret places.

From hidden gems in Hackney to Brick Lane’s cafes and street art pieces, I need to break away from work, from business life, and just rest in secret spots.

By unusual and hidden spots, what you can understand are either places that are very local, and that only Londoners really visit/eat at, or secret Japanese gardens, colorful houses, cobbled streets – that kind of place.

If you’re looking for the best things to do in South London around Brixton, Lambeth, Crystal Palace, all those vibrant neighborhoods, you’ve landed exactly where you need to be!

Best Hidden Gems in South London: Ruskin Park, Lambeth

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

First up, in Denmark Hill Lambeth, we have Ruskin Park, which despite being one of South London’s secret spots , is very instagrammable.

The well-maintained gardens are a sight, beautiful with their tree-lined pathways and flower beds, but I have to say one of its highlights is its pergola.

I, for one, love pergolas – the Hampstead Pergola & Hill Gardens are one of my favorite places to relax in London.

Ruskin Park feels peaceful, and from its portico shelter to the pergola and the on-site cafe, it makes for a beautiful park to visit.

Read: The Most Aesthetic Restaurants in London With Statues

Best Things to Do in South London: Visit the Horniman Museum & Gardens

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

I’ve mentioned the Horniman Museum and Gardens quite a few times here on The Working Line, and the Forest Hill Museum is, again, worth a visit.

If you’re looking for secret gardens, you’ll be delighted to discover a sunken garden at the Horniman Museum as well as a stunning English-style garden.

The Museum itself revolves around anthropology, music, and natural history and is one of the most unusual museums to visit in London when you consider its collection of taxidermy animals.

Plus, the gardens are a perfect spot to admire immaculate views of London – and the on-site cafe will allow you to relax while enjoying a great cup of coffee with a cookie!

Read: The Best Hidden Gems in Oxford Street

Beautiful Secret Places in South London: Painted Hall, Greenwich

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

One of Greenwich’s hidden gems, the Painted Hall is often referred to as the Sistine Chapel of the UK – art lovers, you won’t want to leave this place.

Located inside the Old Royal Naval College, whose architecture is nothing if not mind blowing, the Painted Hall was painted by Sir James Thornhill between 1707 and 1726.

The paintings showcased there depict mythological scenes as well as representations of English history, and the intricate details, well…

You can pop by to visit the Painted Hall, or you can book for a guided tour inside the beautiful Baroque interiors.

In any case, you have here one of the best hidden gems in South London, surrounded by other incredible landmarks such as the Cutty Sark ship, the Royal History and beautiful Greenwich Market.

Read: The Most Instagrammable Cafes in London

Best Hidden Gems in South London: Royal Albert Hall, South Kensington

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

One of the most iconic buildings in London, the Royal Albert Hall is renowned for hosting gorgeous ballet performances, classical concerts, live orchestras and many more upscale events.

Located in South Kensington, the Royal Albert Hall is a masterpiece of Victorian architecture, a round building with an incredible dome – all of which can be visited on tours.

These tours show and explain the history and beauty of the Royal Albert Hall, which was gifted from Prince Albert to Queen Victoria.

That’s why you’ll be able to see during a tour the Queen’s private suite, the Royal Retiring Room, and the auditorium in addition to being able to get breakfast, brunch, coffee, and more at the on-site cafes.

However, if what you’re after a fine dining experience , then a visit to the Verdi Restaurant inside the Royal Albert Hall makes for a very romantic moment.

Read: The Cutest Pink Cafes in London

Best Hidden Treasures in South London UK: Dulwich Picture Gallery

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

One of the most beautiful museums in London, the Dulwich Picture Gallery is located in the Dulwich area, and was opened to the public for the first time in 1817.

The art collections there are made of European Old Master paintings, such as Rubens, Canaletto or Rembrandt…

And one of the best sights you will be given to experience if you choose to tread off the beaten path.

Indeed, the Dulwich Picture Gallery is still one of the best hidden gems in South London.

Its quiet beauty can only be equalled by that of stately homes or other museums such as the National Portrait Gallery or the Wallace Collection, which both boast the same vibe.

The museum gardens often feature art installations, and even if there are none when you visit, the beautifully-landscaped gardens are some of the prettiest in London – and worth a visit.

Read: The Most Instagrammable Restaurants in London

Best Hidden Gems in South London: Shad Thames, SE1

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

Located in South East London, Shad Thames is one of the oldest streets in London – and one I love to visit to feel submerged with history.

Indeed, Shad Thames is one of the very magical places that have preserved their cobbled streets and 19th century warehouses.

I was born in Troyes , a medieval French city where there is a plethora of warehouses still kept intact for the beauty’s landscape and history.

As such, you can understand why visiting historically maritime neighborhoods, and other cobbled streets and mews would be so important to my well-being.

Shad Thames also offers some pretty secret passageways and alleys , as well as independent restaurants and coffee shops perfect to pop by before or after breakfast.

And since there are lots of cafes in London Bridge nearby for brunch or just coffee, Shad Thames could be the perfect background for the start of a romantic date .

Read: The Best Brunch in London Bridge

Best Things to Do in South London: Morden Hall Park

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

In search of hidden gems in South London that no one really pays attention to, you will perhaps want to give a try to the Modern Hall Park, a National Trust park located in Morden.

We’re a bit further than Central London with this one, and way further from Brixton and such areas, but the historical buildings at Morden Hall Park will make for a perfect day in London.

Morden Hall itself is an 18th century country house in the heart of the park, and you can also see other historic homes around, notably the Stableyard with its cafe.

If you’re one who loves finding places to see flowers in London during the warm months, check out the landscaped rose garden at Morden Hall Park.

Anyone who enjoys spending time in nature with love the scenic beauty of this South London hidden gem , with its wetlands area, meadows, and the River Wandle passing by.

Read: The Must Have Apps to Survive in London

Best Hidden Gems in South London: Eltham Palace

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

Eltham Palace and its park both date back to the Middle Ages, with the Great Hall built in the 1470s.

Beyond simple yet astonishing medieval decor, Eltham Palace was renovated in the 1930s by the Courtauld family, therefore displays incredible examples of art deco architecture and decoration.

Elegant, sophisticated, Eltham Palace can be visited and also offers incredible gardens including a rock garden and a beautiful bridge from which you can snap a few gorgeous shots of the palace.

However, it really is the Historic Rooms and living quarters that will take your breath away – and whether you’re looking for hidden gems in South London to visit solo or an activity to do with kids, everyone will enjoy the visit.

Read: Why Are There Colorful Streets in London

Best Hidden Gems in South London: Chislehurst Caves

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

Chislehurst Caves bears a name that could seem far from Central London , but is actually quite easy to access from London’s train stations.

The caves date back to the early 19th century and prove beautiful hidden treasures for anyone who loves nature and history.

Indeed, Chislehurst Caves were originally chalk and flint mines and were later repurposed as air raid shelters during WWII.

The stalactites and stalagmites you can admire in the caves have been forming since thousands of years, truly mindblowing sites that surely make Chislehurst Caves one of the best hidden gems in South London.

Read: The Prettiest Christmas Shop Windows in London

Best Hidden Gems in South London UK: Brockwell Park

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

Brockwell Park not only offers spacious green spaces, but is also rooted in history since it used to be farmland in the 19th century, and transformed at the end of the century into a park.

For whoever loves finding beautiful buildings in London, Brockwell Hall is a Grade II-listed building nestled into the park, a stunning place that hosts an art gallery and a coffee shop.

It’s also one of the best places to see the sunset in London over the clear views of the skyscrapers – an incredible hidden gem you’d definitely do well to visit.

One of Brockwell Park’s highlights is its lido – other than swimming pools, there aren’t many places to go swimming outdoors in London and the lido mixes the best of both worlds.

Read: The Best British Shops in London for UK Brands

Best Hidden Gems in South London: The Rookery, Streatham Common

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

One thing I am obsessed with is Japanese gardens, and while The Rookery in Streatham Common isn’t a clearly-defined Japanese garden, it is still decorated with elements that would remind you of places like Kyoto Garden.

The Rookery’s beauty resides in its quiet pond, its beautiful pergola, wildlife and structured landscapes.

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

Part of the historic garden is very formal, very English, while the other part feels wild, of the kind of wilderness that would on the other hand remind you of Richmond Park.

If you’re ever looking for free rooftops in London , I would invite you to change your plans and maybe admire the direct views on the city’s skyscrapers from The Rookery.

Another highlight of The Rookery is the Victorian Rock garden, made from rock formations, alpine plants and, wait for it – its tiny waterfall!

Read: The Best Harry Potter Filming Locations in London

Best Hidden Gems in South London: Crystal Palace Park

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

One of the most beautiful parks in London, Crystal Palace Park is located in the Crystal Palace area, which you can reach quite easily with the Overground.

One of the park’s highlights is the Dinosaur court (pictured above), which features a few life-size dinosaur statues created in the 19th century.

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

The Crystal Palace Park Maze is another good reason to visit the park.

Indeed, there aren’t many mazes and labyrinths in London, are there, and this beautifully-curated one makes for a very secret place to visit solo, with kids or with your date.

While Crystal Palace Park is quite huge, I would definitely recommend spending a few hours there in search of the landscaped gardens, cute cafes and the fishing lake.

If you get hungry, you can get a light breakfast or brunch at one of the on-site cafes, too, so it really makes for a perfect day in South London!

Read: The Best Cheap Day Trips from London

Beautiful Secret Places in South London: Crystal Palace Subway

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

One of my favorite hidden gems in South London is the Crystal Palace Subway, a historic underground passageway which was built in 1865 and closed in 1954 as it became increasingly less used.

The Crystal Palace Subway showcases some of the most beautiful architecture in London, though, with Victorian design, arched ceilings, decorative tiles and wrought-iron details.

This magical place is unfortunately only occasionally open for tours and various events, which is why I would recommend you check online for the next events.

A visit to the Crystal Palace Subway is still a really secret thing to do in London when you get tired of beautiful St Paul’s and Oxford Street , though, and one that will prove very rewarding.

Read: The Best Things to Do in Camden Town

Best Hidden Gems in South London: Deptford Market Yard

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

About 25 to 30 mns away from Greenwich DLR station, you will find the picturesque neighborhood of Deptford, and in there, the Deptford Market Yard.

One of the most secret street food markets in London, Deptford Market Yard offers brunch, sushi, vegan dishes, pizza and much more.

What I prefer in this area are all the boutiques and unique shops – from home decor to clothes and accessories, you’ll find many a local business offering things to buy that tourists will sadly never get to see.

It’s one of the perks of living in London, isn’t it – and Deptford Market Yard is also a great spot to visit in South London for live performances, exhibitions and other cultural events.

Read: Brick Lane’s Street Art Self Walking Tour

Best Hidden Treasures in South London UK: Brixton Village

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

Brixton Village is also known as Brixton Village Market, and I have to admit this is one of the only places I visit to buy shea butter in London.

Like, raw shea butter along with Caribbean food, African, Asian, Latin American and various European dishes.

But since a great part of the Brixton area is Jamaican, a good reason to visit Brixton Village to discover more about the culture, from the cuisine to the unique vintage, spice and clothes shops.

Brixton Village Market, and the whole area in general is very lively, vibrant with colors, food and culture – there are plenty of amazing cafes in Brixton to visit to work, chill, or have incredible pastries + coffee combos.

Nearby, you have some of London’s best budget shops – Savers, Poundland, and independent, unique shops are all to be found at Brixton, a lively hub in the city!

Read: The Prettiest Mews in London

Best Hidden Gem Restaurants & Street Foods in South London

Best hidden gem food spots in south london: apple blue patisserie, balham.

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

One of South London’s best hidden food gems, Apple Blue Patisserie in Balham caters to all kinds of diners – whether you need halal brunch or vegan treats, you’ll find them there.

The Apple Blue is not only one of the best restaurants in Balham ; it’s also very instagrammable, and you’ll be able to taste there freshly-baked croissants, macarons , layered cakes…

The whole shindig.

If you’ve been here before, you know I’m French and am always searching for new French patisseries in London .

While the Apple Blue is not properly French, the quality of their croissants , pains au chocolat and other goodies makes up for its not-Frenchness.

Read: The Prettiest Pink Places in London

Best Hidden Food Gems in South London: Mercato Metropolitano, Elephant & Castle

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

Mercato Metropolitano now has several branches in London, namely one in Mayfair and the original one in Elephant & Castle.

Located just a stone’s throw away from Elephant & Castle, Mercato Metropolitano is one of the only places you can still get lunch under £5 in London.

With winding pathways, casual dining areas, and a secret coffee shop slash bar with mannequins and a piano inside, Mercato Metropolitano caters to artists at heart.

From pho to proper Neapolitan pizza , fresh cheese and other artisanal products, that’s a place where you can come with your friends in London to attend live music performances and other cool events.

Read: The Best Harry Potter Things to Do in London

Best Hidden Gem Restaurants in South London UK: Pho City, Greenwich

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

I used to work at St Christopher’s Inns in Greenwich, and loved my time living there because it meant I could really go out and discover all the hidden treasures of the area.

Namely, I quickly understood Greenwich is one of the prettiest villages in London – if not a village, at least a place that feels like it.

When you’re walking around , you get hungry – that’s the rule, and that’s when you should visit Pho City, close to the DLR station.

Pho City probably offers some of the best pho in London , with authentic flavors and those dishes we love so much – of course, pho, but also bo bun, banh mi, and various rice and noodle dishes.

Finding a great banh mi in London is harder than it looks, and whether you’re dining in or popping by to take away and have a picnic close to Cutty Sark with a view of the Canary Wharf skyscrapers, you’ll love Pho City.

Read: How to Live in London on a Budget

Best Hidden Food Gems in South London: Ruby’s of London, Greenwich Market

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

Yes, Ruby’s of London does offer some of the best vegan doughnuts in London, but that’s not all.

Nestled inside the quaint Greenwich Market, with all its secret alleys and boutiques, Ruby’s of London is famous for its vegan and gluten free desserts.

Delicious cupcakes, blondies, cookies, brownies and even wedding and birthday cakes – Ruby’s has it all.

The bakery slash pastry shops has a few branches scattered around London, but if you’re looking for places to eat in Greenwich, that’s a good place to start.

Brown, black, white, red and pink cupcakes, gorgeous cookies…

The stall’s beauty may not equal all the floral cafes and restaurants we love to snap shots of, but the pastries’ quality makes up for it – big time.

Read: How to Eat in London on a Budget

Best Hidden Food Gems in South London UK: WatchHouse Cafe, Bermondsey

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

WatchHouse Cafe isn’t only one of the best hidden gems in South London, but in the whole of London.

Where else will you find a coffee shop established inside a 19th century graveyard watch house?

That’s where it gets its name, and it’s interesting to note that WatchHouse Cafe Bermondsey, while it has other decently-sized coffee shops, is one of the smallest cafes in London.

Specialty coffee is to be enjoyed at one of the very few tables inside or on the terrace, from pour-over to espresso and, of course, you’ll be able to get a few delicious croissants, carrot cakes, and muffins there.

There are plenty of hidden gems in Bermondsey , such as independent cafes and restaurants, and while we’re really close to London Bridge, it’s still South London – and one of its best kept secrets.

Read: The Best Things to Do in London Bridge

best hidden gems in london - unusual walks in london - secret things to do in south london - secret trails london - outdoor activities in south london - magical places in south london - secret gardens in london - beautiful palaces in london - castles - hidden food gems in london - best things to do in south london - south london at night - secret places in south london - hidden treasures - hidden gem restaurants south london - hidden gems outside london

There you have them, all the best hidden gems in South London, from The Rookery in Streatham Common to the Crystal Palace Subway!

If I may, another magical place to visit, at least from the outside, is Crystal Palace itself since it’s one of the most beautiful palaces in London .

There are of course beautiful neighborhoods in South London that offer cobbled streets, other green spaces from which you can see the view on London and many independent coffee shops and restaurants.

But this is a great start if you’re looking for secret places to tread off the beaten path!

And if you’d like to continue with some other beautiful spots, check out all the hidden gems in Soho and Carnaby Street as well – or may I invite you to discover the most beautiful churches in London ?

Until next time!

Other London Travel

  • How to Spend 24 Hours in London
  • How to Save Money on Groceries in London
  • The Best Makeup Shops in London
  • The Best Cheap Makeup Shops in London
  • The Best Candle Shops in London
  • The Best TK Maxx in London
  • The Best Secondhand Bookshops in London
  • The Best Stationery Shops in London
  • The Most Secret Beaches in London
  • The Best British Drugstore Makeup Brands
  • Poundland Makeup Gallery Cosmetics Review
  • The Best Things to Do in Soho
  • The Best Things to Do in Canary Wharf
  • The Best Things to Do in London When it Rains
  • The Most Colorful Places in London
  • The Most Colorful Streets in Camden
  • The Most Colorful Streets in Notting Hill

Other London Food Reviews

  • Chinese Tapas House Chinatown Review
  • Whitcomb’s at the Londoner Leicester Square Review
  • Heritage Soho – Modern European Restaurant Review
  • Aqua Kyoto Soho Review
  • Cafe Piazza Hay’s Galleria Review
  • Bim’s Edmonton – Halal Burgers Review
  • Host Cafe – St Paul’s Hidden Church Cafe Review
  • Lisboa Patisserie Notting Hill Review
  • Ole & Steen Charing Cross Road Review
  • Bread Ahead Bakery Borough Market Review
  • Bread Ahead Bakery Wembley Review
  • Ore Cafe Brompton Review
  • Beigel Shop Brick Lane Review
  • Dark Sugars Brick Lane Review
  • Oodles Chinese Holborn Review
  • Elan Cafe Knightsbridge Review
  • Elan Cafe Wardour Street Review
  • Song Que Cafe Shoreditch Review

Other London Food

  • The Prettiest Restaurants in Mayfair
  • The Best Doughnuts in London
  • The Best Bagels in London
  • The Best Cinnamon Buns in London
  • The Best Ice Cream in London
  • The Best Vegan Doughnuts in London
  • The Best Restaurants in Knightsbridge
  • The Best Restaurants in Whitechapel
  • The Best Restaurants in Walthamstow
  • The Best Italian Cafes in London
  • The Best Breakfast in Notting Hill
  • The Best Vegan Breakfast in London
  • The Best Cat Cafes in London
  • The Best Halal Steaks in London
  • The Best Halal Brunch in London
  • The Best Halal Burgers in London
  • The Best Halal Breakfast in London

Other London Coworking

  • The Best Chain Cafes in London To Work
  • The Best Cafes To Work in London and Study
  • The Best Cafes in Camden To Study and Work
  • The Best 24 Hour Places to Study in London
  • The Best Cafes to Work in Canary Wharf
  • The Best Cafes to Work in Central London
  • The Best Cafes to Work in South London
  • The Best Cafes to Work in East London
  • The Best Cafes to Work in North London
  • The Best Cafes to Work in West London
  • The best cafes to work in Covent Garden
  • The best free libraries in London to study
  • the best free study spaces in London
  • the best cafes in Notting Hill to work

trip south london

The Working Line

Sam is a certified fashion makeup artist, a freelance writer, a blogger and a digital nomad. Since 2019, she roams around the world, from London to Rome and shares her knowledge about makeup, scented candles, travel, blogging and the digital nomad lifestyle.

  • The Working Line https://theworkingline.com/author/theworkingline/ Spring in Rome: The Must-Visit Places For Your Bucket List
  • The Working Line https://theworkingline.com/author/theworkingline/ MAC MACximal Lipstick vs Classic MAC Shades: Swatch Fest
  • The Working Line https://theworkingline.com/author/theworkingline/ Vendula London, London's Must-Visit Secret British Shop
  • The Working Line https://theworkingline.com/author/theworkingline/ 23 Secret and Free Museums in Rome You've Never Heard Of
  • 20 Instagrammable and Secret Cafes in London You Can't Miss
  • The Most Beautiful Shopping Arcades in London
  • London's Most Secret Alleys, Old Streets & Hidden Passageways
  • Level 8 Luminous Textured Luggage Set Review - Sturdy Suitcases On The Radar
  • Find South Bank London on Twitter
  • Find South Bank London on Facebook
  • Find South Bank London on Instagram

Explore the vibrant culture, dining, and entertainment of South Bank.

Discover iconic landmarks, world-class theatre, diverse cuisine, and memorable experiences in London's favourite riverside neighbourhood.

Where to Eat & Drink

South Bank has a café, restaurant, pub and bar for every occasion. Take your pick from street food, fine dining, glam rooftop bars, contemporary cuisine, cosy pubs, lively pop-ups, family-friendly favourites, boozy brunches and more.

Things to See & Do

Explore an art gallery or museum, embark on a thrilling immersive experience, take a tour of the city’s rich history or simply soak in the best riverside views of London – your next adventure starts here in South Bank.

What's On

National Theatre

London Tide

A new adaptation of Charles Dickens' Our Mutual Friend set to a new musical score by PJ Harvey.

Civil War at BFI IMAX

Alex Garland's explosive blockbuster envisions mass social breakdown in a dystopian near-future USA.

Hayward Gallery

When Forms Come Alive

A joyous celebration of sculpture and installation spanning 50 years of contemporary art.

The Old Vic

Rosie Sheehy stars in this acclaimed production of Sophie Treadwell's gripping play.

Witness for the Prosecution

Experience Agatha Christie's gripping story of justice, passion and betrayal in a unique courtroom setting

Underdog: The Other Other Brontë

Sarah Gordon's new play is an irreverent retelling of the life and legend of the Brontë sisters.

Lambeth Palace Library

Women and the Church of England

Delve into the stories of the women whose steps led the way towards equal ministry within the Church of England.

Between the Bridges

Brew//LDN beer festival

The UK's largest and most diverse craft beer festival comes to South Bank.

The Garden Museum

Jean-Marie Toulgouat: Gardening Giverny

An exhibition devoted to the garden paintings of the post-war French artist Jean-Marie Toulgouat.

Southbank Centre

Salman Rushdie: Knife

Catch Salman Rushdie in conversation with Erica Wagner for the launch of his memoir Knife .

Get some inspiration

Best brunch spots.

From the bottomless to the kind you can enjoy with a relaxed coffee, here's a round up of brunching on South Bank.

South Bank's best sunset views

Cameras at the ready - here’s our guide to the best places to enjoy the sunset in South Bank...

What to do on a rainy day in South Bank

Drizzly weather putting a dampener on your South Bank sightseeing plans? Fear not! There's so much to enjoy indoors.

Kid-Friendly Restaurants in South Bank

Looking for somewhere to eat out with the kids? Here's our round-up of South Bank's best family-friendly dining options.

Where To Watch Sport in South Bank

Football, rugby, tennis or the Super Bowl, here's your guide to where to watch all the sporting action on the big screen in South Bank.

Top Spots For A Sunday Lunch

The top places in South Bank to enjoy that quintessentially British Sunday Roast!

South Bank Pre-Theatre Dining

Cut the drama out of choosing where to eat with these top pre-theatre dining options before heading to your show.

15 ideas for a South Bank family day out

London's favourite riverside destination is packed with iconic attractions that will appeal to all ages.

Deals, Discounts and Special Offers

Each month we round up some of the best deals and offers in South Bank.

Top Free Things To Do in South Bank

You don't need to spend a fortune to enjoy a great day out sightseeing in South Bank.

Not to be missed

Between the bridges is popping up again in south bank.

Get ready for a summer of revelry and entertainment as Between the Bridges returns to South Bank this summer.

Queen Elizabeth Hall roof garden has reopened

The Southbank Centre’s wonderful rooftop wildflower garden has reopened for the spring and summer season.

The Paddington Bear Experience is coming to South Bank in May!

Get your tickets for The Paddington Bear™ Experience, officially coming to South Bank in May 2024.

Sign up to our newsletter to get all the latest updates straight to your inbox.

We use Mailchimp as our marketing platform. By subscribing, you acknowledge that your information will be transferred to Mailchimp for processing. Learn more about Mailchimp's privacy practices.

South England road trip - Wiltshire village of Castle Combe

South England road trip - The best of the UK from London

Looking to experience the best of the UK on a road trip? We've planned the ultimate south England road trip just for you. It's an epic 12 day round trip from London, taking in some of the major cities like Oxford, Bath, Bristol and Exeter, before cruising along the Jurassic Coast, hitting up Stonehenge, and heading along the south coast to Brighton. Read on for all the best restaurants to eat at, museums to visit, hotels to stay in and activities to do.

Day 1: London to Oxford - Brunch, the University of Oxford, & punting

Pick up your hire car and drive to oxford in time for lunch.

Welcome to the first day of your road trip! Arrive in London as early as possible, pick up your hire car if you're renting one, and set off for Oxford. The drive is only 60 miles direct along the A40 and M40 and takes about an hour and 45 minutes.

Parking in Oxford is pretty easy if you can't leave your car at your hotel, with a good number of car parks available that allow you to stay overnight. If you want to leave your car in the city centre, then opt for Oxpens car park, or for a park-and-ride service Redbridge is your best bet.

Once you've made it into town, make your way to the Vaults & Garden Cafe for some food. Housed in a 14th-century building with a beautiful vaulted ceiling connected to the University Church of St Mary the Virgin, this cafe will give you an introduction to the historic city you're about to explore, with the addition of some great breakfast.

Lunch is served between 11am and 2pm, and includes dishes from all over the world such as curries, tagines, and of course British delicacies. Enjoy your food either inside beneath the vaults or outside in the garden.

The cafe sources all local, organic and ethically sourced ingredients, and operates a 'no waste catering' policy, so it's a great business to support.

Visit the sights in Radcliffe Square

Conveniently, the cafe is located right next to your first Oxford stop, Radcliffe Square, so once you've finished your brunch step outside and begin your sightseeing.

Cobbled Radcliffe Square forms the heart of the University, and is home to three main sights: Bodleian Library, Radcliffe Camera (also a library), and University Church of St Mary the Virgin.

The Radcliffe Camera in Radcliffe Square, Oxford

The Bodleian Library will be the main place you visit, and includes the ornate Divinity School (the oldest teaching hall of the University), Convocation House (two grand chambers which have hosted the English Parliament), the Chancellor's Court (where writers Oscar Wilde and Percy Bysshe Shelley went on trial), and Gladstone Link which connects the library with Radcliffe Camera.

Fun fact: parts of the Bodleian Library were used as filming locations for the Harry Potter movies, including the Divinity School which served as the Hogwarts hospital wing, and Duke Humfrey's Library which you might recognise from Harry's late-night library trip under the invisibility cloak in the first movie.

Access to the two libraries is limited without a tour, so we recommend you opt for one of the following four options (tickets can either be purchased online or at the Great Gate ticket office):

  • A 30-minute tour which takes you round the most beautiful parts of the Bodleian Library, including the Divinity School and Duke Humfrey's medieval library. The tour costs £6 and runs regularly every afternoon.
  • A 60-minute tour that covers the same as the 30-minute option with the addition of Convocation House and Chancellor's Court. This tour costs £9 and runs regularly every morning.
  • A 90-minute tour which includes all of the above plus the Radcliffe Camera (only available to view through this tour) and Gladstone Link. This tour costs £15 and only runs on Wednesdays and Saturdays at 9.15am, and Sundays at 11.15am and 1.15pm.
  • There is also a short option that lasts ten minutes and takes you around the Divinity School only. This costs £1 and runs between 9am and 5pm Monday to Saturday, and from 11am to 5pm on Sundays.

Interior view of the Divinity School in the Bodleian Library, Oxford

Note: the majority of what you'll visit in Oxford is connected to Oxford University, so we advise downloading the 'Explore the University of Oxford' brochure from their website to guide you.

Leave the library and admire the Bridge of Sighs

Another iconic Oxford landmark, the Bridge of Sighs, is just around the corner from the main entrance to the Library, so head there next.

Located on New College Lane, the bridge is a skyway connecting the old and new quadrangles of Hereford College, and bears an uncanny resemblance to the bridge of the same name in Venice. Legend has it that the bridge borrowed this name from its Venetian cousin to symbolise the sighs of worrying students on their way to exams, but that's just one of many myths to do with this landmark.

Walk under the bridge, snap some photos, and let out some symbolic signs of your own before you move on.

Bridge of Sighs, Oxford

Walk through the pretty Oxford streets to Christ Church College

A trip to Oxford wouldn't be complete without a nosey round one of the University colleges, so take a picturesque stroll from the Bridge past Exeter, Jesus, and Lincoln Colleges to get to one of the largest and most famous - Christ Church.

This college is made up of a group of stunning buildings, including the Tom Tower designed by Sir Christopher Wren (of St Paul's Cathedral fame), the Tom Quad, the largest quad in Oxford, and the Great Dining Hall which also featured in Harry Potter.

This college's list of alumni is also super impressive, including 13 British prime ministers and the author of Alice in Wonderland. Today, the college welcomes around 450 undergraduates and 150 graduate students from all over the world to study at this historic, prestigious institution, mingling modern student life with rich history.

Standard admission to tour the college costs £8 to £10 (depending on the time of year) and grants access to the Quads, Cloister, Hall Staircase, and Dining Hall, with tickets available online (released each Thursday for the following week), or from the Meadow Gate ticket kiosk.

You can opt for an hour-long tour if you prefer which cost between £13 and £17, but be aware that this isn't possible in July and August.

Note: if areas of the college are in use by the students or staff during your visit they may be closed; for example, you won't be able to visit the Dining Hall during meal times.

The Cathedral and Dining Hall at Christ Church College, Oxford

Spend the rest of the afternoon punting on the River Cherwell

You should have a little time left before it gets dark, so walk east from Christ Church to the Magdalen Bridge Boat House to hire a traditional punt.

These long wooden boats are propelled by a pole pushed against the river bed, and lounging on one along a British waterway is an iconic and relaxing activity, as long as you don't fall in the water, that is…

Punts take up to five people, and you can either hire one and brave steering it yourself, or pay a professional chauffeur to take you along the river; we'd recommend going without the driver, as steering is great fun and not very difficult once you get the hang of it! Punts cost £22 per hour to hire.

People punting in Oxford next to colourful boats

Drive to Gee's Restaurant & Bar for dinner

Collapse at your hotel for a while after your busy day, then hop in the car and drive to Gee's Restaurant & Bar for dinner.

Although the restaurant isn't that far away (it's around a ten-minute drive), we're guessing you'll be all walked-out by this point, so take the car and park on Canterbury Road where you can stay for free for two hours.

This Mediterranean restaurant is housed in a beautiful Victorian Glasshouse filled with plants and olive trees, and has a menu that changes daily to reflect the best of the season. Expect great vegetarian options as well as delicious meat and fish dishes, plus a tempting cocktail list to go alongside your food (with non-alcoholic concoctions available for whomever's driving).

Day 2: Oxford to Bath to Bristol - Bath sights & coffee on your way to Bristol

Drive to Bath via the Cotswolds

Have breakfast and set off early on day four to drive to Bath.

Rather than connecting with the M4 when you reach Swindon, take a scenic detour by following the A419 up to Cirencester, then wriggling south through the country lanes of the Cotswolds. This route beats taking a boring motorway any day, and will take you past sprawling green fields and quaint British villages for a taste of rural England.

The drive should take around two hours, but take your time on the small country roads - passing other vehicles can be a tricky manoeuvre!

Travel tip: if you're a less confident driver and don't fancy squeezing past other cars on tight lanes, then follow the A433 - it's still really scenic, just a little wider!

A road through the Cotswolds, England

Park the car and walk into the centre of Bath to visit the Roman Baths

Park the car in Manvers Street car park which is a short walk from the centre of town. You have to pay upfront for the number of hours you're going to stay, so have a rough idea of what time you want to leave to arrive in Bristol later on.

Staying for four hours costs £6.40, and for six hours costs £9.60.

The Roman Baths are just a five-minute walk from the car park, so head there first. Probably the most iconic landmark in the city, this complex of thermal baths is a well-preserved Roman site that was once used for public bathing.

Geothermal energy and pressure cause the warm water to rise from thousands of metres under the ground to the surface, supplying both these ancient baths and the modern Thermae Bath Spa with steaming hot water.

You can't bathe in the Roman Baths anymore, but nearby Thermae Bath Spa is a beautiful modern complex where you can safely enjoy water from the same source, if you want to.

It's thought that the baths could have also been a centre of worship for the Celts, with the springs dedicated to the goddess Sulis, so this is a spiritual as well as recreational landmark to visit.

Admission costs £16.50 and grants you access to all areas of the Baths, including the Great Bath, the Temple Precinct where the Romans once worshipped, the changing areas of the East Baths, and the icy plunge pool of the West Baths.

Your ticket includes a free multimedia guide available in 12 languages, and also allows you to join informative public tours that start at the Great Bath on the hour every hour from 10am.

Steam rising off the water at the Roman Baths, Bath

Grab lunch and admire Bath Abbey

By the time you've finished at the Baths it'll be time for lunch, so grab a quick bite nearby. There are loads of great cafes in the area, but we recommend Mokoko Coffee which serves up generous plates of colourful salads and slices of quiche that'll be sure to fill you up for the rest of your Bath exploring.

Mokoko and the Baths are right next to Bath Abbey, so have a quick look at this historic church before moving on to explore the rest of town.

Built with iconic golden Bath stone, it's definitely worth popping inside this towering Gothic abbey, even just for a quick gaze at the vaulted ceiling, impressive stained glass windows, and huge organ.

It's free to go inside, but it's recommended that adults give a donation of £4 which goes towards maintaining this beautiful building.

Outside shot of Bath Abbey

Wander round Bath and visit the Royal Crescent

From here stroll up Union Street and through the main pedestrianised shopping area, taking in the historic buildings and enjoying Bath's friendly atmosphere - travel tip: if you're visiting around Christmas, you'll find many of it's Christmas market stalls here.

Connect up with Milsom Street, then cross over the A4 and walk up tiny Bartlett Street, passing its cosy cafes and boutique shops which lead to the elegant 18th century Bath Assembly Rooms.

Admire the outside of this beautiful building, before heading west on Bennett Street to The Circus - a historic ring of Georgian townhouses that will make you envy anyone lucky enough to live there.

Continue walking west from here and you'll get to an even bigger curve of impressive houses at the Royal Crescent. Synonymous with Bath, this half-moon of houses is a must-see attraction, and one of the greatest examples of Georgian architecture in the whole of the UK.

The crescent overlooks a pristine green lawn, so just enjoy this space and snap some photos of the houses, or if your curiosity gets the better of you, number one is a museum that has been furnished as it might have been in the 18th century, so you can get a feel for how it's residents would have lived. Admission costs £10.30 for adults.

A view around the Royal Crescent in Bath on a sunny day

Go for coffee at Colonna and Small's

Walk back to The Circus then south down Gay Street to Queen Square where you'll find Colonna and Small's in the southwestern corner.

This speciality coffee shop is all about the vibrant, varied, and exciting flavours that come from coffee beans, serving up the ultimate brew. The modern interiors are chic and minimalist whilst remaining cosy, and the staff are really friendly and on hand to talk you through the options and suggest which bean and style of coffee would be ideal for you.

If you love coffee or you're in the market for learning more about it, then this is the place to go. Relax with your ideal coffee, buy a bag of beans to take home, and head back to the car to drive to Bristol.

Coffee at Colonna and Small's, Bath

Drive to Bristol and go for dinner at Bosco Pizzeria

Driving to Bristol from Bath is super easy and takes less than an hour - simply follow the A36 and A4 to join up with Victoria Street in Bristol.

Find your hotel, park your car, freshen up and head to Clifton Village for dinner. This is one of the nicest areas of the city, made up of stunning Georgian houses, leafy green spaces, elegant boutiques, amazing cafes and restaurants, and the iconic Clifton Suspension Bridge.

You'll be back in Clifton on day five to really make the most of this picturesque area of town, but for now head to Bosco Pizzeria for a well-earned dinner.

This classy pizza joint is actually the offshoot of its hugely successful original restaurant on Whiteladies Road, and is a celebration of the freshness and simplicity of Italian cooking.

There are loads of different dishes on the menu, including mouthwatering pasta, tasty small plates, and hearty meat and fish options, however the real star of the show is their wood-fired pizza which is made fresh to order in the open pizza kitchen in the centre of the restaurant.

For the meat-eaters among you, we'd recommend the Emilia Romagna topped with Italian sausage, creamy fior di latte mozzarella, sweet roasted peppers, basil, and crunchy breadcrumbs, and for the veggies the funghi - a pizza bianco (with a creamy instead of tomatoey base) topped with mushrooms, mozzarella, mascarpone, and truffle oil (yes, it's as good as it sounds).

Book ahead online to ensure you get a table, and order a Negroni or Aperol Spritz to sip as you wait for your food to arrive.

Visit the Clifton Suspension Bridge by night

Seeing as you're in Clifton after sundown, walk around the corner to the Clifton Suspension Bridge; you'll see it again on day five, however it's quite a different sight admiring it all lit up and floating above the Avon Gorge at night.

Designed by world-renowned engineer Isambard Kingdom Brunel, this bridge has become one of Bristol's most recognisable landmarks, so it's the ideal way to kick off your sightseeing.

Gaze at the lights for a while, then head back to your hotel to get some rest ready for a busy day five.

Clifton Suspension Bridge lit up at night, Bristol

Day 3: Bristol - Explore the city, dinner, & an evening activity

Start day 5 at bristol harbourside and visit the arnolfini gallery.

Kick off day five at Bristol Harbourside. This central area of the city was once a busy dock, buzzing with merchants trading goods and ships setting sail for epic voyages. Today it's a little more modern, and filled with restaurants, bars, shops, and hotels, as well as some of the city's top attractions including Brunel's SS Great Britain ship, the We The Curious science museum, Bristol Aquarium, and the Watershed independent cinema.

Have a walk around the area, then head to the Arnolfini arts centre as your first stop.

Founded in 1961, this modern gallery space exhibits everything from quirky art to visual performances, and is a must-see Bristol attraction to get a feel for this city's creative flare.

The centre is predominantly an art gallery and is partnered with the famous Tate, so expect some great visual art during your visit. The centre is free to enter, however it's a good idea to drop a few pounds into the donations pot as it's a charity that relies on the generosity of its visitors to run.

The Arnolfini in Bristol across the harbour

Spot Banksy's graffiti on Park Street and climb Cabot Tower

When you leave the gallery, head north towards the Bristol Hippodrome theatre, then east past College Green and Bristol Cathedral to walk up famous Park Street.

This hill is lined with boutique, music, and book shops as well as quaint cafes, cosy restaurants, and lively bars, and offers a super scenic walk with the University of Bristol's towering Wills Memorial building at the top.

View up Park Street in Bristol with the Wills Memorial building at the top

Before you head up the hill make sure you spot one of Bristol's most famous pieces of street art by the elusive graffiti artist Banksy, one of the city's most famous natives.

The piece, provocatively named 'Well Hung Lover', is painted on the side of a building on the right hand side at the bottom of the street.

A famous Banksy graffiti on the side of a building in Bristol

Once you've admired the graffiti continue walking most of the way up the hill, dipping into the shops to give your legs a rest (it's pretty steep). Just before you reach the top, turn left onto Charlotte Street to get to Brandon Hill park.

The park is, you guessed it, on top of a hill, so you get amazing views of Bristol's rows of colourful houses and the sprawling countryside just outside its limits.

For even better views and a proper look at the Wills Memorial building, climb to the top of Cabot Tower located in the centre of the park.

The tower is a free public fixture, so climb its narrow staircase and make sure you walk the full way around the viewing area at the top for 360 degree views of the city.

View of colourful houses from Brandon Hill Park, Bristol

Go for lunch at The Epiphany Cafe

Leave via the north end of the park and make your way through Berkeley Square to Queen's Road. Walk past the Wills Memorial to see it up close, then follow the road east towards the Royal West of England Academy, an art school and gallery which is home to The Epiphany Cafe .

This stylish, fuss-free cafe is super friendly and welcoming, and all about award-winning coffee, the freshest locally sourced ingredients, and mouth-watering cakes, making it an amazing lunch spot.

Their offering is simple yet delicious, with a selection of toasties, soups, quiches, and salads that can all be served up in either the cosy plant-filled cafe or on the academy's roof terrace overlooking another of the University's beautiful historic buildings - the Victoria Rooms.

Make sure you leave room for coffee and cake (try the raspberry chocolate brownies or polenta cake if they have them on the counter that day), before you set off for your next stop, Clifton Village.

Coffee and cake at Epiphany Cafe, Bristol

Wander round Clifton Village and visit the Camera Obscura or the Giant's Cave

From the cafe walk west into Clifton Village, following Queen's Road past the University Student Union and across grassy Victoria Square.

The western corner of the square will lead you through a picturesque archway into a lovely pedestrianised area of cafes and shops that marks the start of the village.

Spend some time exploring the area of your own accord - it's easy to walk around Clifton for hours admiring the beautiful houses on Royal York Crescent and the local businesses on Princess Victoria Street.

When you're ready to visit your next attraction, walk to the Clifton Suspension Bridge (notice how different it looks in daylight) and choose one of the following:

  • Enjoy 360 degree views of the Bridge and Clifton through the Bristol Camera Obscura - This clever type of camera projects a live image of the outside through a pinprick hole, and Bristol's room-sized version allows you to see people milling around and cars cruising over the bridge in real time - it's pretty magical. Entrance to the Camera Obscura costs £2.50.
  • Climb down to the Giant's Cave - Bristolian folklore states that two giants, Goram and Ghyston, once lived in this cave in the Avon Gorge, and today you can climb through the 61-metre long tunnel to the cave which opens out onto a viewing platform right on the cliff face. It's something a little bit different and you'll get a completely unique view of the area you can't get from anywhere else. Entry to the Giant's Cave costs £2.50.

Note: if you fancy doing both things, you can get a combined ticket for £4.

Have an early evening drink at the iconic Coronation Tap pub

As the afternoon comes to a close it's about time for a drink, and there's nowhere more iconic in Bristol than the Coronation Tap.

Known by locals as The Cori Tap, this centuries-old pub is the oldest cider house in the city and brews its own Exhibition cider which is exclusively sold on-site. You can only get it by the half pint because of its notoriously high alcohol content, so just have one or two whilst you soak up the pub's character. You'll find The Cori Tap in the heart of Clifton Village at the end of Portland Street.

Alternatively, if strong cider isn't your thing or the evening is too nice to be sat inside a pub, head to the White Lion Bar in the Avon Gorge Hotel which has one of the biggest terraces in the South West.

This outdoor area overlooks the Suspension Bridge (we've mentioned it a lot but views of the bridge don't get old, promise!) and surrounding countryside, and is heated for when things start to get a bit chilly, so you can comfortably sit back, sip your favourite drink, and enjoy your surroundings.

People enjoying the White Lion bar terrace in the sunshine in Bristol

Book a table at Souk Kitchen for dinner and enjoy an evening activity

Book ahead to make sure you get a table at Souk Kitchen for dinner on day five, then head there either straight from the bar or via your hotel.

This Mediterranean restaurant has a rustic Middle Eastern feel inspired by markets and street food stalls of Arab and Berber cities, and gives diners the choice between mezze small plates and bigger main dishes.

We think the mezze is the best option, and the menu regularly changes depending on the season so there's always something fresh and delicious to get stuck in to. T

he dishes and dining style are relaxed, with warm flickering candles and colourful furnishings making it a welcoming, elegant spot for your final Bristol dinner. There are two branches of the restaurant, but opt for the one on Apsley Road as it's on the edge of Clifton.

Make time for one last activity to tie up your stay in Bristol and get a feel for this buzzing city after dark. We've selected three different options to suit every mood:

  • Something lively - Check ahead what's going on aboard Thekla during your stay and go to a gig. This alternative music venue is actually a boat that's permanently docked on the harbour that hosts bands and DJs, and is a really fun place to head for an evening of music. You can access most of the boat, so make sure you explore both floors and the outside deck, and it turns into a club every Thursday and Saturday (and occasionally other nights too) so you can stay and dance the night away if you want to.
  • Something easy-going - Head to the Watershed and catch a film. This cultural arts centre focuses on digital media and is home to three cinemas screening everything from new releases, to foreign films, to old classics, and is a great place if you're in the market for a relaxed evening of entertainment.
  • Something social - If you fancy going somewhere for a chinwag with your road trip companion then we recommend heading for a cocktail at Milk Thistle . This off-the-beaten-path prohibition bar mixes up some of the best cocktails in the city, including twists on the classics, their own unique concoctions, and tailor-made creations for their customers. Don't drink alcohol? Not a problem - just tell the skilled bartenders your favourite flavours and they'll mix you up something delicious.

Day 4: Bristol to Exeter via Glastonbury - Cheddar Gorge drive & lunch in Glastonbury

Take a scenic drive through cheddar gorge.

Leave Bristol on the morning of day six, driving south out of the city towards the Mendip Hills. This stunning area of rolling hills and green fields offers one of the most scenic routes from Bristol to Exeter and is a really pleasant drive.

As with your route through the Cotswolds you can follow the smaller country lanes if you want to, however we'd say following the bigger B3134 and B3371 is a just as scenic and hassle-free way to drive through the hills.

Rolling hills and green fields in the Mendip Hills, Somerset

Once you've reached the end of the B3371, head west onto Cliff Road which will take you down through Cheddar Gorge.

This limestone gorge is home to a number of caves, one of which is where Britain's oldest complete human skeleton, thought to be over 9,000 years old, was discovered in 1903, and has become one of Somerset's most popular tourist attractions.

Either just drive through the gorge and enjoy the scenery, or stop and explore; there are loads of things to do including visiting Gough's Cave where the skeleton was discovered, climbing the 274-step Jacob's Ladder for amazing views, looking around the Museum of Prehistory, and going for a cliff-top walk.

There are three car parks, however the one at Gough's Cave is the biggest with 300 spaces so that might be your best bet to find a spot.

The view down Cheddar Gorge, Somerset

Have lunch at Rainbows End Cafe in Glastonbury

After you've spent enough time at Cheddar Gorge follow the A371 southeast to join up with Glastonbury Road which will take you south into Glastonbury town.

As well as giving the famous music festival its name, Glastonbury is a really pretty, quintessentially British town to visit and is ideal for a lunch stop-off to break up your drive to Exeter.

Have a walk through the town and enjoy its famously hippy culture before heading to Rainbows End Cafe on the High Street for some food.

A couple strolling through the quaint streets of Glastonbury town in Somerset

This award-winning family cafe is completely vegetarian and renowned for its homemade food. They have an inviting, colourful salad bar with loads of tasty and healthy options, as well as soups and main dishes that change daily and a selection of tempting cakes.

Although everything on offer is exclusively veggie or vegan, their home-cooked, British food will satisfy even the most avid meat-eaters, so definitely choose this cafe to refuel.

Climb up Glastonbury Tor

After lunch, leave the car in Glastonbury and walk to famous Glastonbury Tor (it's a short walk along the A361).

This hill rises above the town and is topped by historic St Michael's Tower (the remains of 14th century Church of St Michael) and boasts 360-degree views of the Isle of Avalon, Glastonbury, and Somerset.

Make your way to the top to take in the beautiful Somerset countryside one last time before walking back into town and picking up the car to drive on to Exeter.

People walking down from Glastonbury Tor with the tower in the background

Drive to Exeter and go for dinner

Drive southwest along the A361 to join up with the M5 which will take you the rest of the way to Exeter, with the whole drive taking around and hour and a half.

You'll probably arrive in the early evening, so just find somewhere for dinner before you call it a night. We've got two restaurant suggestions to give you some inspiration:

  • Old Firehouse - for a lively, informal meal we'd recommend going for your second pizza of the trip at the Old Firehouse. Popular with both locals and students alike thanks to its buzzing atmosphere, this pub serves up giant 14-inch square pizzas with loads of different meaty, veggie, and vegan toppings to choose from.
  • @Angelas - this quiet restaurant it tucked away in the western quarter of the city and is a great place for a quality, relaxed meal. Serving up classic dishes using the best local and seasonal ingredients, everything is sure to be delicious and a true celebration of the area.

Day 5: Exeter - See the sights & have a Devon cream tea

Visit exeter cathedral.

Have a lie in to start day seven (we've given you enough early mornings!), and set off to look around Exeter whenever you're ready; as cities go it's pretty quiet and slow-paced, so expect a more leisurely sightseeing experience compared to your time in Bristol.

Start at Exeter Cathedral located in the centre of town. This vast church is one of the greatest cathedrals in England, and has a whole load of stunning features to look out for, including colourful stained glass windows, an ornately decorated nave, the earliest complete set of misericords, and one of the longest uninterrupted medieval vaulted ceilings in the world.

It costs £7.50 to enter the church which goes towards its maintenance, and free audio guides are available to tell you all about its history.

Exeter Cathedral against a blue sky

Get cultured at the Royal Albert Memorial Museum

From the Cathedral, walk north for a few minutes to the Royal Albert Memorial Museum (or RAMM) for an educational peruse of the exhibitions.

This museum covers a really diverse range of topics, including antiquities, fine art, natural history, and world cultures, so there's bound to be something that catches your interest.

If the vast number of exhibitions is a little overwhelming, we'd recommend prioritising the art collection (which has around 7,000 pieces), and the fascinating specimens in the zoology collection.

From here just have a stroll around the centre of the city, stopping for lunch when you get peckish and generally taking in Exeter's charm at your own pace.

Have a traditional Devon cream tea at Tea on the Green

End up back at the Cathedral mid-afternoon just in time for a classic Devon cream tea at Tea on the Green cafe.

This quintessentially southern British treat consists of freshly baked scones served with clotted cream and strawberry jam washed down with a cup of tea, and it's definitely the best way to spend an afternoon in Devon.

Top tip: the Cornish have their own version of this tea time favourite where the scone is split in two and topped first with the jam then the cream, whereas in Devon it's strictly clotted cream first.

Locals can get pretty passionate about which way round you spread your toppings, so make sure you're an honorary Devonian this tea time!

Top off the afternoon at Exeter Quayside

Spend what's left of your afternoon enjoying Exeter Quayside, a historic yet contemporary area of the city which straddles the River Exe.

Once a prehistoric port, this bustling area is full of charming antique shops, cosy cafes, and classic British pubs and restaurants, so there's plenty to choose from to occupy the last couple of hours before dinner.

If you're after something a little more active after your very laid-back day, you could head to The Quay Climbing Centre - one of the South West's largest climbing walls - on the south side of the river, or rent a kayak or stand up paddle board for an hour to enjoy the water as the sun sets. You can hire kayaks and boards from Kayakhub on Maritime Court.

Sunset over Exeter Quay

Either go for dinner at the Quay or walk north from the river towards the Cathedral where you'll find loads of great places to eat before retiring to your hotel ready for an early start on day eight.

Day 6: Salisbury via the Jurassic Coast - Visit Lyme Regis & go fossil hunting in Charmouth en route to Salisbury.

Take a scenic drive along the jurassic coast to lyme regis.

Time for another scenic drive! Leave Exeter as early as possible and drive south from the city to Exmouth, following the local roads all the way down to the rocky cliffs of Orcombe Point which mark the start of the stunning Jurassic Coast.

This World Heritage Site stretches along 95-miles of coastline and is one of the country's most famous areas for discovering fossils and understanding the past through its incredible rock formations.

You'll only be driving about half of this rocky stretch, hugging the coastline from Exmouth through the small towns of Sidmouth and Seaton to get to Lyme Regis.

Wriggling through the local roads will get you to Lyme Regis in around an hour and 45 minutes, however you could just follow the A3052 all the way from Exeter and get there in an hour if you're not fussed about the scenery (although we'd strongly recommend the longer detour).

Take a break from driving and enjoy the seaside charm of Lyme Regis

Located at the heart of the Jurassic Coast where west Dorset and east Devon meet, Lyme Regis is renowned for its beauty, so stop off here to stretch your legs and soak up the stunning landscapes.

Park in Monmouth Beach Car Park then wander along The Cobb, a long stone pier which forms the harbour, and breathe in the fresh sea air.

If the weather's not great and the sea is a little wild then you might not be able to make it right the way to the end of the pier, however if it's safe to do so definitely give it a go.

A wave breaking on The Cobb, Lyme Regis

Walk back down The Cobb and have a stroll along the unspoilt seafront of Sandy Beach with its fishing boats bobbing on the water, before wandering back to the car to continue your drive.

The seafront in Lyme Regis, Dorset

Drive on to Salisbury, stopping to go fossil hunting in Charmouth

A visit to the Jurassic Coast wouldn't be complete without some fossil hunting, so hop in the car and drive a few minutes down the road to neighbouring Charmouth.

This large shingle beach with its dramatic, rugged cliffs is known internationally for its fossils, so walk down the beach and see if you can find any.

A visit to the Charmouth Heritage Coast Centre is a good idea if you want a higher fossil-finding success rate as they have loads of information on the best ways to find them, and even run group fossil walks if you're really serious about taking home a souvenir.

The beach in Charmouth, Dorset

Go for a classic British fish and chips with lashings of salt and vinegar for lunch before you hit the road again (Charmouth Fish Bar is your best bet for where to get it), and go back to the car to drive to Salisbury.

Just follow the A35 to connect up with the A354 which should get you to Salisbury in around an hour and a half.

Day eight has already been super busy, so when you arrive put your feet up in your hotel room and rest before grabbing a light dinner (portions of fish and chips are notoriously large so you'll probably still be full from lunch) and calling it a night.

Day 7: Salisbury - Visit Magna Carta, go to Stonehenge & have dinner

Go to salisbury cathedral to visit magna carta.

Wake up refreshed on day nine and head to Salisbury Cathedral.

We know we've sent you to a handful of cathedrals already, however Salisbury's offering is more than just a religious building as it's home to the best preserved of the four surviving copies of Magna Carta, a charter of rights agreed to by the king in 1215 that promised justice, fairness, and human rights.

This historic document inspired movements towards freedom all over the world, so is a pretty incredible sight to behold which you'll find in the Chapter House of the Cathedral.

Magna Carta itself is housed in a darkened tent-like structure in the middle of an insightful, interactive exhibition that will get you clued-up on the making of the document, why it's housed in Salisbury, and its importance around the world.

Have a look around the rest of the Cathedral whilst you're there (it has the tallest spire in Britain), and bear in mind that whilst it's free to look around and visit Magna Carta, the recommended donation of £7.50 per adult is greatly appreciated to keep the Cathedral open for visitors.

Have lunch then drive to Stonehenge

After you've finished at the Cathedral have a little wander around the green and the surrounding area (travel tip: walk through High Street Gate, it's really pretty), before heading to a nearby cafe for lunch.

Some suggestions include the Bell Tower Tea Room overlooking the Cathedral, and Boston Tea Party, a South West chain that feels like a cosy, independent cafe selling home-cooked food and great coffee.

After lunch, pick up the car and set off for legendary Stonehenge which is only a 20-minute drive north along the A360.

This famous stone circle is one of Britain's most iconic landmarks and is thought to date back around 4,500 years with archaeologists believing it was constructed gradually from 3000 BC to 2000 BC.

Its construction and purpose, however, are still debated today as there are no written records detailing its origins, and the myths surrounding the stones are one of the best parts of this attraction.

Theories range from the spiritual to the supernatural, and there's loads of speculation as to how the stones were moved and positioned so perfectly without the sophisticated tools and machinery to do so.

Go for a walk around the stone circle and come up with your own theory on how the stones got there (our bet is aliens), and stick around to visit some of the sight's other attractions if you want to. These include a group of Neolithic houses built to replicate how people lived 4,500 years ago, the Standing in the Stones exhibition which offers a 360-degree virtual simulation of what it would be like to stand amongst the stones during the summer and winter solstices, and the Stonehenge Exhibition which offers some insight into the landmark and displays over 250 objects uncovered in the area.

Every part of this amazing attraction is super interesting, so we'd recommend spending the whole afternoon here seeing as much of it as you can. General admission costs £17.50 for adults and last entry is at 3pm with the site closing at 5pm.

Stonehenge at sunrise

Enjoy some classic British pub grub for dinner

You've had a Devon cream tea, you've devoured a classic fish and chips, now it's time for another British staple - hearty pub grub (aka a meal at a pub) - so drive back into Salisbury, freshen up at your hotel, and head to the 14th-century half-timbered Haunch of Venison.

As one of Salisbury's oldest pubs, this is the ultimate rustic spot for your British pub experience, and to fully soak up the atmosphere we'd recommend first having a drink in the characterful downstairs bar before heading upstairs to the simple yet elegant restaurant.

Admittedly the food has a touch more class than some of your standard British pubs, but they still sell many of the classics including sausages and mash, steak and chips, fish pie, and of course fish and chips (if you're up for round two).

Expect to also find some great vegetarian options, and to head back to your hotel (very) full of your new favourite British dish.

Day 8: Salisbury to Chichester to Brighton - Explore Chichester & drive to Brighton

Drive to chichester and either relax on the beach at west wittering or explore the city.

Set off early on day ten - you've got a lot of road to cover to get you from Salisbury to Brighton, taking the most scenic route possible through the South Downs National Park and stopping off in Chichester along the way.

Your scenic route from Salisbury to Chichester avoids the busy M27 motorway and instead takes a detour slightly north through the South Downs.

To get to the picturesque rolling hills of this national park, take the A36 east out of Salisbury and join up with the B3335 before enjoying this lovely area of countryside as you use your map or sat-nav to follow the B roads east.

Try to end up close to South Harting where you can join up with the B2141 which will take you south into Chichester.

Relax on the beach at West Wittering or explore Chichester city

By day ten of your road trip things could go one of two ways: either you'll be brimming with enthusiasm to make the most of what little time you have left and want to do as much sightseeing as possible, or your energy levels will be wavering a little and you'll be in the mood for something relaxing before you hit up Brighton tomorrow.

Either way we've got you covered, and have come up with two different suggestions to suit your mood (as well as cater for the unpredictable British weather).

Option 1 - If it's a warm and sunny or crisp winters day and you're after the chilled option, we'd recommend staying in the car and driving south past Chichester to the Witterings.

These two sleepy seaside villages, East and West Wittering, are perfect for a spot of relaxed wandering and gift shop browsing, followed by a sprawl on the golden sand or a chilly walk along the water at nearby West Wittering beach.

The beach holds a Blue Flag Award, and is a beautiful unspoilt spot to enjoy some sandy coastline in contrast to the rocky shingle of the Jurassic Coast. Spend a leisurely few hours here, grabbing a hot tea or an ice cream from the cafe (depending on the time of year) and enjoying the area's natural beauty.

Colourful beach huts at West Wittering beach, Sussex

Option 2 - If the weather's not great or you're just in the market for some more sightseeing, drive into Chichester centre, leave the car in New Park Car Park and go for an explore.

This city has a fascinating history as a Roman settlement, and is home to another stunning cathedral, so take a look around to get a feel for the place. We'd recommend walking the city walls (the most intact circuit of Roman defenses in the south of England) to see the heart of the city, following the mile and a half trail around its historic sights, before ending up at the Pallant House Gallery for a cultural indoor activity where you can shelter from the weather if you need to.

This modern British art museum explores contemporary art from 1900 to the present day, and is housed in a beautiful 18th century townhouse that's a work of art in itself. Spend a couple of hours browsing the art and taking a break at the Pallant Cafe before you're ready to drive on to Brighton.

Drive to Brighton in time for an evening activity

Set off from Chichester with enough daylight left to make the hour and a quarter drive to Brighton before it gets dark, heading back into the South Downs National Park and following the A283 east.

Be sure to drive through the picturesque village of Steyning for a little more British small-town charm before heading south and along the coast to Brighton.

We're giving you even more options to choose from once you've arrived in this vibrant seaside city, so select one of the following suggestions to get to grips with Brighton's evening scene:

  • Play a round of UV crazy golf at Globalls - quirky, jungle-themed crazy golf course Globalls features life-sized animal sculptures and crazy wall art, all glowing in a rainbow of neon colours under the UV lights (wear white so you can get in on the glowing action). This is putting like you've never experienced it before, and a unique way to spend a fun evening in Brighton.
  • See a movie at the Duke of York's Picturehouse - recognised as the oldest function-built continually operating cinema in the UK, the Duke of York's was built in 1910 and screens a diverse range of movies, from new releases, to foreign productions, to cult classics. Head here for a spot of cinematic culture, or just catch that film you've been meaning to see for ages.
  • Have a pint in a cave at The Tempest Inn - if you just fancy a quiet drink, then The Tempest Inn is a must. This seafront pub sits right on the beach, boasting uninterrupted sea views and selling local Sussex beers and great cocktails. The real gem of this pub is, however, downstairs, where you'll find a warren of pink-hued caves where you can cosy up with a pint; you may not get the beach views, but for the ultimate drink-with-a-difference, it's definitely worth the sacrifice.

Day 9: Brighton - Brighton walking tour, take in the views from the British Airways i360 & go for your final dinner

Visit the royal pavilion and wriggle down through the lanes.

It's the final full day of your south England road trip, so make the most of it with one last early morning, kicking off your self-guided walking tour with a visit to the unique Royal Pavilion.

Originally built as a seaside pleasure palace for King George IV, this quirky building mixes regal opulence with exotic architectural styles from India and China, and it's unlike anything you will have seen so far on your road trip.

Just seeing it from the outside is impressive enough, however you won't regret choosing to go inside to admire the enviable bedrooms, stunning reception rooms, lavish banqueting room, and vast kitchen all making it an impressive sight to behold.

Admission costs £13.50 (or is 10% cheaper if booked online).

Travel tip: if you're visiting around Christmas, part of the grounds is transformed into an ice rink between November and January where you can skate against the backdrop of the Pavilion as it glows with festive lights. An hour's skate costs £10 and it's best to book online in advance.

Royal Pavilion, Brighton reflected on the pond

The Lanes are another of Brighton's most iconic attractions, so once you've seen enough of the Royal Pavilion find this historic maze of alleyways which stretch south from nearby North Street.

Located at the heart of what was once the fishing town of Brighthelmstone, these quaint lanes are lined with independent shops and boutiques selling all manner of antiques, jewellery, and one-of-a-kind clothing alongside quirky cafes, jazz bars and restaurants.

Explore the whole area, indulging in some window (or actual) shopping as you soak up the atmosphere.

One shop we'd definitely recommend having a look inside is the fabulously-named Choccywoccydoodah which sells the wackiest chocolate creations and cakes that are nothing short of works of art.

People admiring the cakes at Choccywoccydoodah, Brighton

Walk along the seafront and have some fun on Brighton Palace Pier

Walking all the way through to the south side of The Lanes will naturally bring you out at the seafront (either via Black Lion Street or Ship Street), so go for a short stroll east along the beach to end up at the famous Brighton Palace Pier.

This 1,722-foot long Victorian pier is probably the most iconic sight in the whole city, stretching out into the sea and buzzing with thrill-seeking roller coasters, indulgent food stalls, and the Palace of Fun arcade which will transport you back to your childhood.

Discover the length of the Pier, go on some rides if you're up for it (brave the Turbo Coaster if you fancy an adrenaline rush), and treat yourself to some naughty fast food for lunch (fish and chip round three?) to do this sight justice.

Travel tip: whilst you're on the Pier make sure you look west across the water and spot the old Brighton West Pier.

It was built in the 1860s and suffered various bouts of damage in the 1970s and 1980s, before catching fire in 2002 and being deemed beyond repair. Today you can just see its shell sitting on the water as a reminder of where Brighton's seafront entertainment began.

The entrance to Brighton Palace Pier on a sunny day

Top off your sightseeing with a trip up the British Airways i360

From the Pier, walk back east along the beach (stop for a sit down if your feet are getting tired), and head towards the British Airways i360 for you final Brighton activity.

This giant glass viewing pod slowly rises 450 feet into the air offering panoramic views of the city, the sea, and the rolling hills of the South Downs in the distance. There's a bar on board, so grab a drink and toast your road trip as you enjoy the views, making sure you do a full circuit of the pod to take in the scenery at every possible angle.

'Flights'depart every half an hour and cost £16.50, offering a magical way to salute the beginning of the end of your road trip.

Inside British Airways i360 Brighton

You'll probably have a little time left before you need to get ready for dinner, so pick up some last minute souvenirs, have one final Brighton stroll, then head back to your hotel to get ready to go to the restaurant.

Treat yourself to a celebratory dinner at The Gingerman

Have a table booked at The Gingerman and head there in the evening to celebrate the amazing trip you've just experienced - you've seen a lot!

This intimate, cosy restaurant close to the seafront is the perfect spot for a special yet unfussy meal focused on simple, quality ingredients and amazing flavours.

The imaginative menu celebrates seasonal produce, with a great selection of British meat, fish, and veggie options and irresistible desserts (you can opt for either two or three course for a set price, and we definitely advise going for a pudding).

Enjoy your food, reminisce about your favourite memories from the trip, and make the most of the final night of your holiday.

Day 10: Brighton to London - Drive to London and make the journey home

The only thing on the agenda for day 12 is driving back to London to start your journey home, so pack your things and hop in the car whenever you're ready to go.

Once you've made it back to London, drop off your hire car if you have one, spend a little time in London if you fancy it, then make your way to the airport or train station. We hope you've enjoyed your trip!

Join our email list!

By joining our email list, you give LazyTrips permission to use your email for sending you newsletters, emails and updates including for marketing purposes. Your email will not be provided to third parties.

Related posts

When is the best time to visit the UK to see its culture and history

Two For The World

The Ultimate 2 Week South West England Road Trip Itinerary

01 apr 2024 29 mar 2024 | dan.

Explore quaint villages, medieval castles, ancient places and spectacular coastlines with our epic 2 week, self-drive south west England road trip itinerary. Starting and finishing in London, this is a looping drive to Cornwall and back via the beautiful counties of Surrey, Hampshire, Dorset, Devon, Somerset and Wiltshire.

England, with its beautiful rolling landscapes and winding country lanes, is made for road tripping. But where to even start?   

We’ve been pulling out the old AA road map and exploring English laneways for years now, and we still find the sheer diversity of towns and villages, landscapes, historical sites (and old pubs!) makes putting together any kind of England road trip itinerary a special kind of torture. We just want to see and do everything. 

The south west of England is a case in point. It is quite literally packed with the kinds of destinations and experiences that make for an unforgettable road trip.  

Quaint medieval villages? Too many to count. Ancient sites? The highest concentration in western Europe. World Heritage? All kinds, from ancient mines, neolithic standing stones and two-thousand-year-old Roman baths, to a stunning coastline with a unique geological and fossil story. 

You’ll also find sweeping coastal landscapes and moors scattered with granite tors and traces of structures built by ancient people in a distant past. Moody castles and abbey ruins that whisper of bygone heydays. And of course, a virtually endless choice of cosy old pubs where you can nurse a pint of ale under the low rafters and imagine what the walls would say if they could talk.  

What it all adds up to is a looping road trip from London to Cornwall and back that’s something of a tour de force.

This itinerary packs a lot in, but it’s designed as an introduction to this wonderful corner of the country. It takes on board our own learnings and experiences, and has evolved as we’ve visited and revisited these areas. Ultimately, this itinerary showcases what we reckon are some of the very best places to visit in south west England.  

Our itinerary takes two weeks, but you could certainly make it longer and slower by giving more days to any of the places it includes.  

If you have only one week, we would suggest leaving the Cornwall road trip component of this itinerary for next time. Or do the opposite and focus all your time there instead – it’s a magical place. 

Read on for our day-by-day, self-drive south west England itinerary, and our top take-outs and tips for a road trip you won’t soon forget. 

Stone cottages with chimneys line both sides of a cobbled road with Wells Cathedral in the background on an England road trip.

South West England Road Trip Itinerary Snapshot Start & Finish: London Heathrow, United Kingdom  Distance: At minimum, around 1,350km (840 miles) How long do I need ? This is a jam-packed 2 week looping road trip from London Heathrow, travelling to Cornwall and back via the English counties of Hampshire, Dorset, Devon, Cornwall, Somerset and Wiltshire.  Overnight stops: 1 night in Winchester, 1 night in Lyme Regis, 1 night in Dartmouth, 2 nights in Porthleven, 2 nights on the Penwith peninsula (eg. Penzance or St Ives), 1 night in Padstow, 1 night in Tintagel, 1 night in Exeter, 1 night in Wells and 2 nights in Bath.  

What’s in this post?

What’s the route? Day 1 – London to Winchester Day 2 – Winchester to Lyme Regis along the Jurassic Coast Day 3 – Lyme Regis to Dartmouth via Exeter Day 4 – Dartmouth to Porthleven via Polperro Day 5 – Lizard Peninsula, Cornwall Day 6 – Penwith Peninsula, Cornwall Day 7 – Penwith Peninsula, Cornwall Day 8 – St Ives to Padstow, Cornwall Day 9 – Port Isaac & Tintagel, Cornwall Day 10 – St Nectan’s Glen, Boscastle & Bodmin Moor, Cornwall Day 11 – Wells & Glastonbury Day 12 – Bath Day 13 – Castle Combe, Lacock Abbey & Bath Day 14 – Bath to London via Stonehenge Planning a South West of England Road Trip Getting to London Best time to visit south west England Where to stay in the south west Driving and renting a car in England

This post contains affiliate links. If you choose to buy through these links we may earn a small commission at no extra cost to you. This helps us to keep Two for the World running. Thanks for your support.

What’s the route?

Our starting point for this south west England road trip itinerary is London Heathrow Airport, which is to the west of central London.  

This is a convenient launchpad as there are extensive car hire options at Heathrow and it’s close to the M25 motorway, which is the first major road we’ll be taking as we head into the south west of England.  

You could also start this road trip at Gatwick Airport to the south of London. There are plenty of car hire options here too. 

You’ll need a car for this itinerary, so unless you plan to drive your own car, you’ll need to rent one. We use Rentalcars.com and Discover Cars to search for and hire cars and we suggest checking prices on both to find the best deal you can.

Over two weeks, you’ll make a looping road trip from London through the counties of Hampshire, Dorset, Devon, Cornwall, Somerset and Wiltshire.  

You’ll drive through picturesque country lanes visiting castles, abbeys and cathedrals, medieval villages, neolithic and Bronze Age sites, ancient places, World Heritage sites, all while immersing in spectacular coastal and countryside scenery.  

There’s a huge amount to see throughout this journey. We’ve cherrypicked what we feel are among the best sites and scenery in each region, to give you a feel for these places and the wonderful diversity of landscapes, history and culture of south west England.  

Map showing a south west England road trip.

This road trip through the south west of England is one of the entries on our  Bucket List of 100 Ultimate Road Trips Around the World . Check out what else is on the list  here .

Our 2 Week South West England Road Trip Itinerary

Day 1 – london heathrow to winchester.

Highlights: Farnham Castle | Waverley Abbey | Winchester historic centre   Total driving distance :  appx . 100km (62 miles) assuming a Heathrow starting point   Total driving time:   appx. 1.5 hours   Overnight:  Winchester  

Let’s hit the road! There are two historic stops on this first morning of our south west England road trip, as you travel from London to the ancient city of Winchester. 

Once you’ve collected your hire car, set your GPS for today’s first stop, Farnham Castle.  

If you’re coming from London Heathrow, you’ll head south on the M25 (the London orbital road) to the M3, where you’ll head west. If you’re coming from London Gatwick, take the M25 north west to the A3 and then head west. 

If you’re travelling from somewhere else, make Farnham Castle your starting point. 

Farnham Castle

Our first stop is  Farnham Castle , an impressive motte and ‘shell keep’ ruin attached to a beautifully preserved medieval house in Surrey.

It usually opens from 9am on weekdays and 10am on weekends, but check ahead before you visit as this can vary. Time your arrival for opening, or head into the charming little village for a coffee first.

Farnham Castle was home to Winchester’s bishops in the 12th and 13th centuries, and it’s been occupied almost ever since.  

If you’re lucky, you’ll have the ruins and their wonderful views all to yourself as we did. Even the ghostly presence rumoured to hang around the old stones had better things to do on the day we visited. 

Waverley Abbey

Just 10 minutes down the road, and well worth the detour, are the wonderfully evocative ruins of Waverley Abbey .  

The site is free and open during daylight hours. Park at the abbey carpark and head through the nearby field for around 5 minutes to the ruins. 

Spread out over the field next to the pretty River Wey, this ambient site was home to the first Cistercian monastery in Britain, founded in the early 12th century. Today you’ll see the fine stone remains of a vaulted refectory and surrounding buildings. 

Keep an eye out also for the famous Waverley Yew , a vast tree that’s been standing sentinel here for around 500 years.  

Travel tip : We recommend bringing decent and durable outdoor shoes for this road trip. They’ll come in handy almost immediately for this walk across the field to the abbey ruins, especially if it’s been raining. While we were delighted by this site, we were less so with the state of our shoes afterwards . It was a sentiment that carried through our entire trip, but muddy shoes is usually par for course when exploring the great outdoors in England.

Stone ruins and arches of ancient Waverley abbey on our England itinerary.

From the abbey, it’s an easy 45-minute drive to Winchester . This important cathedral city was established as King Alfred the Great’s ancient capital of Wessex in the 9th century, and it remained England’s premier town until the Normans arrived in 1066.  

The history here goes back thousands of years, and the city is imbued with a sense of this long and varied past.

If you’re craving lunch by this stage, park up in one of the city’s paid public carparks (we generally use Google maps to search for car parks) and either pick up something to go on the high street, or head to our favourite spot, The Bishop on the Bridge pub, for lunch on the terrace by the river. You’ll find the city’s large statue of Alfred the Great just nearby.    

After lunch, set off on an afternoon meander around the main sites and highlights of the old town. You can go self-guided as we did with this downloadable City Walk .

If you’d like to discover the city with a real guide, this 2-hour guided tour departs daily at 10am. You’d just need to head straight to Winchester this morning to be there in time.

Or tonight, for something quirky and different, why not get out with a guide for a tour of the city’s darker side on this ghost walk .

Highlights of Winchester include the awe-inspiring Winchester Cathedral (it has a charming little Christmas market that we recommend visiting if you’re around in December), the impressive ruins of Wolvesey Castle , and the medieval Great Hall with its Arthurian-inspired round table hanging on the wall. 

Ruined stone archways and towers at Wolvesey Castle, a must-see on a south England road trip.

Travel tip: There’s plenty to do and see in Winchester, and while our itinerary spends just an afternoon and evening here, you might consider staying longer and exploring more. Or return another time – Winchester is a great short road trip from London.

Where to stay in Winchester

You have plenty of options across the board in and around Winchester, from budget chain hotels on the city outskirts to charming pub stays right in the historic centre.

We stayed at the lovely Bugle Inn at Twyford, 10 minutes’ drive from Winchester. The breakfast was great and there was parking on site.

The following centrally located stays also get great reviews, though check the parking situation with the accommodation provider.

  • Good value: The Westgate – modern rooms in historic pub | clean and quiet | close to historic centre
  • Mid-range: The Old Vine – characterful rooms | great breakfast | central location
  • Spend a bit more: Hotel du Vin Winchester – brightly decorated | comfortable rooms | Well located

Day 2 – Winchester to Lyme Regis along the Jurassic Coast

Highlights: Old Harry Rocks | Corfe Castle | Durdle Door | West Bay | Lyme Regis  Total driving distance : appx. 200km (125 miles)       Total driving time: appx. 3.5 to 4 hours   Overnight: Lyme Regis

On Day 2 of our south west UK road trip itinerary, you’ll be exploring some of the highlights of England’s spectacular  Jurassic Coast . 

Named for the extraordinary geological record packed into its landscape, rock layers and fossils, the natural history captured within this 150km (95 mile) stretch of coast spans 185 million years.

The Jurassic Coast is so geologically important, it’s been listed as World Heritage. It sweeps westward from Old Harry Rocks near Swanage in Dorset, to Orcombe Point in Exmouth, Devon. 

Aim to start early as our itinerary packs a lot in today. If you want to slow the pace or spend more time in some places, consider skipping some of the stops below.  

If you’re into fossils, check the tide times and aim to get to Lyme Regis earlier today so you can max your time exploring the beach (which is tide dependent) and the museums there. 

Old Harry Rocks

The striking, chalky stacks of  Old Harry Rocks are our first stop today, and your first opportunity to stretch your legs on a very small section of England’s famous South West Coast Path. 

You’ll need to make an early start as it’s around 90 minutes’ drive from Winchester along the A31 to this easternmost point of the   Jurassic Coast World Heritage Site .  

Once you’ve parked up at the National Trust South Beach car park in Studland, you have a couple of options, depending on your energy levels.  

You can head straight out along the signposted trail (head past the Bankes Arms Inn and turn left at the public toilets) directly to Old Harry Rocks. It’s a walk of around 20 minutes out to the lookout. This is what we did.  

If you’d like a longer wander to take in this impressive time-worn coastline, continue on once you’ve reached the lookout and follow the Old Harry Rocks Walk in a 5.6km loop back to the car park. Set aside a couple of hours if you intend to do this (and look to skip some of today’s subsequent stops).  

If you’d prefer to take in the scenery without breaking a sweat, head to Knoll Beach Café at Studland and enjoy views of Old Harry Rocks with a cuppa. It’s open from 9.30am. 

Another option, and one we’d like to go back and do sometime, is to get out on the water and see the coastline on this boat tour . If you’re keen to do this, make your way from Winchester directly to The Quay in Poole this morning as that’s where the boat trip departs from.

Corfe Castle

To get to our next destination, you’ll take the same route out that you came in on to Old Harry Rocks. Keep an eye out on the way for signs to Corfe Castle.  

Perched dramatically on a hill, Corfe has been watching over the countryside in one form or another for over a thousand years. It looks every bit as old as it is. 

The castle’s dark history of murder, siege and treachery lends the collapsed hunks of stone and brick a strong sense of melancholy, especially on a day as grey and gloomy as when we visited. If ghosts hang out anywhere, they hang out here. 

In our opinion, this is one of the most hauntingly evocative ruins in England and among our favourite castle ruins on this trip. It’s a must for a south west England itinerary. 

Corfe Castle is managed by the National Trust and there’s an entry fee. It’s open daily between 10am and 4.30-5pm.

The stone ruins of Corfe Castle sit high atop a green hill.

Durdle Door

Half-an-hour to the west of Corfe Castle is another spectacular geological showcase of the Jurassic Coast, the quirkily named Durdle Door.  

It sounds like the gateway to somewhere magical, and being on the Jurassic Coast, it really is. Durdle Door is an impressive limestone arch at the head of crystal clear waters and a lovely crescent of beach. Striking white chalk cliffs rise and fall away to the west. 

It’s a steep 15 minute walk from the carpark down to the beach, but worth it if the weather is nice. Otherwise, you could enjoy the view from above the beach and walk along the cliff path. If you hike east for 30 minutes, you’ll reach the lookout over pretty Lulworth Cove . 

Durdle Door is near the village of West Lulworth. There’s a paid carpark which you can reach via the holiday park, and coastal walking tracks weaving off in both directions. Just be aware that this is a highly popular spot in summer and holiday periods and it may be difficult to find parking at those times.  

The weather wasn’t awesome when we stopped by Durdle Door, so we were content to make this a short stop, take some pics and go for a brief wander along the clifftop trail. If you’d like to spend longer here, skip the next stop at West Bay.  

A beach with a large rocky arch stretching out into the water and high white cliffs to the right.

A further 50 minutes’ drive around the Jurassic Coast will bring you to West Bay , a seaside village that doubled as the town of Broadchurch in the binge-worthy crime drama (the UK version).  

A popular seaside holiday spot in summer, West Bay (which is also known as Bridport Harbour) was very quiet when we visited in the late wintertime. The sea was choppy and chocolate-milky but it certainly didn’t diminish the Jurassic Coast view we came here to see.  

West Bay’s striking east cliff is a sheer, mustard-coloured sandstone rise, and could not be more different from the white chalk cliffs of this morning. 

If you’re lunching here, pop by one of the fish and chip kiosks if they’re open, or settle in for a traditional ploughman’s lunch in one of the town’s seaside pubs as we did. 

A person standing on a concrete wall looks across water to mustard-coloured cliffs of West Bay on a UK road trip itinerary.

Travel tip: English pubs generally finish their lunch service at 3pm, although hours can vary on weekends, especially Sundays. Lunching in a quaint village pub is a quintessential feature of an England road trip, so this is a critical piece of information when you’re planning your day, especially on packed days like this one. Despite having lived in the UK on and off for years, we still turn up at pubs looking for a late-arvo bite to eat, only to find we’re too late. If it looks like you’re going to be pushed for time, aim for a high street bite instead.

Monmouth Beach, Lyme Regis

Our next stop is 25-minutes down the road from West Bay. Monmouth Beach  is in Lyme Regis , which is world-renowned for its Jurassic Coast fossil treasure-trove and the pioneering work of palaeontologist Mary Anning.  

If you’re into fossils and dinosaurs, you’ll want to give yourself more time here today so you can join a fossil tour and visit the museums. 

First up, head to Lyme Regis Museum for a full immersion in the local fossil world. Guided fossil walks on the beach can also be organised through the museum, lasting around 2.5 hours.  

A couple of minutes away, there’s also the Dinosaurland Fossi l Museum , which has thousands of fossils on display.  

Both museums have entry fees and varying opening hours, particularly during winter, so be sure to check their websites before visiting. 

We missed the fossil walking tour sadly, but spent a happy hour on the beach anyway, trailing through the pebbles searching for fossils, which emerge and trickle down from the eroding cliffs above.  

There’s also a very cool ‘ammonite graveyard’ here, which you can see at low tide around 15 minutes’ walk west of the carpark along the beach. Just be sure to check tide times before you visit and don’t attempt the walk while the tide is up.

If you’re interested in learning a little more about Lyme Regis, check out this self-guided smartphone heritage walk .

A person walking on the rocky shore of Monmouth Beach looking for fossils.

Where to stay in Lyme Regis

Lyme Regis is only small but there are a number of accommodations both in the town and in the surrounding countryside. The following stays get great reviews:

  • Good value: Shepherds Hut – tiny home in rural setting | good facilities | free parking
  • Mid range: High Tides – on the beach | renovated apartment in historic building | parking nearby
  • Spend a bit more: Dower House Hotel – elegant and spacious rooms |excellent breakfast | onsite parking

Alternatively, if you’d prefer a larger range of choice for stays and dinner, you could continue on to the city of Exeter, about an hour’s drive to the west. This is what we did, staying at the Leonardo Hotel Exeter close to the city centre. With hindsight though, we would have preferred to stay in Lyme Regis on this night rather than make another hour long drive after dark, hence we’ve adjusted this itinerary.

Day 3 – Lyme Regis to Dartmouth via Exeter

Highlights: Exeter Cathedral | Exeter historic centre | Totnes Castle | Dartmouth village | Dartmouth Castle   Total driving distance: appx. 120km (75 miles)   Total driving time: appx. 2 hours 15 minutes   Overnight: Dartmouth

This morning, you’ll be exploring the cathedral city of Exeter, so make your way there after breakfast. It’s around an hour from Lyme Regis. 

Park up in one of the city’s central car parks. These are generally pay and display parking spaces. If you’re visiting during peak periods, there’s also a park and ride option for Exeter. 

Exeter’s history goes back to Ancient Roman Britain, when this was a legionary military base on the edge of the Roman Empire.  

The 12th century Exeter Cathedral was built during the city’s religious heyday and is one of the oldest in south west England. It’s an absolute must while you’re here. Be sure to head inside to see the cathedral’s magnificent ceiling, it’s the longest stretch of unbroken Gothic vaulting in the world. 

Spend this morning exploring Exeter’s historic streets and sites. There are several self-guided walks you can do, which bring the city’s story to life through its ancient walls, its medieval period and the wool trade that brought it great wealth in the 17th century.  

There’s also this fun, self-guided smartphone heritage walk you can do at your own pace.

Alternatively, a range of free 90 minute guided tours run each day from the Cathedral green.  

The bell tower of Exeter Cathedral surrounded by trees can be seen when you road trip south west England.

Totnes Castle

Our ultimate destination today is Dartmouth, but en route, you’ll be making a brief stop in the quirky market town of Totnes. It’s a 45 minute drive south west of Exeter. 

Totnes dates back to Saxon times. Today, it’s known for its large artistic community, and thousand-year-old Totnes Castle , which is the focus of our visit. 

This tiny hilltop fortress is renowned as one of the best preserved examples of a Norman motte (hill) and bailey (lower yard) earthworks still in existence. 

Climb up to the stone keep and you’ll be rewarded with captivating views over the valley to the River Dart, and a garderobe (a medieval loo) still in situ. Wander the bailey below and keep an eye out for the tree graffiti left by prisoners held on site during WWII.  

Totnes Castle is managed by English Heritage and there’s a fee to enter. There is pay and display parking nearby.  

The Castle is open daily from 10am to 5pm, but it’s only open on weekends during the winter months. If you’re travelling in winter and today is a weekday on your itinerary, skip this stop and make straight for Dartmouth. It’s a 30 minute drive south. 

Sitting pretty at the head of the River Dart, the town of Dartmouth is a lovely little spot to while away this afternoon and evening.  

Dartmouth was once an important fishing and trading port, and two medieval forts stand vigil at the entrance to the Dart Estuary to this day: Kingswear Castle and Dartmouth Castle . The latter is lauded as one of England’s most picturesque fortifications and it’s one of the showpiece castles of our south west England road trip.   

There’s a paid car park close to the river and town centre. There’s also a cheaper park and ride option just outside of town, however the shuttle between the car park and town doesn’t run between November and late March (it’s around 30 minutes to walk to town).  

Dartmouth’s cute little central streets are worth a wander, and there are a couple of self-guided town trails you can follow for an intro to the local history. The Castle Trail will take you along a section of the South West Coast Path from town to  Dartmouth Castle .  

The Castle’s passages and walkways offer stunning views and fascinating insights into its defensive history right up till WWII, including the set-up for the huge chain that could once be pulled up to block off the estuary mouth.  

The site is managed by English Heritage, has a fee for entry and is open daily, except for the winter months, when it’s only open on weekends – check ahead if you’re keen to go inside.  

If you’re visiting outside of winter, you can jump on the Castle Ferry for a 10 minute river cruise back to town. If you’d like to get out on the water for longer, there are a couple of other river boating options departing from town, like the one-hour Greenway Ferry river cruise. 

Dartmouth Castle sits on the rocky banks of the River Dart.

The Great Sc one Debate   It’s a requirement of this itinerary that as you pass through Devon, you search out that most quintessential of English afternoon traditions: the cream tea. There are various places in Dartmouth you can stop for tea and scones, including the Dartmouth Castle Tearooms.   As you pay homage to the humble scone, consider this: there’s a very real divide in the UK about the etiquette of the cream tea, and whether jam or cream goes on the scone first.    In Devon, where cream tea is believed to have originated, the Devonshire tea tradition has cream on first followed by jam. Over the border in Cornwall, however, you put the jam on first then the cream.    We personally follow the Cornish tea tradition. Not that we’d quibble if it came out the other way. Try it both ways and you decide!  

Where to stay in Dartmouth

Dartmouth is a small but popular town, especially in peak periods, and accommodation prices can reflect it.  

We actually drove on for another couple of hours when we did this trip, but it was too much for one day. Hence we suggest staying in or around Dartmouth tonight. We’ve included a couple of local stays with great reviews below: 

  • Good value: St Elmo House – comfy rooms and beds | short walk to centre | street parking
  • Mid-range: The Ship in Dock Inn – colourful rooms in historic building | central location | parking permits provided
  • Spend a bit more: Harbourside 3 – modern rooms | overlooks river | free parking

Day 4 – Lizard Peninsula via Polperro, Cornwall

Highlights: Polperro | Truro Cathedral | Royal Cornwall Museum | Gweek Seal Sanctuary   Total driving distance: appx. 190km / 118 miles   Total driving time: appx. 3.5 hours   Overnight: Porthleven   

Today you’ll cross into Cornwall, starting with the charming fishing village of Polperro and then spending the afternoon and all day tomorrow on the Lizard peninsula, known simply as The Lizard .  

This wedge of land is one of the highlights of Cornwall, and a must-visit on our south west England road trip itinerary. Plus, the best way to experience this ruggedly beautiful stretch of Cornwall coastline is on foot. So having a couple of days in this area gives you more time out of the car, so you can get a proper feel for this wild corner of the country.

Travel tip: Take note today as you drive the bridge over the River Tamar on the western edge of Plymouth. This is the ancient eastern boundary of Cornwall, set by King Athelstan in the mid-10th century to separate the feisty Celtic people in that part of the island from the newly united state of Wessex.   Speak to a Cornish person today and you may find sentiment isn’t much changed. As one local character told us over a beer in the historic Blue Anchor Inn at Helston, ‘This is Cornwall. Not England’.

Polperro is a good 1.5-hour drive from Dartmouth so aim to set out early. This is a designated conservation area and, for us, it really does feel like wandering into another, older time. Winding lanes and charming stone cottages snuggle around a wee harbour where swans nap between the boats at low-tide. 

You’ll need to leave your car at the paid public car park at the top of the village and make the 10-minute stroll down to the harbour along the canal and cute houses.  

Once there, wander the pretty streets , look out for the Roman Bridge , and learn more about the history of this fishing village and former smuggler’s haunt at the tiny Harbour Museum , located in what was once the town’s busy pilchard factory (it’s closed over winter).  

If you’re up for some lunch before moving on, then this is a great spot to sample another classic England tradition: fish and chips. There are some quaint old pubs in Polperro and we enjoyed a delicious pile of fish, chips and peas at the oldest of them, The Three Pilchards .

Boats in a harbour backed by white buildings in Polperro, a fishing village in south west England.

Our next stop is an hour’s drive from Polperro along the A30. Believe it or not, there’s only one actual city in Cornwall, and Truro is it. This is effectively the region’s capital and while it’s far from the madding crowds of London, it’s still busier than most places you’ll visit on this road trip.  

Still, Truro makes a good spot to stretch your legs en route to The Lizard, particularly if you like a good cathedral and a museum showcasing the history of the area you’re exploring. Truro has both.  

We were able to find a space at the paid Old Bridge Street Car Park, which is right around the corner from Truro Cathedral . This soaring gothic revival church was built in the late 1800s and has three spires, just one of three in the UK to do so.   

Up the road you’ll find the Royal Cornwall Museum , which has a small but interesting collection of finds documenting Cornwall’s journey from prehistory to the industrial era. There are some other exhibitions in here too, including a random but quirky little Egyptian space with a mummy. There’s a fee to get in but it lasts a year. 

Tall arches rise to a vaulted ceiling in Truro Cathedral.

Our final destination today is Porthleven and you’ll spend the next two nights here as you explore the Lizard peninsula.

Apparently ‘The Lizard’ comes from a Cornish phrase, ‘Lys Ardh’, referring to the area’s high cliffs, rather than any resident fauna or land shape. En route though, you will be making a stop to meet some local wildlife of a different kind.  

Cornish Seal Sanctuary, Gweek

When we were planning to road trip south west England, we spotted a town on the map called ‘Gweek’. Of course we had to go there. What we found was the Cornish Seal Sanctuary and we’re forever grateful. 

The sanctuary is a rescue centre for rehabilitating sick and injured seal pups. It’s a delightful place to linger, set on 40 acres by the picturesque River Helford .  

In addition to plenty of opportunities to see and learn about the recovering and resident seals, including underwater viewing areas, it offers peaceful woodland walks by the tidal estuary. As of early 2024, the centre also has baby beavers!  

The sanctuary is open every day from 11am to 4pm (last admissions at 3pm) and it’s advisable to book in advance . You’ll save on the ticket price if you book at least 2 days ahead. 

Blue Anchor Inn, Helston

By now, it’s definitely beer o’clock and while you’re in this area, we highly recommend a visit to the Blue Anchor Inn in Helston.  

The Blue Anchor is Cornwall’s oldest pub and it’s a little warren of low-ceilinged rooms with a properly ancient feel. We’ve spent a couple of memorable evenings here yarning with locals. 

The onsite brewery has been in operation since the 15th century and is renowned for its medieval ‘Spingo Ales’. Our favourite is the rich and smooth ‘Middle’ ale but if you like beer then by all means, try them all (unless you’re driving, in which case, get a takeaway so you can try it later). 

Afterwards, move on to your overnight stay in the lovely little fishing village of Porthleven , a 7 minute drive down the road. 

Where to stay in Porthleven

Wee little Porthleven has a clutch of accommodations tucked into the streets around the harbour. More options can be found in nearby Helston and in the surrounding area. We suggest the following stays, they all have great reviews.  

  • Good value: No 52 bed and breakfast (Helston) – on the high street | nicely decorated rooms | great breakfast (we’ve stayed here and it was a convenient overnighter, with parking a 5 minute walk away or free overnight street parking right outside if you can swing luck and timings. It’s also virtually next door to the Blue Anchor Inn – no excuse not to try those Spingo ales!) 
  • Mid-range: Harbour Inn (Porthleven) – historic pub stay | right on the quay | really friendly staff (we’ve also stayed here and love the location; we parked in the Kitto’s Field Long Stay Car Park, a 2 minute walk away) 
  • Mid-range: The Artist Loft (Porthleven) – comfy beds | very short walk to harbour | free parking 
  • Spend a bit more: Housel Bay Hotel (The Lizard) – If you’re after something special, have a look at this grand hotel. We hiked past it on the Lizard loop walk (see tomorrow’s itinerary) and we’ll be back one day to stay. It’s perched high above the cliffs overlooking the Atlantic and offers direct access to the South West Coast Path. It has a minimum 2 night stay and parking onsite. 

Day 5 – Lizard Peninsula

Highlights: Porthleven Harbour | Kynance Cove | Lizard Point | Lizard loop walk | Halliggye Fogou   Total driving distance: appx. 45km (28 miles)     Total driving time : appx. 1 hour 15 minutes   Overnight: Lizard Peninsula (Porthleven or Helston)

Day 5 of our south west England road trip has you exploring more of the spectacular coastal landscapes of Lizard Peninsula in Cornwall. 

Start your morning with an early stroll around Porthleven harbour . This is the UK’s most westerly port and, with its 19th century inner walls, is an important safe harbour on a coastline notorious for shipwrecks over the centuries. 

The creation of the harbour also unintentionally turned Porthleven into one of the UK’s best surf spots. We stopped for a bit to watch some hardy souls braving the freezing swells crashing onto the harbour wall. 

The Harbour Markets run on various days throughout the week and year. If you’d like to slow the pace today, hang around and check out the markets from 10am and then pick and choose from the rest of today’s suggested destinations around The Lizard.  

People lean against a wall watching surfers at Porthleven on our England road trip itinerary.

Kynance Cove

From Porthleven, set out to explore the rest of the peninsula by car, starting with the legendary Kynance Cove , a dramatic landscape of rocky outcrops, white sand and crystal clear water. It’s around 40 minutes south. 

Kynance Cove often makes lists of the world’s best beaches, with pearly white sand and turquoise water, which is why it made it on to our itinerary. We were also keen to get up close with the famous red and green serpentine rock stacks to be found here. 

We found Kynance to be ruggedly dramatic but our visit was on a day of wild weather so we didn’t get to see it in all its list-making glory. Hopefully you do!   

Park up at the National Trust car park and make your way down the steep and rocky path to the beach. Be sure to check tide times before you do though as the beach can disappear completely under a high tide. 

Waves crash on the rocky shore of Kynance Cove, highlight of a road trip to Cornwall.

Lizard Point

Twenty minutes from Kynance Cove is our next destination,  Lizard Point. This is the southernmost tip of Lizard peninsula (and the UK in fact).  

This is a prime opportunity to stretch your legs on another section of the South West Coast Path . This segment is a 6.5km loop walk of Lizard Point .  

The Lizard loop walk starts and finishes in the village of Lizard, so make your way there and park on the village green. There are a number of cutbacks along the way if you’d prefer a shorter walk.  

Alternatively, you can park further towards the point at the National Trust car park and enjoy a short walk to the southernmost point lookout, or along the coast in either direction.  

This coastline around Lizard Point is rugged, beautiful…and lethal. The ocean off the headland has been a graveyard for ships for about as long as people have braved the seas here.  

While our first attempt at the Lizard loop was thwarted by wild weather, we’ve since returned to complete the hike and can confirm it is 100% worth doing if you have the time and inclination (and the weather is cooperating). It ranks very high on our list of awesome things to do in south west England. Set aside around 3 hours to do the full walk, with stops along the way. 

Travel tip: Keep an eye on the weather if you’re planning to walk The Lizard coastline. And do stop by Polpeor Café at Lizard Point. We retreated here to wait out the storm on our first visit and drip dried over the biggest scones we’d ever seen. Cornish tea on the cafe’s terrace overlooking the ocean would be superb on a sunny day. The café closes at 4pm (or as weather dictates).

A person walking on a path by the ocean at Lizard Point, Cornwall.

Halliggye Fogou

Sounds like something a Viking might say, but Halliggye Fogou is the name of an Iron Age site on The Lizard.  

Halliggye Fogou is around 20 minutes north of Lizard village. En route, make a quick pit stop at the Old Cider Barn Arts & Crafts Centre to check out the bric-à-brac and perhaps pick up some traditional Cornish cider. 

A ‘fogou’ is a Cornish word for ‘cave’ and at these sites, it refers to networks of underground passages built in stone around 2,500 years ago as part of Iron Age farming settlements. Their purpose is unknown.  

Halligye Fogou is managed by English Heritage, is free to visit and open during the day, although you can’t go inside the fogou over the winter months.   

Day 6 – Penwith Peninsula, Cornwall

Highlights: St Michael’s Mount | Penzance | Merry Maidens Stone Circle | Minack Theatre   Total driving distance: appx. 40km (25 miles) plus the drive to your chosen accommodation   Total driving time: appx. 1 hour plus above   Overnight: Penwith Peninsula

We’re up early today for a time travel through the  Penwith peninsula , home to western Europe’s largest concentration of ancient sites and arguably the gem in Cornwall’s crown.  

Whether you do it as part of a longer driving adventure like this one or on its own, we reckon the Penwith peninsula is one of the best UK road trips you can do. 

There’s a huge amount to see over the next two days. Penwith peninsula is small enough though that you could reorder any of the sites and experiences to suit your interests and timings (it takes around 30 to 40 minutes to drive the length of the peninsula between St Ives in the north and Land’s End in the south). There is a fair bit of driving to see all the things, but you’ll be getting out of the car often.  

You’ll also be spending two nights in this region so you can choose to base yourself in one spot for both nights as you explore the peninsula, or stay in two places and max your time around each area.  

Travel Tip: Before you leave Porthleven this morning, don’t pass up the opportunity to pick up another local-gone-global speciality that you absolutely must indulge in while travelling around Cornwall: the Cornish pasty.   If you’ve never encountered one before, pasties are baked flaky pastries folded over a savoury filling. The traditional filling is beef and veg, but you can get all sorts of fillings, as well as gluten-free and vegan options.   There are a couple of excellent pasty bakeries in Porthleven (and right across Cornwall). We picked up a giant pasty to-go from Philps Pasty Shop . Whatever else you do, do this. In fact, get two. It was one of our great regrets that we only bought one the first time we visited and had to share it.

St Michael’s Mount

Today’s sightseeing is dictated by the tides, so we encourage you to check the local tide times and plan today’s itinerary to suit.

The reason for this is that you’ll be visiting St Michael’s Mount offshore from Marazion , and if you visit at low tide, you can walk across the causeway. 

You can also take a boat to St Michael’s when the tide is in. But there’s something special about walking the ancient cobbled causeway across to this offshore rock before climbing the steep path to explore the castle. 

It’s no coincidence that St Michael’s Mount bears the hallmarks of Mont Saint Michel, the impressive monastery-capped tidal island across the English Channel off Normandy in France. It was a monk from Mont St Michel who commissioned the monastery on St Michael’s Mount in the 12th century.   

For the last four hundred years or so though, this has been the seat of the St Aubyn family and they still live there today. 

It’s 20 minutes from Porthleven to Marazion and there are a couple of paid car parks in the area opposite St Michael’s Mount. You’ll need to book your tickets in advance. Check out this website .  

People walking across a cobbled path and rocky beach with St Michael's Mount in the background.

From Marazion, make your way to the historic market and port town of Penzance , backdrop to the famed play, The Pirates of Penzance .

While the comic opera is a fiction, piracy and smuggling did give this coastline a notorious reputation for hundreds of years. By the 19th century though, Penzance was a fashionable seaside resort. 

Head to the Harbour Long Stay Car Park and spend a couple of hours wandering Penzance’s streets and gardens. This self-guided walk will introduce you to the town’s history and key spots.   

Merry Maidens & Tregiffian Burial Chamber

Our next stop is the  Merry Maidens Stone Circle . You’ll find it in a field by the side of the B3315 road around 6km south of Penzance. 

The 19 standing stones here were erected in the mists of time, somewhere between 3500 and 4500 years ago. It’s not known why the circle was built, but it’s thought to have been a sort of astronomical tracker and ceremonial site. When we visited, we had the ambient stone circle all to ourselves.  

Walk a little further along the road on the same side and you’ll come to the Tregiffian Burial Chamber . This large neolithic chambered tomb was damaged in the creation of the road, but it’s still an interesting example of what’s known as an ‘entrance grave’.

If you’re particularly keen, there’s also a tall menhir stone called Gun Rith in the field opposite this site. Like the tomb, it’s believed to be linked to the Merry Maidens. 

All of these sites are free and can be accessed from a small layover parking area on the left side of the B3315 as you head south west – look out for the bus stop sign. For the stone circle, climb the steps over the gate and head into the field. 

A circle of stones in a field with a single stone in the foreground, one of our favourite places to visit in south west England.

Minack Theatre

From the Merry Maidens, it’s a 15 minute drive to stunning Minack Theatre , the single-minded creation of the extraordinary Rowena Cade, and possibly one of the most spectacularly-sited open air theatres since the ancient Greeks and Romans were in the business. 

It’s recommended you book your visit to Minack in advance as there is timed entry. Opening days and hours also vary so check ahead.  

The 750-seat theatre built into the rocky cliffs is impressive enough on its own, but if you can, try and time your visit for a performance. The theatre season for 2024 runs from late March until late September, with mainly evening but some afternoon shows. We’ll definitely be back to do this. 

Where to stay on the Penwith Peninsula

You have tonight and tomorrow on the Penwith peninsula so you could opt for two nights in one place and use that as a base, or stay in two different parts of the peninsula.  

Your choices in this area are extensive, and range from boutique B&Bs and guest houses to self-catering seaside cottages, remote pub stays and luxe hotels. There are also campgrounds and holiday parks right across the peninsula. 

If you’d like to stay in a slightly larger town with more amenities and eating options, look to quirky Penzance or chic St Ives , or another village on the peninsula like Zennor or Mousehole . Aim to book well ahead if you’re planning a visit during summer or holiday periods.  

  • Check out your accommodation options in Penzance here .
  • See what’s available in St Ives here .

We personally stayed near the village of Zennor at The Gurnard’s Head , a beautiful historic inn surrounded by coast and countryside. It’s a short short drive from St Ives and they have a fantastic restaurant serving up local seasonal deliciousness. 

Day 7 – Penwith Peninsula, Cornwall

Highlights: Land’s End | Boscawen-ûn Stone Circle | Carn Euny Ancient Village | The Tin Coast – Botallack Tin Mine   Total driving distance: appx. 25km (15.5 miles) plus travel to and from your accommodation and any additional activities today   Total driving time: appx. 45 minutes plus the above   Overnight: Penwith Peninsula  

Our view when we awoke in Zennor was of rolling moors and cows gathering on the road outside. This is another truly stunning stretch of Cornwall coastline. With an array of walks winding through moorland and along cliffs scattered with tin mine ruins, you could easily spend the day in this area alone. 

For your second day in the Penwith area, however, you’ll be exploring the west coast and heartland of the peninsula, and more of the historic sites that set this ancient corner apart. 

Depending on where you’ve stayed overnight, you might reorder the following sites to suit. Otherwise, make your way first to Land’s End. 

Land’s End

There’s something strangely compelling about standing at the most extreme ends of a place, and that’s the draw of England’s most westerly point, Land’s End . 

The Atlantic views here are spectacular, but be prepared for the crowded theme park it is. If the ‘attractions’ and gift shops don’t appeal, do as we did and make for the coastal paths. 

There’s an easy 4. 9km loop walk starting and finishing at the Land’s End car park, which you might consider if you want to make time for it today. Otherwise, take a short stroll along the cliffs and soak up the views instead. 

Boscawen-ûn Stone Circle

We haven’t been ourselves, but if you’re keen to go searching, there’s another impressive prehistoric ring of monoliths en route from Land’s End to our next stop, Carn Euny.  

Boscawen-ûn Stone Circle is believed to have been a significant ceremonial centre in its day. Like the Merry Maidens, there are 19 standing stones here, one of which is notably made of white quartz. 

There’s access to the stone circle via a signposted path from Boscawen-ûn Farm, though apparently parking is tricky along the farm lane. Instead, on your way from Land’s End, keep an eye out for a layover on the right hand side, about 800 metres before the farm lane. You can park here and there’s a sign and path to the stone circle.  

Carn Euny Ancient Village

There are two fascinating ancient settlement sites on the Penwith peninsula, Chysauster and Carn Euny. 

Chysauster Ancient Village , around 15 minutes north of Penzance, is a 2000-year-old Romano-British settlement with stone-walled houses. It’s managed by English Heritage and there’s an entry fee. It’s closed over winter. 

The other site, around 20 minutes inland along the A30 from Land’s End – and the one we visited – is Carn Euny Ancient Village . It’s also managed by English Heritage but it’s free and open during the day year-round. It does, however, require going off-piste around 600 metres from the small car park through farmland that can get seriously squelchy when it rains.  

Carn Euny was inhabited from Iron Age to Roman times, and features stone house foundations and another of those mysterious underground passages called a fogou. The site serves up impressive views for miles around. 

A person leans over to fit inside a stone tunnel at Carn Euny on a London to Cornwall road trip.

The Tin Coast

People have been digging metals out of the earth in Cornwall for four thousand years. Today, the remnants of historic mining sites and engine houses pockmark the region.  

In fact, mining is such an important part of the Cornish story that the ‘Tin Coast’ has been declared World Heritage, and there are a number of sites where you can get your Poldark on. 

At Botallack , a National Trust site 20 minutes from Carn Euny Ancient Village, you can follow the paths on this map to see the impressive 19th century engine houses clinging to the cliffs, and the shafts, chimney stacks and other remnants of the busy mining site this once was. There’s parking just past Botallack Count House.  

Less than 10 minutes north is the Levant Mine and Beam Engine , another National Trust site. Among the mine buildings and industrial remains here, there’s a working 19th century steam-powered beam engine. The site can only be visited on a 1.5 hour pre-booked tour , but it’s a great way to learn more about the history of tin mining in the region and the perils of the industry.

A ruined tin mine building with fields and ocean in background on a south west England road trip.

More exploring on the Penwith Peninsula

If you’ve still got energy (and daylight hours), there are plenty more ancient sites dotting the Penwith peninsula.  

Two other great sites in the northern area include the 5000 year-old  Lanyon Quoit,  a classic stone dolmen thought to have been a burial chamber covered in earth once upon a time. Near the quoit, you’ll find  Chûn Castle , a 2500 year-old circular Iron Age hillfort. 

There are also a ton of opportunities to get outdoors and explore on foot. The epic South West Coast Path traverses the entire coastline, while hundreds and hundreds more kilometres trail across the countryside.

The Epic South West Coast Path   One of the most impressive discoveries when you road trip England’s south west is that there’s also a walking trail winding its way along most of the coastline!  The South West Coast Path is the longest national trail in the UK, stretching around 1,015 kilometres (630 miles) between Poole Harbour at the eastern end of the Jurassic Coast, right around to Minehead in the north of Devon.  This is definitely on our list of long (loooong) walks we want to conquer in our lifetime. But the great thing about the South West Coast Path is that you can get out of the car and stretch your legs on short lengths of the trail virtually everywhere you stop along the coast.   There are hundreds of short loop walks you can do, which you can find here . Or just park up and set off for a stroll in either direction. Being able to do this is one of the absolute highlights of this south west England road trip itinerary. 

Day 8 – St Ives to Padstow

Highlights: St Ives | Fistral Beach, Newquay | Wine & cider tasting | Padstow     Total driving distance: appx. 80 km (50 miles) plus travel to St Ives from accommodation   Total driving time: appx. 1.5 hours plus above   Overnight: Padstow  

Today, we’re heading further north into western Cornwall to visit a couple of the region’s most famous seaside villages: St Ives and Padstow. 

Between the two towns, there are a couple of activity options today. Just note that if you do the boat trip out of Hayle, you’ll spend most of the day in St Ives.

Start today with a coffee in boho St Ives . We’d seen so much written about this place over the years, we just had to come and see for ourselves what all the fuss was about.  

Summer in this fishing-village-turned-art-hub can be chaotic but we’d heard it could be a ghost town in winter. Not so on the day we visited. The sun was out and by mid-morning, the harbour-front was humming with people and the small beach was filling up. 

We popped into a tiny, side-street café and then wandered the streets. There’s no shortage of pubs, bakeries, bric-à-brac shops, museums and galleries. You’ll also find the highly regarded Tate St Ives Gallery, for which you can book a visit ahead of time here .  

Parking can be a challenge in St Ives, especially in the peak. Perhaps the nicest way to get in and out without losing time searching for a car space is to park up at St Erth Station over in the nearby village of Hayle, and take the 10 minute ‘park and ride’ train to St Ives. You’ll have gorgeous sea views as you travel into the village along the coast. The train runs twice an hour, every day.  

St Ives Station is also the starting point for this 3km self-guided walk around the town.  

If you are parking at Hayle, you might also consider spending more time in this area today and doing a boat trip like this one to experience the dramatic Cornwall coastline from the water. Boat trip itineraries usually depend on the weather, but some do head out to nearby Seal Island  to visit the local seal colony.

Looking across water to houses and buildings lining the shore of St Ives.

Surf’s Up or Bottom’s Up?

From St Ives, it’s a 1 hour 15 minute drive north to the wee fishing village of Padstow. On the way though, you have a couple of diversions to choose from.

En route to Padstow, you’ll pass the town of Newquay, home to the UK’s most famous surfing beaches.  

This is a very popular seaside getaway for Brits, especially in summer. It’s also renowned as a bucks and hens party destination and has the nightlife to go with it.  

We’ve opted not to include Newquay in this itinerary as it’s a bigger town and we feel there are other, prettier places to visit in this area. However, if you’d like to see why the beaches here are considered surfing meccas, you could break up today’s journey to Padstow with a stop at the most popular surf spot, Fistral Beach.

There’s a paid car park at the beach and various shops and places to eat (including a well-priced Rick Stein restaurant) at the International Surfing Centre.  

It’s also worth noting that there are more budget accommodation options here if you’re looking for an alternative to the higher prices in St Ives and Padstow for tonight’s accommodation. 

Wine tasting and vineyard tour

If wine trumps beach for you (it most definitely does for us), then a lovely alternative as you head towards Padstow today is a wine tasting or tour at Trevibban Mill Vineyard .  

English wine’s star is definitely rising and we absolutely recommend taking the chance to sample locally grown and produced vino and cider at this beautiful, high-ceilinged establishment overlooking the countryside. They also serve delicious grazing boards. Check their website for availability. 

Charming Padstow has its share of highlights, but it’s also garnered something of a reputation for its food scene. In fact, this was the catalyst for our original London to Cornwall road trip. 

As far away as Australia, Rick Stein’s way with seafood is legendary and Padstow is where his business empire first flourished. These days there are four Rick Stein restaurants in the village. We decided to go to the source, The Seafood Restaurant. We packaged it up with a stay in one of Stein’s nearby hotels. 

This is just one of many awesome eating opportunities in Padstow however, from the upmarket to the understated. If you don’t feel like a flashy meal this evening, go for a bag of takeaway fish and chips (there’s a Rick Stein joint for this too) and head to the harbourside.   

Food aside, this medieval fishing village is a nice little place to spend the late afternoon, particularly down by the working harbour. Across the water, you’ll see the village of Rock , a posh escape for the rich and famous. Ferries cross back and forth during the day (there’s a timetable down on the pier).  

A wander through the backstreets of Padstow will bring you to the 15th century St Petroc’s Church . This has been a site of worship since the year 518AD and has all the feels of a very ancient place. Outside of the winter months, you can also visit the 16th century manor house, Prideaux Place .

There are a couple of car parks down by the harbour in Padstow but they can fill quickly. We lucked out with a space in the South Quay Car Park. Otherwise, there are a couple of parking lots up the hill, including Padstow Main Road Car Park, a 10 minute walk into town. All of the car parks are paid parking. If you’re staying in town overnight, check with your accommodation provider for your best parking options.

Boats in Padstow harbour with quaint old buildings in the background.

Where to stay in Padstow

For a small village, Padstow has lots of accommodation, reflecting its popularity. But it can book out well ahead of time. Cast the net wider if needed as there are also lovely stays in the area surrounding Padstow.  

  • Good value: Drang House – excellent location | clean & comfy | historic building 
  • Mid-range: The Old Custom House – cosy pub stay | overlooking the harbour | great brekkie  
  • Spend a bit more: Harbour Hotel Padstow – harbour front | lovely views | great staff 

Rick Stein also has a range of accommodations in Padstow, complementing his restaurants around town. We stayed in a very cosy room at Rick Stein’s Café , part of a birthday splurge including dinner at his famous Seafood Restaurant.   

Day 9 – Port Isaac & Tintagel

Highlights: Fishing village of Port Isaac | Tintagel Castle & Village   Total driving distance: appx. 40km (25 miles) plus any additional exploring in this area   Total driving time: appx. 1 hour   plus the above Overnight: Tintagel area

Today you’ll set out into northern Cornwall to visit a charming historic village and the legendary birthplace of King Arthur, Tintagel Castle.  

Leaving Padstow by 9am, make your way north 30 minutes to the tiny fishing village of Port Isaac.  

If you’ve yet to have breakfast (or you’re ready for second breakfast), consider stopping en route at the St Kew Farmshop and Café along the A39 for a bite. We stopped here briefly to browse the pantry and the smells coming from the café were divine! It opens at 9am six days a week (it’s closed Sundays).  

Pretty Port Isaac, with its white cottages decorating the coastal clifftops and the narrow harbour, is the famous ‘Port Wenn’ of the TV series Doc Martin .  

Park at the paid New Road (St Endellion) Long Stay Car Park at the top of the hill and wander along the sea path down into the village.  

Take an hour or two to enjoy a stroll along the tight paths between the village’s cottages, shops and pubs, keeping an eye out for the narrowest of them all, ‘Squeezy Belly Alley’. 

If you’re a fan of the Doc Martin series, you might want to stay a little longer here and make time for this 1.5 hour guided Doc Martin tour of the town. 

A group of white and stone houses on a hill above Port Isaac Harbour on our south west England itinerary.

Tintagel Castle & Village

It’s a drive of around 25 minutes from Port Isaac to the dramatic bluff where Arthurian myths have swirled for centuries.  

We weren’t sure what to expect on our first visit, but Tintagel and surrounds has turned out to be one of our favourite places to visit in south west England.  

There are five paid car parks in the village of Tintagel. We usually get a space at the good-sized King Arthur’s Car Park in the centre of the village.  

Aim to spend the afternoon in and around Tintagel Castle and village. 

Tintagel Castle

Crowning two dramatic clifftop sites joined by a long bridge, the evocative crumbling ruins of Tintagel hint at the serious fortress it once was. 

The rocky outcrop on which part of the castle clings is also scattered with the stone remains of a Dark Age settlement. 

Tintagel Castle is open daily from 10am to 5pm but check the website before visiting as it can be closed during high winds and poor weather, and isn’t open every day during the winter period.  

It also has timed entry and can get busy, so while you can buy a ticket on the day, it’s useful to book ahead if you can. You’ll save money by booking in advance online too, up till 8.45am on the day you visit. The castle is managed by English Heritage. 

There’s a steep hill down and some stairs up to reach the castle bridge. There’s also a land rover that runs visitors up and down for an additional fee.    

Spend a couple of hours wandering all over and re-imagining this mythical site. Don’t miss the ethereal sculpture, Gallos , on the far side of the island – it’s a fitting tribute to Tintagel’s mystique. 

Travel Tip: For sensational views of the coastline here and of Tintagel island itself, we highly recommend heading out for a walk along the South West Coast Path to the right and/or left of Tintagel Castle. We’ve walked both sides and both serve up fantastic scenery and different perspectives of the castle, bridge and island. The weather was wild when we last hiked but it was exhilarating all the same.   On the south side, you can also walk along the coast path to the spectacularly-sited 12th century St Materiana’s Church . For a shorter walk, you can park at the church and head along the path towards Tintagel instead. 

A high bridge links the mainland to Tintagel island.

Tintagel Village

Once you’ve finished exploring Tintagel Castle, take a stroll through the village high street.  

When you see a higgledy-piggledy, ancient-looking stone and slate-roof building, you’ve reached the Tintagel Old Post Off ice , a cottage from the 1300s.  

This is a National Trust site set up as it would have been several hundred years ago when the cottage was a Victorian post office and home, with lots of insights about life in earlier times. We weren’t here long but found it a quaint and fascinating little spot. 

Unless you’ve had lunch on the go, you have plenty of options for a late lunch or early dinner in Tintagel village.  

Alternatively, take a 10 minute drive into the nearby countryside for a stop at beautiful Tintagel Brewery Bar & Bistro for a paddle of beers and something delicious from their menu (we’re still talking about the pork belly Scotch egg with Thai spiced sauce we had here). Check their website for opening hours and serving times.

Where to stay in Tintagel and surrounds

Tomorrow, you’ll be spending a good part of the morning in the area between Tintagel and Boscastle and there’s a range of accommodation in and between both villages. So you can either stay in Tintagel tonight, or in Boscastle, or anywhere between. Boscastle is just 10 minutes up the road.  

The following stays get great reviews: 

  • Good value: Bosayne Guest House – friendly and welcoming | near to beach and Tintagel village | free parking 
  • Mid-range: King Arthur’s Arms – historic pub stay | centre of Tintagel | free parking 
  • Spend a bit more: The Wellington Hotel – elegant, historic building | centre of Boscastle | free parking   

Day 10 – Boscastle to Exeter via Bodmin Moor

Highlights: St Nectan’s Glen Walk & Waterfall | Boscastle fishing village | Bodmin Moor      Total driving distance: appx. 145km (90 miles)   Total driving time: appx. 2.5 hours   Overnight: Exeter  

Today you’ll explore some of the natural and historic man-made highlights of this area before leaving Cornwall as you start your journey back east. 

Depending on where you’ve spent the night, you can do either Boscastle or St Nectan’s Glen first this morning. St Nectan’s Glen is between Tintagel and Boscastle.

St Nectan’s Glen & Waterfall

After a couple of days of poor weather and muddy trails, we very nearly passed up this little nature trail. We’re really glad we didn’t. St Nectan’s Glen and Waterfall is a real delight and wholly unexpected when you park up in the gravel car park off the B3263 road.  

Have £3 in coins with you for the pay and display car park as it’s cash only. Also, wear your decent walking shoes as it can get muddy and there are a bunch of slippery steps at the visitor centre and waterfall. 

From the carpark, follow the signs to cross the road, head up the short path and then off to the right. Soon enough, the trail will start to follow alongside a lovely bubbling river through a mossy, green forest.  

You’ll climb quite a few stairs out of the glen to the visitor centre, where you pay an £8 entry fee and then head back down a heap more steps on the other side of the river. If you go this route, you’ll need to wade into the river to see the falls. We took our shoes off and embraced the freezing, ankle-deep water to go and stand in the spray of the cascade. It’s magic.  

Once you climb the steps out again, you can stop by the café before making your way back through the glen, or looping out and back to the car park along a very rough and ready single-lane dirt road. We went this way and can confirm it’s an easier downhill walk but far less picturesque.    

The trail is open anytime, but access to the waterfall and visitor centre is daily from 9am to 5pm. We suggest being on the trail around 8.30am and getting to the centre for opening. Give yourself around 1.5 hours to do the walk there and back, with some time at the falls. 

A waterfall cascades down a rocky cliff and through a hole surrounded by green vegetation.

Ten minutes north of the St Nectan’s Glen car park and 15 minutes north of Tintagel, tucked into a small inlet between narrow and winding sea cliffs, you’ll find the tiny harbour village of Boscastle . This was another marvellous little stop for us, and definitely worth a visit.  

Park up at the paid Cobweb Car Park. A river runs through the village along a shale-stacked canal and meets the sea at a quay built in Elizabethan times. Pretty stone cottages and some ancient looking buildings line the way. 

Enjoy a wander through the hamlet and stop for a break in one of the tea rooms or at The Wellington , a 16th century coaching inn. Look out for the red telephone box out the front that’s been converted into a donation-based second-hand bookshop.  

If the spirit of Tintagel has fired up your interest in legends and myths, there’s a Museum of Witchcraft and Magic in Boscastle (it’s closed during winter). The Wellington is also said to be haunted!    

In our opinion, the real magic happens here with a walk out along the right side of the bay, up to the high shale rock pile that forms a natural protective barrier for the village. From up there, you’ll have views only nature can conjure, right out over the Atlantic and the coastline and back towards the village. 

The ocean flows in to Boscastle village between cliffs and seabreaks.

Bodmin Moor

From Boscastle, make your way inland and take the A30 road into the granite wilds of Bodmin Moor. There’s only time to visit a couple of the many sites – natural and manmade – that make this landscape so special, but don’t leave Cornwall without at least a drive through part of this ruggedly beautiful place.  

Hurlers Stone Circles

Our first stop is the  Hurlers Stone Circles , a 50 minute drive from Boscastle.  

Hurlers is a series of three stone circles in a line, and a unique formation in England. Legend has it the stones are local men who were punished for playing the Cornish game of hurling on a Sunday. 

The site was particularly ambient on the day we visited: brooding sarsens on the misty, sodden moor with a couple of wild black ponies watching nearby.

You can park for free at The Hurlers car park. If time is on your side, this is also the starting point for our next stop, which involves a walk on the moor.

The Cheesewring

Apart from Bodmin Moor’s highest point, Brown Willy, The Cheesewring is perhaps the next most well-known natural feature on the moor.

Named for cheese presses of old, The Cheesewring is a stack of large individual stones, smoothed over millennia and balanced precariously on top of each other to tower over the surrounding landscape.   

It’s a 20 minute walk from the car park to The Cheesewring. Just beware that weather can change very suddenly on the moor, so dress appropriately and wear decent shoes. If the weather looks to be closing in, or your hours of daylight are limited, consider giving this a miss. 

Trevethy Quoit

Ten minutes south, just outside Bodmin Moor in Liskeard, you’ll find  Trevethy Quoit .  

Known hereabouts as ‘the giant’s house’, this is the tallest neolithic portal dolmen burial chamber we’ve ever seen, standing at 2.7 metres high and in good condition.  

It’s an impressive megalithic structure, if not a little juxtaposed by the modern-day houses right next door.  

An ancient stone structure stands in a green field.

Overnight in Exeter

From Trevethy Quoit, set the GPS for the city of Exeter. It’s a drive of around 1 hour 15 minutes. Tonight is spent back in the cathedral city in order to get a headstart on tomorrow’s itinerary, which kicks off in Glastonbury. 

If you’d prefer to head straight to Glastonbury tonight, and don’t mind a long drive, it’s a further 1 hour 15 minutes up the road.

Where to stay in Exeter

As a much larger town, you have plenty of options for a stay in Exeter. As we’ve already spent some time in Exeter on this trip, you could stay on the outskirts tonight. But if you do want to stay closer in, we recommend taking a walk around Cathedral Yard to see the cathedral lit up at night.

The following stays get great reviews:

  • Good value: Leonardo Hotel Exeter – modern and clean | close to historic centre | paid parking nearby (we stayed here and it was comfortable and convenient).
  • Mid-range: Townhouse Exeter – quiet and comfortable | short walk to centre | paid parking nearby
  • Spend a bit more: Mill on the Exe – historic mill house | riverside location | free parking

Day 11 – Glastonbury & Wells

Highlights: Glastonbury Abbey | Glastonbury Tor | Wells Cathedral  | Wells historic centre Total driving distance: appx. 100km (62 miles)   Total driving time: appx. 1.5 hours   Overnight: Wells  

You may have left Cornwall behind now but you’re still firmly within the borders of the ‘West Country’ for these final days of our south west England road trip itinerary.  

It’s a drive of around 1 hour 15 minutes from Exeter to Glastonbury.

Glastonbury

From King Arthur’s mythical birthplace at Tintagel to his fabled burial place in Glastonbury, the mythical ‘Isle of Avalon’, we’re hot on the trail of English legend and folklore as we roll into this world-renowned Somerset town.  

Apart from being home to the famous Glastonbury Festival, this is also considered the birthplace of Christianity in England, and it’s been a spiritual centre for millennia. 

It can get very busy here. We learnt this the hard way the first time we visited and kept going as we hadn’t planned our parking. The next time, we had our options ready in advance.  

The most central carpark is the pay and display St Dunstan’s Car Park at Glastonbury Abbey, and you can take a bus from here to Glastonbury Tor between April and September (that’s if you don’t feel like making the 30 minute walk; there’s no parking at the Tor). This isn’t a large carpark though and it’s closed for a market on Tuesdays, so have a back-up.  

Head into Glastonbury Abbey for a wander around the ruins and look out for the spot where King Arthur and Queen Guinevere are said to have been buried. There’s a fee for the abbey, but you can save by booking online in advance.  

From the abbey, make your way along the High Street and check out Glastonbury Market Cross , the Glastonbury Goddess Temple , the 15th century Glastonbury Tribunal and St John the Baptist Church . 

It’s then a 15 to 20 minute walk to Glastonbury Tor . Coming from town along the A361, turn left onto Wellhouse Lane and then make an almost immediate right onto the narrow lane which takes you up to a gate and on to the Tor. A little further up Wellhouse Lane is the White Spring in a Victorian well house.  

You can also head up the Tor from the opposite side, off Stone Down Lane.  

Glastonbury Tor is free to visit but you earn it: it’s a steady uphill slog from both sides. The reward, however, is absolutely worth it. At the top you’ll find St Michael’s Tower , all that remains of the 14th century church that once crowned the hill. And the views over the ‘Isle of Avalon’ are something else.  

A stone tower sits atop Glastonbury Tor with a person standing next to it.

Travel tip: On this itinerary, you’ll visit Glastonbury in the morning and spend the afternoon and evening in Wells. We’ve also had the chance to appreciate Glastonbury at sunset though and it’s pretty special (though unsurprisingly it does attract crowds).  As Wells and Glastonbury are only 20 minutes apart, you could easily flip today’s itinerary if you’re keen for sunset atop the Tor. Or head back from Wells just for sunset or sunrise.

Wells, our next stop, is just 20 minutes up the road, so after coming down off the Tor, you can either lunch in Glastonbury or in Wells.  

Aim to arrive in Wells in the early afternoon, which will give you plenty of time to wander and appreciate this lovely little city, England’s smallest. Wells is actually more village than town and is only designated a city thanks to its cathedral. 

If you haven’t eaten yet, head to one of the pubs in the pretty Market Place.  Then enjoy a leisurely afternoon meander around the 800 year-old Bishop’s Palace . There’s a fee to go in, or you can do as we did and wander the outskirts of the palace and along the   path through the Palace Fields . There are lovely views over the countryside from here back towards Glastonbury Tor. 

Afterwards, tour the magnificent Wells Cathedral . It’s open till 6pm. We came back out just as the sun was turning the façade a golden honey colour. Entry to the cathedral is by donation until late April; after that, there’s an entry fee (reduced on Sundays). 

From the cathedral, pop over to marvel at the adjoining 14th century Vicars’ Close . It’s said to be the oldest original and continually inhabited residential ‘street’ in Europe (the image up near the beginning of this article is of Vicar’s Close). 

For some fun and offbeat self-guided walking tours through Wells, check out this audio guide .

Head back to the vibrant Market Place for dinner before turning in for the night.

The intricate stone façade of Wells Cathedral with people walking in front.

Where to stay in Wells

Lovely little Wells has a range of options both in the historic centre and the surrounding area. We stayed in a charming, 600-year-old building overlooking the cathedral green, The Ancient Gatehouse, which we’ve included below. The following hotels all have solid reviews.

  • Good value: Premier Inn Wells – budget friendly | clean and comfortable | 20 minute walk to centre
  • Mid-range: The Ancient Gatehouse – heritage listed building | central location | nearby paid parking
  • Spend a bit more: The Sheep and Penguin – beautifully refurbed pub stay | nearby paid parking

Day 12 – Bath

Highlights: Ancient Roman Baths | Royal Crescent & Circus | Pulteney Bridge & Weir | Bath’s Georgian architecture   Total driving distance: appx. 35km (22 miles)   Total driving time: appx. 40 minutes   Overnight: Bath  

Today, you’re headed to the World Heritage city of Bath, a drive of around 40 minutes northeast of Wells.  

Bath has been drawing people to its therapeutic waters for nearly 2000 years. The Ancient Romans, no doubt desperate for some home comforts in the strange, grey world of Britannia, tapped the hot springs here around 70AD and built the Roman baths that gave the town its name and which you can still see today.  

In the 18th century, Bath’s reputation as a spa town flourished once more, along with the population. Much of the elegant Georgian architecture is from that period.  

As UK cities go, Bath is one of our favourites. It’s strikingly beautiful and, as a university town, there’s always plenty going on and lots of great eating options.  

Day 12 of our itinerary is wholly dedicated to exploring Bath, and you’ll be staying here for the next two nights.  

There are a number of parking lots around Bath. Unless your accommodation has parking, ask them for their advice on the most convenient place to park. We parked at the Charlotte Street Long Stay Car Park, which is huge but not cheap; it was around £18 for 24 hours (cost is dependent on your vehicle’s level of emissions). 

Tours of Bath

There’s a bucket load to see in Bath and we highly recommend exploring it with a guide of some sort to get the most of out of your visit.

You can join a guided walking tour like this . Or go at your own pace and download a self-guided walking tour app like this one . This is what we did and while the commentary is hilariously flowery at times, it does provide a really good insight into the history and the buildings of this beautiful town. We were also able to do it over the course of the day and take our time.

Check out wide range of other themed walking tours you can do in Bath here .

Just make a note of any sites or museums you might want to visit before you rock up, and book ahead where necessary so you don’t miss out during busy periods.

Things to do in Bath

With or without a guide, you can take your pick of the many, many things to do in Bath. Exploring the A ncient Roman Baths is, of course, a must. Do this first thing if you can. We were there at opening and it was already getting crowded.  

While you can’t swim in the ancient baths these days, you can channel the Romans and experience for yourself Bath’s soothing thermal waters with a spa session at Thermae Bath Spa . Or literally take the waters as the Georgians did with a glass of the magic liquid during a high tea at The Pump Room , which is right above the ancient baths.    

Wander up to the Royal Crescent and the Circus to see the city’s most famous Georgian buildings. Cross the impressive the 18th century Pulteney Bridge , one of just four in the world with shops spanning both sides.  

Join a tour of Bath Abbey and go up the tower for views over the city (plan ahead if you want to do this, we missed out).  

If you’re here on a Saturday, head to Green Park Station for the weekly Bath Farmer’s Market and browse the yummy local produce. Or head to the historic Guildhall Market any day but Sunday and browse the stalls. 

Jane Austen lived in Bath and you can learn more about her life and the times at the Jane Austen Centre . Or head to the free Victoria Art Gallery or the Ho lburne Museum for a dose of art and sculpture.  

We also found Bath to have a really extensive and varied eating scene, from Michelin star restaurants and gastropubs to hole-in-the-wall street food. Keeping it low key on our first night, we had a tasty beef stew and a pint of delicious IPA in the cobbled backstreets at The Raven pub. 

Travel Tip: Don’t leave town without delving into the curious world of Bath’s historic ‘buns’. The city gave rise (pun intended) to two unique types of bun that are famous here today – the Sally Lunn Bun and the Bath Bun. Both have interesting backstories and they couldn’t taste any more different. We recommend a parallel taste test. We picked up a Sally bun from Sally Lunn’s Historic Eating House & Museum, and stuffed it with ham and cheese from the Guildhall Market, which is also where we bought a much sweeter Bath Bun.   Which will win your vote? 

Looking down into an ancient Roman bath house surrounded by columns in Bath, one of the top things to do in south west England.

Where to stay in Bath

You’ll be spending the next two nights in Bath. As a World Heritage city, a university city and a popular tourist destination, Bath offers accommodation right across the spectrum, from backpacker stays to serious luxe. The stays below are all in the city centre and have great reviews. If you’re after onsite parking, you’ll find more options outside of the historic centre.

  • Good value: The Z Hotel – great location | tiny but comfy rooms | friendly staff (we stayed here and while the room was teeny and the bathroom walls are frosted glass, which may not suit everyone, it was perfect for our stay and we loved the location)
  • Mid-range: The Henry Guesthouse – centrally located | cosy & comfy | lovely staff
  • Spend a bit more: Eight – restored historic house | big, beautiful rooms | close to abbey

Day 13 – Castle Combe, Lacock Abbey & Bath

Highlights: Cotswolds village of Castle Combe | Lacock Abbey | Final evening in Bath   Total driving distance: appx. 60km (37 miles)   Total driving time: appx. 1.5 hours   Overnight: Bath

You have another night Bath tonight, so you’ll have a second bite of the Bath dining scene. Today, though, we’re back in the car to explore some of the countryside highlights in this area. 

Castle Combe

Stretching north of Bath is the beautiful Cotswolds National Landscape. This is quintessential English country-and-village touring, and we recently spent a wonderful few days travelling through the area. There’s so much to see across this landscape though that it really deserves a couple of days at bare minimum.  

For this reason, we haven’t included the Cotswolds more broadly in this itinerary. What we have included is a taster, with a visit to a hamlet on the southern edge of the Cotswolds, Castle Combe. The bonus is that Castle Combe is one of the most photogenic of all the Cotswolds villages. It’s around 35 minutes’ drive north of Bath. 

Castle Combe village, as you see it today, dates largely back to the 14th and 15th centuries, when the cloth industry took off. The village flourished until water levels in the Bybrook River, critical for powering mills, dropped to the point the industry had to move. There have been virtually no new buildings in the village since. So what you see is an authentic snapshot of a village from a time long passed. 

Have a wander, taking in the pretty Cotswold stone cottages , the market square with its 14th century market cross , and historic St Andrew’s Church . The village’s two pubs, the Castle Inn and The White Hart , date back to the 12th and 14th centuries. 

The Manor House , a country house-turned-hotel, sits on the site of the former Norman castle that gave the village its name.    

There’s very limited street parking in and on the approach to the village. Your best bet for Castle Combe parking is in the paid Dunns Lane public car park, a 5 to 10 minute walk up the hill. 

People walking along a medieval village street in the Cotswolds on a South West England road trip.

Lacock Abbey

Our next stop today is the 800 year-old Lacock Abbey . It’s a 20 minute drive from Castle Combe. 

Built in the 13th century as a nunnery, Lacock Abbey became a grand country home following Henry VIIIs Dissolution of the Monasteries. It went on to be redecorated and remodelled throughout the ensuing centuries to suit ever-changing architectural and artistic tastes. 

Today’s, Lacock Abbey is a National Trust site. It’s open daily till around 5pm but check the National trust website before you go. There’s an entry fee plus a car park charge.

Late afternoon and evening in Bath

Back in Bath this afternoon and evening, check out whatever you didn’t get to see and do yesterday and pick somewhere awesome for dinner. It is, after all, the last night of our road trip! 

A curve of columned building on the Circus in Bath, lit up at night.

Day 14 – Return to London via Stonehenge

Highlights: Standing stones and museum of Stonehenge     Total driving distance : appx. 160km (100 miles)   Total driving time : appx. 2 hours 15 minutes, but keep an eye on traffic and factor in extra time as Greater London traffic is often seriously congested (especially the M25) and can add quite a bit of time to your journey.  

It’s the final day of our epic two week south west England road trip itinerary! 

Today you’re headed back to London, a 160km (100 miles) drive east of Bath. But we’ve included one more stop to break up the journey. It’s a tourist magnet, sure, but there’s a good reason for that: this is, after all, the pinnacle of ancient places to visit in south west England, if not the whole of the UK. We’re talking, of course, about Stonehenge. 

Stonehenge is around an hour’s drive south east of Bath. It’s open from 9.30am to 5pm daily and we recommend getting there for opening as it gets busy.   

Improvement programs in recent years have changed Stonehenge dramatically since our first visit some 20 years ago and we love coming here now.  

Tour the excellent visitor centre and museum and then take a walk (or the shuttle bus) out to the henge itself, where a redesign of the walkways means you can actually see and photograph the stones without a million people in the scene. 

Wander back to the visitor centre through the fields and past prehistoric mounds and monuments. Today’s experience is an entirely new and enlightening perspective on this incredibly ancient place and not to be missed. 

We also recommend downloading the English Heritage Stonehenge Audio Guide before you visit.

There’s a large car park at the site and you can book tickets on arrival, but you’ll save money if you buy them online ahead of time. English Heritage and National Trust (England) members can visit for free.

The tall standing stones of Stonehenge on a grassy field, one of the best things to do in south west England.

Time for one last classic pub lunch, if you can spare the extra hour. There are some excellent old pubs in the region around Wiltshire, like cosy 17th century pubs, The Swan at Enford and The Crown Inn at Cholderton, both around 15 minutes’ drive from Stonehenge. 

Back in the car, set the GPS for Heathrow Airport, Gatwick Airport or your London base, and enjoy the remainder of the journey recapping the many, many highlights of this magical taster of England’s incredible south-west. 

Planning a South West England Road Trip

Getting to london.

The start and finish point for this itinerary is London Heathrow, the UK’s largest airport, and a convenient location to collect and drop off a hire car. It’s also in the west of London, so it makes a good launchpad for our journey through the south west. 

You could also start this itinerary from London Gatwick, which has a huge range of car hire options as well and is south of London.  

Both airports are serviced by flights from around the world. Both can also be reached by direct and regular trains from central London, which in turn can be reached by trains from all over the UK mainland and from several cities in Europe.

Best time to visit south west England

People joke about it always being grey in England. And they wouldn’t be entirely wrong. It certainly feels like it’s overcast and drizzly a lot of the time, especially in winter. But there can also be lovely dry, sunny spells. 

Come expecting it to be overcast, always carry a rain jacket, and don’t let it get in the way of your day. In our experience, all the grey days just make the sunny days that much more welcome and enjoyable.  

But is there a best time to visit England’s south west?

Summer – Some would say summer is best, when the chance of sun is greater and the days warmer. It’s a good time to get outdoors, go walking and visit the beaches of the south and south west coasts.  

July and August are the busiest months in these areas, for both tourists and locals. Prices go up and accommodation can book out well in advance, especially in some of the coastal towns we visit on this itinerary. We don’t enjoy crowds or the hassle of trying to find parking in peak periods. So we’d personally avoid road tripping the south west in summer.  

Winter – Over December to February, London and the bigger cities are still busy with tourists but it gets much quieter in the countryside and smaller villages. At this time of year, the days are shorter and it can get really chilly if you’re spending time outdoors. On the plus side, the low sunlight (when it makes an appearance) at this time of year casts everything in a beautiful golden glow.  

Most importantly though, many cafes, restaurants, accommodations and historic sites close over the winter season, generally reopening around late March. We’ve travelled the south west in the wintertime and it’s beautiful, but all the closures can take a bit of the fun out of the itinerary. It’s definitely something to consider when planning your trip.   

Spring and Autumn – In our opinion, the shoulder periods of Spring (March to May) and Autumn (September to November) are the best times to road trip south west England. Outside of holiday periods, it’s not quite as busy and the countryside colours are at their best: bright and vivid in spring, and warm and muted in Autumn. 

Where to stay in south west England

You’ll find just about every kind of accommodation in the south west, to suit every price point. There are campgrounds, vacation rentals, apartments, B&Bs, boutique and budget chain hotels – everything.  

A uniquely British accommodation experience, and one of our favourite types of stay when we travel here, is a room in an historic coaching inn or pub. It’s a wonderfully ambient experience, and often includes an epic Full English breakfast – required eating at least once on road trips in the UK (but maybe not every day like we tend to).  

When we road trip, we usually stay in comfortable mid-range hotels and apartments, preferably with parking onsite or nearby. Throughout this post, we’ve included suggested budget, mid-range and higher price point accommodation options that have excellent reviews and which we’ve either stayed at ourselves, or which we would choose to stay in.   

Book accommodation well ahead, particularly if you’re wanting to stay somewhere particular or you’re travelling during the summer peak period.

We mainly use Booking.com to find and book accommodation when we travel.

Driving and renting a car in England

Some key points to note if you’re coming from overseas and plan on driving in England, or anywhere in the UK: 

  • You need to carry a valid driving licence from your home country to drive a car in the UK. However, if your home licence is not in English, you’ll need an International Driving Permit. 
  • In the UK, you drive on the left side of the road and your steering wheel is on the right side of the car. 
  • Familiarise yourself with the road rules and signage .  
  • Always make sure you have appropriate travel insurance. 
  • If you’re renting a car, aim to do so well in advance to get the best deal and the right car for you. We use RentalCars.com and Discover Cars to find our hire cars.  

If you have any questions, thoughts or updates to share about our south west England road trip itinerary, let us know in the comments below!   

If you’re looking for more great road tripping itineraries and adventures,  check out our Road Trips page , and our bucket list of 100 ultimate road trips around the world .

6 thoughts on “The Ultimate 2 Week South West England Road Trip Itinerary”

Thanks for sharing amazing information and ideas about road trips and travel in the UK. Regards: Lux Transfers UK

Thanks Maroof, glad you found it useful.

Would like mor information on your tour. Is sounds terrific. Please send information

Thanks for your message! You might be able to find organised tours for this kind of trip by searching on TripAdvisor and similar sites. However, if you’re driving your own car or hiring a car, we hope you might find our post useful as a suggested itinerary for travelling this route independently.

All the best! Danielle and John

The Wells Cathedral looks beautiful. I would love to explore its architecture from inside out. Another landmark that I dream of exploring is the Stonehenge. I would love to do this road trip.

Hey Rezmin, both amazing destinations and well worth a visit! Thanks for your message!

Leave a comment Cancel reply

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

Great British Bucket List

26 Best Seaside Day Trips From London

Time to share the best seaside day trips from london. whether you’re driving or travelling by train, all of these offer everything you could want from a day at the beach..

Colourful beach huts on Tankerton Slopes, Whitstable

There’s nothing more quintessentially ‘English’ than a day trip to the seaside. Escaping the city and enjoying the squawks of seagulls, the smell of salty sea air and a familiar package of battered fish and chips smothered in salt and vinegar.

We’ve saved up our 20ps to waste in the arcades, got excited for ice cream in an old-fashioned cone, and shouted ‘I can sea the sea’ the minute that slither of blue on the horizon comes into view.

Views over the dunes at Camber Sands

For me it all started with Brighton. Each summer, my Dad would drive us the hour and a bit to the coast. My sisters and I would skim stones on the beach, eat our body-weights in ice cream, enjoy mammoth portions of fish and chips (under the beady eyes of the patrolling seagulls) and spend a whopping £2 on the pier, attempting to beat the arcades.

Brighton promenade

One year, I played a game on the pier and won a stuffed panda that was bigger than me. I carried it around for the entire day, feeling proud of my achievement. A week later, its polystyrene ball stuffing was pouring out of its armpit and he was looking rather sad.

Yet, it’s fond memories like these that last a lifetime. The adrenaline rush as you see the sea, the scents associated with it – it’s just lovely. Thankfully, there are LOTS of great seaside day trips from London, so you can make some memories of your own.

From the old-fashioned charm of towns like Aldeburgh and Deal, to the beautiful sandy beaches of Camber and Bournemouth, and the bustling resort towns of Southend, Hastings and Weymouth, you’re bound to find somewhere you fancy visiting.

Botany Bay, Kent

All of these are within one to three hours of London, by train or car. Timings are calculated from Central London but will vary depending on where you’re starting your journey from. I’ve divided them up according to their direction from London, but they span the coastline from Suffolk, through Kent, East and West Sussex and Dorset. There’s even a surprise entry right here in London!

Seaside Day Trips North East Of London

Felixstowe, suffolk.

One of the most popular beach destinations in Suffolk, Felixstowe has four miles of sand and shingle beaches, stretching all the way from the Felixstowe Ferry to the Landguard Peninsula. It’s the perfect family day trip from London.

Felixstowe beach huts make this one of our favourite seaside day trips from London

Head to Felixstowe South Beach where kids can splash in the sheltered bay or build a giant sandcastle on the shore. When you fancy a break from the beach, you can stop by one of the shops on the seafront and pick up an ice cream or some fish and chips! It’s great for photography too, with lots of colourful beach huts to snap photos of.

Drive from London: 1 hour 58 Train journey from London: Just over 2 hours Train route from London : London Liverpool Street – Ipswich – Felixstowe

Aldeburgh, Suffolk

Aldeburgh has that traditional English seaside feel and is full of charm. Wander the old-fashioned promenade taking in views of the pastel coloured houses, in shades of yellow, blue and pink. Then watch the fishing boats coming and going from the shingle beach.

The town itself is famous for its music and arts festival which takes place in June each year, and this is arguably the most cultural of all the seaside day trips from London.

Aldeburgh Beach

Drive from London: 2 hours 20 Train journey from London: Over 3 hours Train route from London: London Liverpool Street – Ipswich – Saxmundham, then a bus.

Clacton-on-Sea, Essex

One of Essex’s premier seaside resorts, Clacton-on-Sea has everything you could need for a seaside day trip from London. There’s Clacton Pier, which has arcades, rides and plenty to keep little ones entertained. There’s a large sandy beach, which is spacious enough to spread out for a nice sunbathing session. Plus, the town has plenty of shops and restaurants to keep you entertained.

It’s fair to say that like many English seaside resorts, Clacton-on-Sea was bustling at the turn of the 1900s, and while it has grown a little tired over the years, there’s a lot of regeneration going on.

Drive from London: 1 hour 48 Train journey from London: 1 hour 26 Train route from London: Direct train from London Liverpool Street to Clacton-on-Sea

Mersea Island, Essex

How about visiting an island for seaside day trip from London? Mersea Island in Essex is eight miles square and sits within the Blackwater Estuary. The beaches on Mersea Island are a mix of sand and shingle. One of our favourite things to do on a day trip is walk along the Victoria Esplanade which is lined with colourful beach huts.

West Mersea beach huts

If you’re an adventure lover, you could go on a boat trip, try your hand at stand up paddle boarding, hire a kayak or learn how to sail. If you’re feeling peckish, you can’t beat the fresh seafood from The Company Shed in West Mersea.

Drive from London: 1 hour 41 Public transport from London: 2 hours 14 (trains and buses) Public transport from London: London Liverpool Street – Colchester, then two buses. Drive if you can!

Seaside Day Trips East Of London

Southend-on-sea, essex.

With the world’s longest pleasure pier, a vibrant seafront, and plenty of beautiful beaches, there are plenty of fun things to do in Southend-on-Sea. It’s another iconic seaside town, that was a popular holiday spot in Victorian times for upmarket city types.

In recent years, Southend has experienced a mini renaissance. It’s now a bustling seaside town with some excellent restaurants and a thriving local arts scene. Spend a few hours screaming on the rides at Adventure Island, head to the golden sands of the beach, enjoy a gourmet dinner at one of the town’s top restaurants or walk the Thames Estuary Path.

Food by John Lawson, Southend-on-Sea

If you’re looking for the closest seaside day trips from London by train, then Southend is a great option, with direct trains taking under an hour. You can find out more about visiting in our guide to the top things to do in Southend .

Drive from London: 1 hour 15 Train journey from London: 51 minutes Train route from London: Direct trains from London Fenchurch Street to Southend Central

Seaside Day Trips South East Of London

Whitstable, kent.

This cute town in Kent is one of the most popular seaside day trips from London. Part of the reason it’s such a favourite is how accessible it is. You can catch a direct train from London Victoria to Whitstable in under an hour and a half.

Wheelers Oyster Bar, Whitstable

This adorable pebble beach town has lots to shout about. Famed for its fresh oysters, independent shops and photogenic beach huts, it’s a great spot to visit when the sun is shining. When you get peckish head to The Lobster Shack, Wheelers or The Whitstable Oyster Company for some of the best oysters in town.

Oysters on the beach in Whitstable, Kent

Drive from London: 1 hour 34 Train journey from London: 1 hour 21 Train route from London: Direct train from London Victoria to Whitstable

Margate, Kent

One of my new favourite seaside day trips from London, Margate is full of surprises! I visited last year on a sunny day and enjoyed a day being a big kid at Dreamland – one of the UK’s oldest amusement parks, which has been lovingly restored in recent years. I screamed my way around the rollercoasters, yelped as I was dropped from dizzy heights, and enjoyed some great food in a colourful setting.

Dreamland Margate

Margate has a huge beach too, and it’s another English seaside resort which feels like it’s on the up. Trendy vintage stores and antique shops share adjoining walls with hipster cafes and chic seafood restaurants.

Margate Beach - one of our favourite seaside day trips from London

On sunny days, you’ll find the beach packed with kids building sandcastles and paddling in the chilly English waters, while the grown-ups feast on fish and chips and read their latest holiday novels. For something a little more cultural, there’s Turner Contemporary – the town’s cultural hub, which showcases the best in modern art.

Drive from London: 1 hour 53 Train journey from London: 1 hour 38 Train route from London: Direct train from St Pancras International to Margate

Botany Bay, Kent

This incredible beach on the eastern corner of Broadstairs in Kent is home to some seriously surprising views. Wander the sandy beach at low tide and enjoy views of the impressive chalk stacks and epic white cliffs. When the tide is out, rock pools are revealed – which provides lots of fun for kids to explore.

Botany Bay, Kent

At this time, you can also take a walk across to Joss Bay which is popular with surfers. It’s worth noting that some of the beach gets cut off at high tide, so check the timings before you venture off too far.

Drive from London: 1 hour 54 Public transport from London: 2 hours 8 Public transport route from London: Train from London St Pancras – Broadstairs by train, then catch a bus

Ramsgate, Kent

Ramsgate is a pretty harbour town in Kent, and has a buzzy atmosphere, with lots of restaurants, cafes and bars dotted along the waterfront. The town has plenty of cute gift shops, as well as a lovely sandy beach. We love walking around the harbour, choosing our favourite yachts and imagining life on the high seas.

Ramsgate Harbour, Kent

The chalk cliff coastline in this region is stunning for photography. It’s also a great place for water sports, with kayaking, sailing and kitesurfing all popular.

Drive from London: 1 hour 48 Train journey from London: 1 hour 24 Train route from London: Direct train from London St Pancras International to Ramsgate

Broadstairs, Kent

I’ve mentioned Botany Bay, which is part of the Broadstairs coastline, but now it’s time to focus on the main town of Broadstairs. This is another fantastic seaside day trip from London, and was even Charles Dickens’ favourite holiday spot!

Broadstairs, Kent - one of the best seaside day trips from London

As well as a huge beach, there are kids rides on the seafront, a mini golf course, a few art galleries, charming cafes, independent shops and even an annual food festival.

Drive from London: 1 hour 50 Train journey from London: 1 hour 30 Train route from London: Direct train from London St Pancras International to Broadstairs

I’ll always remember visiting Deal with my Dad on a seaside day trip from London. The old town has a pier stretching out into the sea, and all the classic gift shops, fish and chip shops and places to buy ice cream. It doesn’t have the holiday resort brashness of places like Margate and Southend, so if you like the simpler things in life, it’s a lovely spot to visit.

Deal Castle

If you like a bit of history you can walk along the beach to Deal Castle. Built for King Henry VIII, it’s one of the finest Tudor artillery castles in England.

Drive from London: 1 hour 51 Train journey from London: 1 hour 23 Train route from London: Direct trains from St Pancras International to Deal

Folkestone, Kent

Another lovely seaside town that has been regenerated and falls perfectly into ‘underrated’ territory! The town has a buzzy creative quarter filled with colourful stores selling art and gifts you never knew you needed. There’s Sunny Sands – a small sandy beach, and plenty of independent restaurants and quirky cafes dotted around the town.

It’s a town famed for its art scene, with a mermaid sculpture to rival Copenhagen’s and a cast iron statue of a human by Anthony Gormley, which stands looking out from under the Harbour Arm. It’s less of a seaside trip for sitting on a beach with a bucket and spade, but if you’re looking for good food and some creative places to explore, Folkestone is a fab option.

Drive from London: 1 hour 30 Train journey from London: 53 minutes Train route from London: Direct trains from St Pancras International to Folkestone

Dover, Kent

Dover isn’t a classic option for an English beach trip, but it’s a great one if you like hiking. It’s a port town, with ferries leaving for Calais throughout the day. The town is famed for its white cliffs and history. Spend the day getting out of London, exploring the beautiful coastal landscapes with a hike over those pearly white cliffs, before taking a tour of Dover Castle.

Oh, and don’t forget to look out, you might just spot France across the English Channel!

Drive from London: 1 hour 58 Train journey from London: 1 hour 14 Train route from London: Direct trains from St Pancras International to Dover

Camber Sands, East Sussex

Unlike many of the beaches in Sussex, Camber is covered in beautiful golden sand, and is also home to some pretty dunes. It’s often referred to as one of the best beaches in the UK, and thankfully, also boasts some of the best weather too! Kids will adore this beach – it’s a great one for building giant sandcastles or having a paddle in the waves.

Views over the dunes at Camber Sands

While the beach is long and wide, it’s known for being pretty windy. In fact, it’s the strong winds that attract top wind surfers and kite surfers to the area. There are a few holiday parks located right on the beach, plus some gorgeous holiday cottages for a longer break.

Drive from London: 2 hours 6 Public transport journey from London: 1 hour 37 Public transport route from London: St Pancras International – Ashford International – Rye then a bus to Camber Sands

Hastings, East Sussex

Hastings is one of my favourite seaside day trips from London. I’ve been twice in the last few years and have loved exploring all the things you can do there. Hastings is like a more rugged cousin of Brighton! It’s got the kooky cafes, street art and independent stores… but it’s got a bit more too!

View from Hastings Pier

There’s the old funicular railway going up the cliff, a huge crazy golf course out by the beach, a pier lined with candy-coloured beach huts and an area of fisherman’s huts where you can pick up the freshest seafood in town.

View from Hastings funicular

If you’ve visited Brighton a million times, give Hastings a go next! Watch out for the seagulls though – last time I visited one swooped down and plucked my ice cream out of my hand!

Drive from London: 2 hours Train journey from London: 1 hour 27 Train route from London: Direct trains from London Bridge or Victoria (slower trains from Victoria)

Seaside Day Trips South Of London

Eastbourne, east sussex.

One of the most popular seaside day trips from London, Eastbourne has it all: a Victorian pier, a three-mile long beach and plenty to do when the sun is shining. If you don’t fancy relaxing on the beach, you could walk to Birling Gap to see the beautiful chalk cliffs at Beachy Head and Seven Sisters (more on that coming up).

Or, you could enjoy some live music at the Eastbourne Bandstand, which has the nickname ‘the busiest bandstand on planet earth (unless you know better)’!

Eastbourne seafront

One of the best seaside activities in Eastbourne? Sitting on the bumpy pebbles of the beach, with fish and chips lathered with salt and vinegar, sweating slightly through the paper they’re wrapped in. Nothing beats it! Just avoid the hungry seagulls…

Drive from London: 2 hours 17 Train journey from London: 1 hour 23 Train route from London: Direct trains from Victoria to Eastbourne

Birling Gap, East Sussex

If you’ve always wanted to take in the stunning views of the chalk cliffs at Beachy Head and Seven Sisters, then this is the seaside day trip from London for you. Birling Gap is the National Trust area located on the South Downs coast, and is a great spot from which to start a hike along the South Downs Way or enjoy the nature reserve. There’s a café too, so grab an ice cream and fuel up before your walk.

Birling Gap, East Sussex

If you’re craving some beach time, you can get down to Birling Gap Beach. Head down the steps and you’ll feel just how vast the chalk cliffs are as you stand at the base looking up. It’s worth noting the cliffs here are known for occasional rock falls, so don’t get too close.

Drive from London: 2 hours 15 Train journey from London: No direct routes so driving is recommended, or you could walk from Eastbourne

Brighton, East Sussex

The ultimate seaside day trip from Brighton, I’ve lost count of the number of times I’ve been to this vibrant seaside town. It’s one of the best seaside day trips from London by train (only takes an hour!) which makes it seriously popular when the sun is shining. In fact, we love it so much we highlighted it as one of the best places to visit on our 10-day England itinerary !

Beach huts between Brighton and Hove

There’s so much to do in Brighton. There’s the pier which is crammed full of terrifying rides, noisy amusement arcades and food outlets wafting the sickly scent of donuts through the air. There’s the mammoth pebbly beach, lined with little art galleries, gift shops and restaurants. There’s the i360 – a tourist attraction which offers great views of the area. Plus, there are some absolutely gorgeous hotels along the seafront, perfect for longer breaks.

trip south london

Then there’s the main town area, where you’ll find endless wiggly streets with independent stores, quirky cafes and fabulous local restaurants. Shop for vintage jewellery, bohemian clothing and vegan delights in The Lanes and North Laine. There’s a reason everyone loves Brighton, it’s just as great as it sounds, and it’ll have you coming back for more, time and time again.

Drive from London: 1 hour 50 Train journey from London: 1 hour Train route from London: Direct trains from London Bridge and Victoria to Brighton

Worthing, West Sussex

With its wide promenade and pier, you could be fooled into thinking Worthing is just another English seaside town, but there’s a little more going on than you might expect. It’s home to one of the oldest working cinemas in the UK, has some cool microbreweries and the beach huts here aren’t just used by tourists, some are the quirky studios of local artists.

Worthing Beach, West Sussex

Head to Warwick Street, Portland Road and Rowlands Road for a range of quirky and independent shops. Or take a walk down Tarring High Street to see the town’s historic architecture.

Drive from London: 1 hour 55 Train journey from London: 1 hour 27 Train route from London: Direct trains from Victoria to Worthing

Bognor Regis, West Sussex

Oh Bognor, how ridiculed you’ve been over the years, but we feel it’s unfair! Bognor Regis is a proper summer holiday town on the south coast of England. Think candy floss, fish and chips, amusement arcades and a great beach. I guess some of its naf reputation has come from the Butlins Resort, located to the east of the town.

Bognor Regis, West Sussex

We say, leave your expectations in London and head to the coast for a day of out and out fun. Bognor Regis is officially one of the sunniest towns in the entire country, so what better place for a day on the beach!

Drive from London: 2 hours 5 Train journey from London: 1 hour 45 Train route from London: Direct trains from London Victoria to Bognor Regis

Seaside Day Trips South West Of London

West wittering, west sussex.

If all you want is a sandy beach close to London, West Wittering is a great option. It’s one of the best Blue Flag beaches in the country, known for the highest water quality and top facilities. Kids will love playing on the sand and running in and out of the water. It’s popular with swimmers too.

There are some great views from the beach areas. You can see Portsmouth and the Isle of Wight across the water, as well as Chichester Harbour and the South Downs. It doesn’t have the fairground appeal of the resort spots around the coast, but it’s one of the best sandy beaches in England.

Drive from London: 2 hours Public transport journey from London: 2 hours 20 Public transport from London: London Victoria – Chichester then a bus to West Wittering

Bournemouth, Dorset

One of the most popular beach breaks in England, Bournemouth has four Blue Flag beaches – Alum Chine, Durley Chine, Fisherman’s Walk and Southbourne. The area boasts some of the warmest sea temperatures in the UK, so it’s one of the few places you might feel confident taking a dip!

Bournemouth Beach

There’s loads to do in Bournemouth too including crazy golf at Smuggler’s Cove, the amusement arcades along the seafront, the Oceanarium, the cliff lift and even the town’s iconic land train. It’s the perfect place for some good, old fashioned seaside fun!

Drive from London: 2 hours 9 Train journey from London: 2 hours 2 Train route from London: Direct trains from London Waterloo to Bournemouth

Poole, Dorset

Located just south of Bournemouth, with easy access to the stunning Dorset coast, Poole has long been one of southern England’s premier tourist destinations.

Storm Restaurant, Poole

This classy town sits on the largest natural harbour in the United Kingdom, and is packed with quaint winding streets, beautiful buildings, and great shops. There are so many things to do in Poole, from water sports and walking, to enjoying a lovely meal on the waterfront or enjoying some a play at the world-class arts centre. You can find out more about visiting this great seaside town in our guide to the top things to do in Poole .

Drive from London: 2 hours 22 Train journey from London: 2 hours 13 Train route from London: Direct trains from London Waterloo to Poole

Sandbanks, Dorset

If you’re looking for an upmarket seaside day trip from London, head to Sandbanks. This small peninsula crosses the mouth of Poole Harbour and has boasts some of the softest sand in England. It’s a wealthy area, with lots of luxurious mansions and holiday apartments lining the seafront.

Sandbanks, Dorset

In the warmer months, Sandbanks is the ideal place to spend a day. You’ll find everything you need, including shops selling beach toys and ice creams, as well as companies offering all kinds of water-sports and activities in the bay.

Try your hand at crazy golf or volleyball, or simply lie back on a deckchair and soak up the rays. For lovers of gourmet food, there’s even a Rick Stein restaurant in Sandbanks.

Drive from London: 2 hours 20 Public transport from London: 2 hours 35 Public transport route from London: London Waterloo – Bournemouth by train, then catch the No.50 bus

Weymouth, Dorset

Weymouth is another great English beach destination, and while it’s a little further away than some on this list, it’s about as far as we’d recommend going for a seaside day trip from London.

Weymouth - a great seaside day trip from London

If you’re trying to find activities to keep the whole family entertained, it’s a great option. There’s a huge beach, adventure golf course, SeaLife Centre and a pretty harbour area with colourful buildings. When we last visited Weymouth, we hired a kayak and headed out for a paddle. It was lovely to see the start of the Jurassic Coast from another angle!

trip south london

Drive from London: 2 hours 40 Train journey from London: 2 hours 41 Train route from London: Direct trains from London Waterloo

Seaside Day Trips In London

And finally, a beach right here in London…

Ruislip Lido, North West London

I discovered Ruislip Lido last summer. My sister moved to the area and heard about somewhere with a ‘beach’ nearby. I couldn’t quite believe it when we turned up at Ruislip Lido. It really did feel like being at the beach. Families were scattered on the sand, kids building sandcastles while the adults relaxed and read books.

Ruislip Lido, London

The reservoir has an artificial beach plus an adorable miniature railway, which goes from the car park to the main beach area. If you have kids this is a great day trip in London.

Drive from Central London: 45 minutes Public transport from Central London: Around an hour. Catch the Piccadilly Line to Ruislip then the H13 bus.

I hope you’ve enjoyed reading about these amazing seaside day trips from London. Let us know where you decide to go, or if you’ve got any favourite spots that we haven’t mentioned.

Enjoyed this post? Save it for later… 

Best Seaside Day Trips From London

Join our Adventure: Get all my insider tips for motorhoming & road trips

Wandering Bird Motorhome travel vanlife & road trip logo

England Road Trip: 50 Unmissable ideas (for every UK itinerary)

England road trip idea- Isle of wight road trip

Planning an England road trip? Here are some of the best itinerary ideas for all schedules, including London to Cornwall, the Cotswolds and Kent in southern England, National Parks like the Lake District or Peak District, Northern England and all the way up to the Scottish border.

Whatever your cup of tea, there’s a UK road trip idea here for you. We’ve also provided a helpful map so you can visualise your route.

*We work hard to make this the best motorhome travel blog and road trip website possible, full of helpful content for you. The website is supported by our readers, so if you buy through links on this site we may earn a commission- at no extra cost to you. All opinions remain our own .

If you find this post useful, you can also treat us to a coffee – we promise to enjoy it while creating more useful content like this- we might even indulge in a biscuit (or two!)

JUMP AHEAD TO...

UK Road Trips- How to Plan

Planning a UK road trip to England or elsewhere can be tough. 

There are SO MANY places, ideas, options and reviews- how on earth are you supposed to choose the best way or most scenic drives?

Then, you have to factor in how long you have for your UK road trip (remembering that much of rural UK has smaller, slower roads, so it takes a lot longer to get there than you might expect. 

So, if you’re planning a road trip around England (and the UK) and feeling overwhelmed, here are some of our favourite road trips and itinerary ideas to help you. We’ll discuss the best bits of each area, why and when you should visit, how far it is from London and where you should allow extra time to explore.

England Road Trip Ideas- Where to Start

England road trip idea- Isle of wight road trip

The first thing to decide is where you want to visit on your road trip. Also, remember that England is only one section of the UK- there are several other countries to explore (England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland make up the United Kingdom).

So, if you want to do a full UK road trip, you’ll need more time than if you were just doing an England road trip.

Our biggest tip is not to overface yourself. Whether you only have a long weekend for a quick trip from London or a week to get out on the open road and tour, make sure you leave time to actually get out of your vehicle and explore the places you’re visiting- you’ll find plenty of historic sites, sandy beaches and incredible routes to enjoy. 

Roughly speaking, you can split England in half- the South of England and the North  (the line roughly goes through Birmingham) or even further into quarters if you only have time for a one-week road trip. 

Again, how far you can travel will depend on how much time you have, as well as how you are travelling (rental car, motorhome or public transport), but to do each half ‘properly’ we would recommend at least 2-3 weeks- especially if it’s your first time in England.

Having said that, you can see some of the best sights in less time than that- here’s our one week in England road trip itinerary .

Make planning your next road trip EASY (& fun!)

When you’re planning a road trip, keeping track & organising all your ideas is often the hardest part. Fix that TODAY with our printable pdf road trip planner. Grab yours FREE now

trip south london

This form subscribes you to our mailing list. We share tips, itineraries, stupid mistakes and guides like this for road trippers and motorhomers.

We never spam (yuck) and you can unsubscribe at any time.

Where to stay during your England road trip

If you’re planning a motorhome or campervan trip , you’ll be able to travel and stop along the way, often without booking in advance, using schemes like Brit Stops or wild camping in your motorhome .

If you’re in a car or motorbike, there are PLENTY of hotels and BnBs to use en route. If you’re travelling in summer we recommend booking at least the first stop in advance- if you use Booking.com for all your accommodation you’ll find you can get a great deal and save a lot of money.

England Road Trip Map

I know how hard it can be to visualise places if you don’t know the country well, so here’s a map of England with several of the road trip destinations shown on it.

Out of interest, if you did this route, it’s about 1056 miles (1700km) long. You could technically do it in a week, but you’d barely have time to get out of the car!

England road trip itinerary ideas and map

Common England Road Trip Questions

How long does it take to drive the whole of england .

Many people wonder “ How long does it take to drive the whole of England ?” That’s a tough question, as there are so many places to go and depends a lot on your starting point.

Most people allow 2-3 weeks to drive through as much of England as they can, but that will involve a LOT of driving. Of course, you can take a look at the road trip itinerary ideas below and see which scenic route or quaint villages most appeal to you- and then plan your trip around that.

One common UK road trip idea is to drive from Land’s End in Cornwall all the way up to John o’Groats in Scotland, which is about 838miles (1350km). Obviously, this is a road trip which involves England AND Scotland, and that brings me to another important point.

Want to rent a vehicle for your road trip?

These might help:

  • Discover incredible deals for motorhome/ camper rentals
  • Find the best deals for car rental

READ: 10 essential questions to ask before you rent a motorhome

Can we go to England by road?

This is a common question for anyone who doesn’t live in the UK- and the short answer is yes, you can drive to England from mainland Europe.

Whether you’re enjoying a European road trip (here are some ideas for you ), or want to combine a trip to England with another country, you can drive to England from Europe via either the Eurotunnel or taking one of several car ferries (they also take motorhomes/ campervans on most of the ferry routes.)

If you’re planning a road trip from France to England, which route you take will depend on which part of France and England you want to visit- find out more in our Eurotunnel vs Ferry post.

And if you’re going the other way and will be driving in Europe, make sure you are aware of the new rules for driving in Europe after BREXIT .

If you’re like more help planning your trip, this post about how to plan an epic UK road trip will help.

Is England the UK or Great Britain?

Neither. And part of both 🙂

It’s common for people to confuse an England road trip with a UK road trip. England is just one country within the UK, along with Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. If you want to extend your trip and see more of those countries, you might enjoy our post on the best UK road trips and scenic drive ideas.

The UK is short for ‘The United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland’.

Great Britain is the LANDMASS of the largest island in the British Isles (the one which makes up England, Wales and Scotland). Northern Ireland, Isle of Man and the Channel Islands are not included in this.

And, to make things even more odd, the British Isles includes ALL the islands, including the whole of Ireland, which isn’t part of the UK at all.

Thoroughly confused? Ok, let’s just stick to England road trip ideas! 🙂

South England Road Trip Ideas

If you’re visiting London and want to explore part of the country for a few days, southern England is a good place to start. Of course, there are a HUGE number of places to explore in ‘South England’ (which is roughly classed as anywhere below Birmingham), so I’m just going to pick a few highlights to inspire you.

Cornwall- South West England

England road trip ideas and itinerary- South England cornwall road trip

Cornwall is one of my favourite places to road trip in England. I spent 2 years living there whilst I was in the Navy, and have been back many times since. There are plenty of things to do in Cornwall , but there are some important tips you need to know before you arrive!

Why is Cornwall one of the best England road trips?

If you want cute villages, incredible beaches and more history than you can shake a stick at, Cornwall is perfect. Also, they have some of the best ice cream IN THE WORLD (no kidding) and it’s perfectly acceptable to eat a scone with jam and clotted cream EVERY day and no one will judge you.

IMPORTANT NOTE : There is intense rivalry between Devon and Cornwall over whether jam or cream should go first on a scone. In Cornwall, they do jam and THEN cream, which is apparently the way the Queen preferred her scones .

(Don’t worry, they’re used to tourists and won’t stone you if you get it wrong. But be warned if you want to live there…!) 

In Devon, they do it the other way. I’ve tried both, and I’m a jam first girl (because you can then put more cream on!)

When should you visit Cornwall?

Cornwall is best anytime between Easter and mid-October.

TOP TIP : Avoid July and August if you possibly can. The schools are on holiday and it feels like EVERYONE in England has travelled to the same small Cornish village as you.

Beaches are overcrowded, parking becomes a struggle and there’s a very real chance of shops running out of ice cream. Don’t do that to yourself. You deserve that ice cream.

Also, many businesses and attractions close after mid-October for the winter, so you might find you can’t do everything you want to outside the season.

Having said that, we find Cornwall one of the best places to enjoy Autumn in Europe – the weather is still warm, but everywhere is quieter and easier to get to.

How long should you spend roadtripping Cornwall?

How long is a piece of string!! But, as you can see on our Cornish road trip itinerary , we recommend 7-10 days minimum to see all the best places.

Where are the best places to visit in Cornwall on a road trip?

Did I mention that I used to live here? I have SO many recommendations for places to visit we could be here all week!!! Some of my absolute favourites (and this is like choosing my favourite child… or chocolate bar) include:

  • Tintagel Castle (the home of Arthur and the round table)
  • Minack Theatre (built onto the side of a cliff)
  • St Michael’s Mount
  • Boscastle (where one of the best witchcraft museums in the world is!)
  • Newquay beach (and bars!)

READ MORE: Discover our complete Cornwall road trip itinerary (45 places you HAVE to see!)

England road trip ideas and itinerary- Devon road trip south coast england travel

Recommended by Ben at Driftwood Journals

Famed for its endless rolling hills, craggy coastlines and clotted cream delights, Devon is unsurprisingly one of the most popular destinations in the UK – and a dream for rural road-trippers! With wild moors galore, cutesy towns and villages, and bountiful beaches, you don’t have to drive far in Devon to stumble upon scenes of unparalleled beauty.

Highlights and best places to visit in Devon

  • Dartmouth- one of the best towns in the county (and home of the Royal Naval Officer training. I spent a year here…running up those bl***y hills!) Hire a boat and explore the river.
  • Paignton- the beach with the red sand and is also known as the English Riviera.
  • Dartmoor National Park
  • Exmoor National Park
  • Exmouth with its beautiful painted houses
  • Salcombe Harbour – a holiday hotspot for all generations.
  • Dulverton- head to the Copper Kettle tearoom; you won’t regret it!

Devon road trip ideas

Pack up your motorhome/ camper (or car with tent) and find a site with views across the Devonshire cow-grazed hillsides of the Lyn Valley, or out over Dartmoor. You can wild camp in Devon, but not on the moors. Find out more about motorhome wild camping in the UK.

For a coastal trip, explore sea towns like Salcombe and Dartmouth (where you can take a boat up to Greenway, Agatha Christie’s summer home) and round to Exmouth, before heading north to Woolacombe, Dawlish and the fishing boat bobbing harbour of Ilfracombe. Enjoy the bustle and culture in the capital of Exeter or discover the notorious prison of Dartmoor.

Alternatively, head to North Devon and enjoy the wilder seas and views of the north coast. This is a great area for surfing and watersports.

If you have more time (and fuel) to burn, take to the A386 between Appledore and Plymouth, traversing through forested valleys to picture-perfect towns like Great Torrington and Tavistock, where you can tour the tearooms and plan the rest of your trip in the park while dangling your toes in the River Tavy.

But the true beauty of road tripping in Devon is that you don’t really need to plan too extensively. You’ll never be far from a cream tea pitstop, and the verdant country roads will offer up some of the most perfect picnic spots you’ll ever see. All you need is is a full tank, and a little patience when stuck behind tractor after tractor!

When is the best time to visit Devon on a road trip?

As with Cornwall, the best time to visit Devon is Spring to Autumn, but avoid the high summer months if you can, especially if you’re on a UK motorhome holiday .

Can you visit Devon on a day trip from London?

You can, but it’s quite a long drive. I’d say you’d need at least 2 or 3 days to really be able to explore anything.

Dorset- One of England’s Best Road Trips

England road trip itinerary ideas- best places to visit

Recommended by Paul | Anywhere We Roam

The Jurassic Coast stretches 95 miles across Dorset in southern England. With an iconic coastline of towering white cliffs, it’s an excellent destination for a classic road trip. Stunning scenery, historical sites and local breweries make the Jurassic Coast one of the best places to experience the beautiful English countryside.

Dorset road trip- best places to visit?

The main highlight of a road trip to Dorset in the area has to be Old Harry Rocks – a collection of white stone monoliths that have been carved out along the coast. It’s one of the most impressive stretches of scenery in the UK with dazzling chalk stacks assembled like a jigsaw puzzle waiting to be completed. If you get time, be sure to enjoy one of the many fabulous Dorset walks- you won’t regret it.

A thirty-minute drive away, Corfe Castle stands as a reminder of England’s 11th-Century past. It was one of the earliest Norman castles built and today it glows in its dilapidated glory overlooking the Dorset hills. It’s a stunning, photogenic inclusion on a UK road trip.

For another natural phenomenon, Durdle Door is possibly one of the most recognisable symbols of the Jurassic Coast. Over time, crashing waves have eroded limestone stacks in the sea leaving a glorious natural arch.

It’s a beautiful stretch of beach, ideal for a long summer stroll. It’s also next to the famous Lulworth Cove, which is a wonderful place to enjoy an ice cream!

Editors note: (I (Kat) actually jumped off the top of Durdle Door on my hen party!)

After soaking up the stunning scenery, head west to Lyme Regis, a quaint town with a vibrant independent retail scene. The historic Cobb Harbour set against moody cliffs is well-preserved and houses some of the best coffee in the area.

When is the best time to visit Dorset on an England road trip?

The best time to visit the Jurassic Coast on a road trip is from May to early July when the surrounding countryside will be verdant green and covered in wildflowers, but there’s not too much traffic!

Hampshire road trip

trip south london

Hampshire is another county in England we know well, having lived here for 14+ years. There’s plenty to enjoy on a road trip to Hampshire, from beautiful cities to picturesque country houses.

Highlights of a Hampshire road trip

Some of our favourite places to visit in Hampshire include:

  • Winchester- be sure to visit the Cathedral where Jane Austen is buried and you can see one of the oldest Bibles in the world. If you’re lucky enough to be visiting in December, don’t miss the famous Winchester Christmas Market , held in the Cathedral grounds each December.
  • Highclere Castle (or Downton Abbey, as you might know it!)
  • Lymington – for the oldest open sea water baths in the UK – and the New Forest (check out the Wildlife park there and make sure to take some memorable photos).
  • Hinton Ampner- 18th century famous manor house known for its gardens.
  • Portsmouth (you MUST go to the Mary Rose museum and HMS Victory)
  • Isle of Wight (see below)

Isle of Wight road trip

Recommended by Darek | DarekandGosia

The  Isle of Wight , famous for its beautiful views, is an island on the south coast of England, just below Southampton. Technically, it’s part of Hampshire, but feels like a different world.

With a motorhome or car, you can reach the island by ferry from either Southampton or Portsmouth – book in advance during summer. There are also a couple of foot passenger ferries and a hovercraft from Southsea.

Why is it one of England’s best road trips?

The Isle of Wight is like going back in time. It’s worth a road trip here for even a weekend, to escape the hustle and bustle of normal life, ride bikes and take a walk on the cliffs.

Also, there are some wonderful places to stay. If you’re on a road trip, check out these amazing Isle of Wight campsites – some with stunning sea views!

What is there to do?

You can start exploring the island in Shanklin – one of the coastal villages famous for its beautiful beaches. On the promenade along the sea you will find many restaurants and hotels – most of the Island is typically tourist-oriented.

From Shanklin drive to the western part of the island. The most characteristic point is The Needles – three chalk rocks emerging from the sea with a small lighthouse built at the end of one of the columns. You can get to Needles by car and then follow the path on foot to the cliff slope. It’s a fabulous place for a picnic.

Next to Needles is Old Battery, a military fortification dating from the nineteenth century. There you can find World War II memorabilia or visit one of the various exhibitions are also taking place.

While driving around the island make sure you get to Carisbrooke Castle near Newport. Its construction began in the 12th century. It is worth taking a moment to walk around the castle, relax in the Edwardian-style garden.

One of my favourite places on the Island is Osborne House- Queen Victoria’s summer home. You can walk around the gardens and the house and even enjoy an ice cream on her private beach. Osborne House is run by English Heritage.

When is the best time to visit the Isle of Wight?

The Isle of Wight is a must-see for anyone who wants to admire the British climate and above all fantastic views. It is worth going here all year round – it’s actually one of the best places to visit in Europe in October , when there are fewer tourists and you can enjoy the views & roads!

Norfolk Broads

England road trip ideas and itinerary- norfolk

Recommended by Mandi | Big Family, Little Adventures

Sometimes you want nothing more than to escape the hustle and the bustle of everyday life, the noise, the bright lights, the never-ending pace of life. If you want to get away, the Norfolk Broads is pure escapism; big skies, plenty of peace and quiet and an abundance of wildlife.

Best places to visit in Norfolk on a road trip

  • The Old Roman Fort at Burgh Castle with an elevated position and commanding views over the marshes – perfect for a walk in both winter morning frost or a hot and hazy mid-summer evening
  • If you prefer a bit of activity, Wroxham is a bustling Broads village- home to Roy’s of Wroxham, possibly the largest village shop you have ever seen
  • Plenty of riverside pubs and restaurants in Wroxham and all around the Broads- the perfect places to stop for a bite to eat
  • St Benet’s Abbey – an 11th century monastery defying time, standing in a stunning green valley.
  • If you are an animal lover, you will enjoy a visit to Wroxham Barns to feed the lambs or spot the grey seals on the Norfolk beaches

Norfolk Road Trip- when is the best time to visit?

You can explore Norfolk all year. In summer, if you would like to explore the best Norfolk beaches or Broads up close, why not hire a dayboat; these can be hired at various boatyards throughout the Broads. Waveney River Centre is another stunning place to stop and admire the view, either by boat or car.

The challenge is (as always in England!) the weather. In dry conditions, most paths are excellent, but it can get a bit more challenging in wet weather.

However, over the years, an increasing number of boardwalks have been developed, increasing safe access to the Broads whatever the weather. Also, seeing the windmills and rivers on a crisp winter morning is unforgettable.

Time does not stop in Norfolk, but it really does feel like it slows down.  To be able to watch the sunset across the broads any time of year is a magical experience and the perfect place to enjoy a chilled road trip.

Sussex, Kent and Surrey

trip south london

Ahhh, the picturesque south-east corner of England, which includes the Garden of England (that’s the other name for Kent). This area is lush, green and has some many historic buildings and castles you’ll find it impossible to avoid them.

It’s also home to plenty of gorgeous sandy beaches, white cliffs (such as Dover and Beachy Head) and some truly wonderful parks to walk in.

Even better, it’s all easily reached from London by car and train, so it’s easy to get away from the city for a few days if you’d like a countryside break or a trip to the beach.

Best Places to visit in Sussex include:

Sussex is actually split into East and West Sussex, but to make things easy on your road trip I’ve made one list for you. They’re not that far apart from each other!

  • Brighton : A vibrant seaside city famous for its pebble beach, iconic pier, and the Royal Pavilion with its distinctive architecture. Explore the Lanes for unique shops and enjoy the city’s lively arts and music scene. See below for more ideas
  • Arundel : Home to Arundel Castle, a medieval and Victorian castle that overlooks the River Arun. The town itself is picturesque with cobbled streets and antique shops.
  • Chichester : A historic cathedral city with Roman origins, Chichester offers a mix of history, culture, and shopping. The Chichester Cathedral and Pallant House Gallery are notable attractions.
  • Lewes : Known for its medieval architecture, Lewes Castle, and historic streets. The Lewes Bonfire Night is a famous annual event.
  • Eastbourne : A traditional seaside town with a Victorian pier, beautiful seafront, and the iconic Beachy Head cliffs nearby.
  • Rye : A charming medieval town with cobbled streets, half-timbered houses, and views of the surrounding marshland.
  • Battle : Famous for the Battle of Hastings in 1066, this town is home to Battle Abbey and the Battlefield. Explore the historic sites and learn about this pivotal event in English history.
  • Petworth House and Park : A stately mansion with an impressive art collection set in a vast deer park. The gardens are also worth exploring.
  • Seven Sisters Country Park : A stunning coastal area with dramatic chalk cliffs and rolling hills, perfect for hiking and enjoying breathtaking views.
  • Bodiam Castle : A 14th-century moated castle surrounded by water and picturesque landscapes.
  • Sheffield Park and Garden : A National Trust property known for its stunning gardens, lakes, and vibrant displays of plants.
  • Birling Gap and Beachy Head : More stunning chalk cliffs and coastal views, with the added beauty of the natural arch at Birling Gap.
  • Glyndebourne Opera House : Known for its world-class opera productions, the opera house is set in beautiful countryside and offers a unique cultural experience.

trip south london

Best places to visit in Kent include:

  • Canterbury – home to the UNESCO World Heritage Site of Canterbury Cathedral
  • Dover : Known for the iconic White Cliffs of Dover, this coastal town is home to Dover Castle, which boasts a complex history and offers panoramic views of the English Channel.
  • Rochester : A charming town with a medieval castle and cathedral. It’s also the birthplace of Charles Dickens, and you can visit the Dickens World theme park.
  • Whitstable : This coastal town is famous for its oysters and seafood. Enjoy the quaint streets, beach huts, and seafood restaurants along the coast.
  • Margate : A seaside town with a revived artistic scene, featuring the Turner Contemporary art gallery and the scenic Margate Sands.
  • Leeds Castle : Often referred to as the “loveliest castle in the world,” Leeds Castle is set on an island in a lake and surrounded by beautiful gardens.
  • Hever Castle : The childhood home of Anne Boleyn, with historic architecture, gardens, and a maze.
  • Chatham Historic Dockyard : A maritime museum where you can explore historic warships, submarines, and learn about Britain’s naval history.
  • Biddenden Vineyards : If you’re a wine enthusiast, Kent has several vineyards. Biddenden is one of the oldest and most well-known.
  • Canterbury Tales Visitor Attraction : An interactive museum where you can step back in time to experience Chaucer’s famous tales.
  • St. Augustine’s Abbey : A UNESCO World Heritage Site, this abbey in Canterbury dates back to the 6th century and is a significant historical site.
  • Chartwell House : The former home of Winston Churchill, now a museum showcasing his life and legacy.

These are just a few highlights of what Kent has to offer. Whether you’re interested in history, nature, or culture, you’re likely to find something appealing in this diverse and beautiful county.

trip south london

Best Places to Visit in Surrey

  • Box Hill : A National Trust site known for its stunning views and walking trails. It’s a popular spot for outdoor enthusiasts and offers panoramic vistas of the surrounding countryside.
  • Polesden Lacey : A grand Edwardian estate with beautiful gardens, Polesden Lacey is a National Trust property that offers a glimpse into the lives of the wealthy in the early 20th century.
  • Watts Gallery – Artists’ Village : Located in Compton, this unique attraction is dedicated to the works of Victorian artist George Frederic Watts and his wife Mary Watts. The village includes a gallery, chapel, and artist studios.
  • Hampton Court Palace : While part of the palace is in Greater London, the stunning Hampton Court Palace is right on the border of Surrey. It’s famous for its Tudor history, grand architecture, and beautiful gardens.
  • RHS Garden Wisley : A flagship garden of the Royal Horticultural Society, Wisley offers a wide variety of plants, landscapes, and garden designs to explore.
  • Brooklands Museum : A museum dedicated to motorsport and aviation history, located on the site of the world’s first purpose-built motor racing circuit.
  • Loseley Park : A grand Elizabethan manor house surrounded by beautiful gardens and parkland, open to the public during certain times of the year.
  • Denbies Wine Estate : England’s largest vineyard, Denbies offers tours, wine tasting, and beautiful views of the surrounding countryside.
  • Newlands Corner : Another viewpoint offering breathtaking views of the Surrey Hills, perfect for picnics and outdoor activities.
  • Epsom Downs : Known for Epsom Downs Racecourse and the famous Epsom Derby, this area offers open spaces and walking trails.
  • Virginia Water : Part of Windsor Great Park, Virginia Water features a lake, ornamental cascades, and woodland walks.

Surrey’s mix of historic sites, natural beauty, and cultural attractions make it a delightful destination for a variety of interests. Whether you’re into history, outdoor activities, or simply enjoying scenic landscapes, Surrey has something to offer.

Brighton – East Sussex

trip south london

I’ve given Brighton it’s own section because it’s one of my favourite cities in England and you should try to add it to your England road trip itinerary, especially if you’re heading toward East Sussex.

Brighton is a city renowned for its diverse communities and innovation, the quirky shopping areas, its music and art scene, and its large LGBT population. Read more about Brighton in Autum .

Why is Brighton one of the best England road trips?

Brighton is less than an hour away from London (76 km) and on a direct train line. It offers plenty of fun and exciting activities to enjoy (more than just fish and chips at a pier!)

Brighton has been famous as a cultural centre for over a century. It’s home to the world’s oldest operating aquarium (which opened in 1872- now called ‘’Brighton Sea Life’’), and you can even ride the world’s oldest operating electric railway, the Volks Railway, built in 1883.

Other Brighton Highlights include:

  • See the Palace Pier
  • Catch the latest release in the Duke of York Picturehouse, Britain’s oldest cinema.
  • Have a stroll down the North Lane- home to over 400 independent shops
  • Discover the Victorian innovations still in operation in the city.

How long should you spend in Brighton?

You will want to spend at least two days in Brighton to truly take in the city, but you can easily make a week of your itinerary if you want to explore more places in Sussex, Kent and Surrey.  

What is the best month to visit Brighton?

The sunniest (and therefore warmest!) time of the year in Brighton is from May to September. July and August are peak tourist season, with hotel prices skyrocketing, so be aware of that and plan your stay accordingly.

Cambridgeshire & Cambridge

trip south london

Cambridgeshire is a county in the East of England with plenty to do. The jewel of the county is Cambridge, with a historical, 800-year-old centre you should definitely not skip.

Why should you include Cambridge on your England road trip?

Only 1 hour and 30 minutes away from London via M11, Cambridge offers so much: a rich history of English heritage, a buzzing local community, and a picturesque setting. You’ll even find a gift Henry VIII gave to Anne Boleyn!

Cambridge Highlights

  • See the King’s College Chapel 
  • Enjoy breakfast at Fitzbillies
  • Go punting in the River Cam
  • Have a picnic by the river.
  • Enjoy walking the historic streets

Cambridge Trip Itinerary idea

Leaving London, head up to Cambridge via the M11.

Start the day with drinks and a meal in one of the many deli and brunch places in Market Square before setting off to explore the city. I highly recommend the famous Fitzbillies- the food is delicious.

From there, you can choose from a variety of activities: visiting King’s Chapel, punting in the River Cam (pass under the Bridge of Sighs), hiking on the Cam Towpath (lots of hidden gems if you know how to look for trails!), or taking in the city views from St. Mary’s Tower.

If you’re staying overnight, end the day by attending the Evensong at the King’s College Chapel (select days only)

When is the best (and worst) time to visit Cambridge ?

Cambridge is beautiful all year round. However, the worst time to visit would be spring – the university students sit their finals between April and June, which means many of the college sites are closed to visitors. 

What are some of the best places to visit in Cambridge?

The King’s College Chapel in the University of Cambridge is the third-oldest university in operation and the most iconic and instantly-recognisable building in the county.

Don’t miss out on an opportunity to drink at the Eagle, a historic pub in the heart of Cambridge’s city centre famously linked to Watson and Crick’s discovery of DNA.

If you are feeling adventurous and are ready to brave the British winter, visit Cambridge in December. It’s off-peak season and features one of the best UK Christmas markets you should visit. Read all about the Cambridge Christmas market here.

How long should you spend in Cambridge?

One day in Cambridge is usually enough time to visit the majority of the main sights, especially if you are visiting during the summer. You’ll need tickets for most of the chapels and university buildings, so go first to buy those.

Wiltshire & Cotswolds Road Trip – 3 day trip from London

England road trip ideas and itinerary

Recommended by Ann | The road is life

The Cotswolds is the largest Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty (AONB) in England and Wales. If you look at a map of England, find Bristol (west coast, just below the indent of southern Wales) and the Cotswolds is the area north-east of Bristol.

There is so much beauty and fascinating history to discover around the Cotswolds region and luckily you don’t have to travel far from London to get there! You can reach Bath or Bristol easily in a day from London, but we recommend at least 3 days to really explore the area by car/ motorhome, plus explore Stonehenge and Salisbury on the way back to London. If you’re travelling with children, don’t worry- there’s plenty of things to do in the Cotswolds with kids.

Highlights & Best Places to Visit in the Cotswolds and Surrounding Area

  • Explore the charming stone villages of the Cotswolds
  • visit the historic city of Bath
  • marvel at the mysterious ancient stones of Stonehenge
  • Indulge in some shopping at Daylesford farm
  • stop at the magnificent Salisbury Cathedral.

When is the best time for a Cotswolds road trip?

Although the Cotswolds can be visited all year, this road trip is best completed in the spring or summer months to ensure warmer and sunnier sightseeing weather.

The days are also longer- allowing you to see more each day. However, unlike Cornwall and Devon, most places to NOT shut during winter, so feel free to explore whenever suits you!

Wiltshire & Cotswolds road trip itinerary from London

  • Departing London, drive out to the Cotswolds. This is where you should spend 3-4 days exploring as many lovely little towns and villages as you wish to.
  • A few of the prettiest Cotswolds villages include Bibury, Stow-on-the-Wold, Lower Slaughter, Bourton-on-the-Water, Castle Combe and so many more! The beauty of the Cotswolds region is that the villages are all located in close proximity with minimal driving time in between them.
  • Once you have seen your share of lovely English villages , carry on to Bath which is only a 30-minute drive from the village of Castle Combe- well worth a visit.
  • Spend a full day and night in Bath visiting the Roman baths.
  • From there continue to Stonehenge. A visit to this incredible ancient site can easily take half a day. We camped overnight at Stonehenge and saw the most INCREDIBLE sunrise we’ve EVER seen. (Seriously, watch the video. It’s breathtaking)
  • From Stonehenge, it’s only a short 20-minute drive to the medieval town of Salisbury which brings you to the final stop of this road trip.
  • The highlight of Salisbury is the stunning Salisbury Cathedral which has the tallest spire in all of Britain! Spend one night in Salisbury before making the final 2-hour road trip back to London.
  • Another option is to return to London via the historic city of Oxford. Don’t miss a meal in Sticks and Sushi- one of the best restaurants in Oxford and with incredible views over the city.

North England Road Trips- Why You Should Visit

It’s easy when planning an England road trip to get sucked into famous places like Cornwall, Devon or the Cotswolds- and those are all AMAZING places to visit.

However, I strongly encourage you to visit the north of England as well if you have time. You’ll find villages just as pretty, delicious food (chips, pie and gravy is the best thing in the world) and incredible history.

Again, we were lucky to live up here for 4 years- here are some of our absolute favourite places to road trip, although there are of course many more we have yet to discover! I hope they give you some ideas and inspiration for your next trip.

Don’t forget to Grab your ULTIMATE road trip planner here – it has everything you need to help you pack for your road trip.

Peak District National Park

England road trip ideas and itinerary

The Peak District is a huge and stunning area in Derbyshire, just to the east of Manchester. It’s a perfect place for a road trip because there are so many things to see!

A car or motorhome makes it easy to travel between the sites and there are plenty of campsites or hotels to use as you explore.

There are a multitude of hikes, walks and tors to climb and the area is famous for its caves, which people still lived in as recently as 1910!

The Peak District was the UK’s first National Park and is also considered the real ale capital of the world! If you’re exploring the Peak District with kids , there are steam trains, tramways, cycle paths and even a cable car taking you up to see some stunning views! There’s also Alton Towers theme park – one of the best in the UK.

Best places to explore in the Peak District

Some of the highlights include:

  • Chatsworth House
  • Ladybower reservoir
  • Alton Towers theme park
  • Heights of Abraham cable car

Lake District road trip

Lake District Road trip itinerary- England road trip ideas

Recommended by Fiona/ Passport & Piano

The Lake District National Park is a UNESCO heritage site that makes for the perfect road trip.  Walking around the lakes and fells to see the magnificent scenery is one of the many pleasures of the area.

Quintessential villages are plentiful as are traditional English pubs with real ale and hearty food. Don’t just rush by on your way from England to Scotland; take a few days and enjoy all that the lakes have to offer.

Best places to visit on a Lake District Road Trip

Most people arrive from the south via Windermere, but to explore the areas hidden gems its worth spending at least three days here. The Lake District has some of the worlds best scenic drives and a trip along the Honister Pass and Kirkstone Pass are a must.

In the South Lakes, I’d highly recommend a  visit to Grasmere . Here you can visit several homes of the famous poet William Wordsworth and enjoy Sarah Nelson’s delightful gingerbread.

If you love Beatrix Potter, you can follow in her footsteps at Beatrix Potter World in Bowness- on- Windermere.  Her home near Hawkshead is open to visitors, and Wray Castle is a beautiful spot where she enjoyed her family holidays.

In the North Lakes, the towns of Keswick and Cockermouth have plenty to explore. The Castlerigg stone circle, with its stunning views across the fells, is worth stopping at, and the “Surprise View” across Derwent Water is spectacular.

If you’re not exploring in a motorhome or campervan, accommodation throughout the area is plentiful. There are boat rides and water-based activities to enjoy on most of the lakes and a plethora of outdoor pursuit centres for the more adventurous.

When is the best time for a Lake District road trip?

In the summer months, the National Park can be rather busy particularly on the main A66 road which runs through the centre. Hence if you want to avoid the crowds, consider visiting in the spring or autumn.

While you’re not guaranteed sunshine at any time of the year, the weather is probably at its best between April and September.

England Road Trip- Yorkshire & The Dales

England road trip ideas and itinerary- england to Scotland road trip yorkshire

Recommended by Sinead | Map Made Memories

England’s largest county, Yorkshire, is a perfect destination for a road trip. There are so many diverse attractions to see within a relatively short drive of each other.

Highlights and some best places in Yorkshire to visit

  • Hardraw Force–England’s highest single-drop waterfall
  • White Scar–The longest show cave in England
  • Visit the ‘Best Street in Britain’
  • Visit the cobbled Shambles, named ‘the Best Street in Britain’.
  • Marvel at the Ribblehead Viaduct, the 24 arches that span the Yorkshire Dales, a true masterpiece of Victorian engineering.
  • Castles and ruins all over the place
  • Stand on Hogsmeade station (or at least the station which played it in Harry Potter!)

Yorkshire Road Trip Itinerary

Start your road trip in the rolling hills and river valleys of the beautiful Yorkshire Dales. Visit the 11th century Skipton Castle or descend underground to marvel at the formations in White Scar Caves, the longest show cave in England.

Clamber over Brimham Rocks or hike the stunning landscape around Malham Cove. Browse the independent shops in the Victorian spa town of Harrogate.

Places to visit on the Yorkshire Dales

The Yorkshire Dales are packed with attractive waterfalls. Choose between the plunging falls around Ingleton, popular Aysgarth Falls or, my favourite waterfall, Hardraw Force which is England’s highest single drop waterfall. Before leaving the Dales, visit the impressive monastic ruins and landscaped gardens of Fountains Abbey.

Continue your road trip by exploring the historic city of York . This compact city is easily navigated on foot and is an ideal location for history buffs. You can visit Viking, Roman, Georgian and Victorian sites all in one day!

See the iconic York Minster, walk the city’s medieval city walls and stroll along the cobbled Shambles, which has been voted the ‘ Best Street in Britain’ and was the inspiration behind Diagon Alley from the movie adaptation of the Harry Potter series!

Road trip over the Yorkshire Moors

End your Yorkshire road trip with a drive across the wild Yorkshire Moors. Take a scenic trip on a steam train across the Moors to visit charming Goathland train station which doubled as Hogsmeade station in the Harry Potter movies. Alternatively, your legs with a hike at the Hole of Horcum, a huge ancient natural amphitheatre.

How long should you spend exploring Yorkshire on a road trip?

You could ‘cover’ Yorkshire in a couple of days but to truly appreciate all it has to offer I would recommend at least one full week.

When is the best time to road trip to Yorkshire?

Yorkshire can be explored all year around- and expect rain at any time! But Spring is incredible on the moors- with the wildflowers blooming and the days getting longer, it’s a perfect time to visit. Autumn also offers spectacular views with the leaves turning colour, providing an incredible backdrop.

England Road Trip Idea – North East Coast

England road trip ideas and itinerary- england to Scotland road trip saltburn

Northern England’s east coast is full of charming towns and villages, and is the perfect destination for a road trip.

Best places to visit on a North East coast England road trip

  • Saltburn-by-the-Sea (to search for fossils)
  • Lemon top ice-cream – Its legacy goes back over 100 years!)
  • Staithes- picturesque fishing village
  • Whitby Abbey – the inspiration behind Bram Stoker’s Dracula
  • Robin Hood’s Bay (where smuggling was commonplace
  • Scarborough Castle

North East England road trip itinerary

Start in Saltburn-by-the-sea. Be sure to search for fossils throughout your visit. I actually found one in Saltburn-by-the-Sea, but you can get lucky in any of the places on this list! Saltburn-by-the-Sea is home to the historic Saltburn Cliff Tramway and affords beautiful views from the bluffs above town.

You can walk along The Cleveland Way, a historic trail that runs through each of the 5 locations mentioned. I’d also recommend trying Lemon Top Ice Cream, or vanilla ice cream with a dollop of lemon sorbet on top.

Staithes is a quaint fishing village laden with narrow pathways and quirky cottages.

The Whitby Abbey towers above the town, giving it an eerie feeling – it’s even credited as the inspiration behind Bram Stoker’s Dracula!

Robin Hood’s Bay has a long history with smugglers, and its red rooftops and crowded buildings conceal hidden routes. In Scarborough, you can enjoy rides at the Luna Park amusement park or visit the historic Scarborough Castle!

When is the best time to road trip England’s north-east coast?

Although you can visit this area all year round, I’d suggest visiting in the summer or fall. It rains much of the year in this region of England, but there’s a higher likelihood of sunshine from July through October.

How long to spend on this England Road trip?

You can complete this road trip in less than 2 hours, but I’d suggest spending at least a few days exploring the region. Each Yorkshire coastal town has its own charm and activities to offer, so you certainly don’t want to rush!

How far is it from the North east coast to London?

Scarborough to London takes about 5 hours by car. Avoid travelling Friday afternoons or Monday morning- those are the peak road traffic times.

Don’t miss Durham

trip south london

We spent a lovely couple of days exploring the city of Durham. There are so many wonderful places to explore, but one of the highlights for us was Durham Cathedral. This incredible building was built in the 11th Century and is the largest surviving stone vaulted ceiling of its size.

However, if I’m honest, I was more excited by the fact that several scenes in Harry Potter were filmed here, including in the cloisters and many of the covered walkways.

It was also in Durham Cathedral that Harry, Ron and Hermione encounter ‘Fluffy’- the forbidden corridor was also part of the cathedral.

Other fantastic things to see in or near Durham include:

  • Durham Castle
  • High Force Waterfall (one of the best waterfalls in Europe )
  • Finchale Priory

Northumberland Coast

England road trip itinerary- North england places to visit- lindisfarne priory

Recommended by Tracy | Travels in Time

The Northumberland Coastal route stretches for over 35 miles from Alnmouth in the south to the Holy Island of Lindisfarne in the north.

The drive takes you through an area of outstanding natural beauty with many beautiful villages and places of interest to visit along the way.

How long to spend on a Northumberland coast road trip

This itinerary covers a day trip but you could spend a few days exploring the area or even walk the Northumberland Coastal Path along the same route if you are feeling up to it!

Northumberland road trip itinerary

The first village to visit is Craster – famous for its kippers and overlooked by Dunstanburgh Castle. If you’re looking for impressive castles in England , Northumberland is the place to go- there are more castles here than any other county in England!

After exploring Craster and the castle, head to Seahouses. A popular seaside town for families with lots of arcades and fish and chip shops this is the place to stop for a bite to eat.

If the weather is good why not hop on a boat over to the Farme Islands? With large colonies of seals and puffins the islands are popular with nature lovers.

Bamburgh Castle dominates the horizon and is worth exploring. It was once the home to the Royal Seat of the Kings of Northumbria and also has a ghost or two!

After Bamburgh head to the Holy Island of Lindisfarne. Make sure you check the tides before you go- the island is tidal and is only accessible during certain times.

Once on the island take a stroll up to the castle. Don’t miss exploring the ruins of Lindisfarne Priory. This is the place famous as the home of Christianity in England until Viking raids eventually led to the abandonment of the priory.

When is the best time for a Northumberland road trip?

The best time to visit Northumberland and places in North East England is in the summer – the days are long and the sun will hopefully be shining! Be aware that on occasions during the summer a sea fret (mist) can hang over the coast and cool temperatures and decrease visibility. Make sure to check the weather forecast before you travel.

Wow- anyone else want to jump in their motorhome/ camper/ car/ bike and head off to start exploring? What a fantastic list of England road trip destinations!

As you can see, it really doesn’t matter where you go or how long you have to explore England- you’ll have plenty of places to enjoy. And who knows- next time we set off for Norfolk, we might even make it there without swinging by Cornwall first!! 🙂

Planning an England road trip? You might find these posts useful:

  • How to plan an epic UK road trip
  • How to create a road trip itinerary with Google Maps
  • 100 best road trip driving songs
  • How to plan a motorhome trip to UK or Europe

See all our UK travel ideas and tips

Planning England travel and road trips? Looking for itinerary ideas and the best places to visit? Here are 12 BREATHTAKING places to see in England, including Cornwall, Devon, south coast, Salisbury and the Lake District. These England travel tips are all you need to plan your perfect UK road trip itinerary.

Kat never planned to buy a motorhome. She also never planned to quit her job as an air traffic controller, go touring around Europe in said motorhome, start one of the UK’s largest motorhome travel websites… or get a cocker spaniel.

Find out how she went from stuck in the rat race to being a digital nomad and inspiring thousands of people to have their own epic adventures here.

If you’d like to connect with Kat, send her an email or follow her adventures on social media.

Sharing is caring!

Similar Posts

Stonehenge CAMPING next to the stones (for free!)

Stonehenge CAMPING next to the stones (for free!)

France road trip ideas- 11 best areas to visit

France road trip ideas- 11 best areas to visit

12 Unmissable European Road Trip ideas for every itinerary

12 Unmissable European Road Trip ideas for every itinerary

Hohenzollern Castle- 11 essential things to know!

Hohenzollern Castle- 11 essential things to know!

Winter in Spain: 10 Warmest places in mainland Spain for winter sunshine

Winter in Spain: 10 Warmest places in mainland Spain for winter sunshine

12 Best Isle of Wight motorhome campsites (and road trip tips)

12 Best Isle of Wight motorhome campsites (and road trip tips)

Cornwall is such a beautiful part of the UK to visit in a motorhome, although it can be a little tight around those country roads.

So true- some of those roads are tiny, but worth it for the incredible views and places to visit.

Have you been on the welsh coast much

Our very first motorhome trip EVER was to the Welsh coast. We’ve put together some of our favourite Welsh road trips here if you want some ideas: https://wandering-bird.com/wales-road-trip/

Although all road trips are lovely, I particularly enjoy traveling in a campervan through Devon in the UK. I appreciate you sharing this list of road trip suggestions.

Fantastic article for anyone travelling England on a road trip

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

London x London

Posted on Published: 10th November 2022  - Last updated: 5th December 2022 Categories Things to do

By: Author Julianna Barnaby

28 Brilliant Day Trips from London

28 Brilliant Day Trips from London

Love This? Save and Share!

We all love London… but the UK is full of wonderful spots that are ripe for exploration. Planning your next adventure? Here are 28 cool day trips from London to get you started.

London is a great city – but there’s so much more to the UK to explore.

Hop on a train or into your car and you can go on an adventure around some of the UK’s historic sites and beautiful landscapes.

In need of some inspiration? Check out this guide to the best day trips from London by train and by car.

Sneak a peek at the day trip destinations in this video to see what they look like in action!

Day Trips from London by Train

Planning your day trip from London? We love using Omio for finding the best deals when it comes to train travel around the UK. They work with over 1000 major travel companies to bring you the best deals (including many major airlines if you’re looking to travel a little bit further). 

Better yet, download the Omio App and you can store all of your travel tickets in one place. This means that you can spend less time organising your tickets and more time planning an adventure. Yes, please!

Radcliffe Camera Oxford

Oxford, the city of the dreaming spires is an easy day out from London. It’s only an hour on the train and trains run frequently until the early hours.

We might be biased, but we really think that it’s one of the best places to visit in the UK – a gorgeous city that’s brimming with history and cool things to do.

While there’s a lot to see in the city, its small size means that a lot of the biggest Oxford attractions are within easy walking distance of each other.

From the iconic Radcliffe Camera to the world-famous Ashmolean Museum, you certainly have your work cut out when it comes to seeing Oxford in a day – but it is possible. Start with this 24 Hours in Oxford guide .

Train departs from: London Paddington and London Marylebone

Average journey duration: 1 hour

Hassle-free option: Book this Oxford day trip from London

Read more: The Best Things to do in Oxford Finding Oxford’s Harry Potter Filming Locations

Canterbury Cathedral

Canterbury has always been an important place to visit in the UK – it was the destination for many a pilgrimage in times past (hence its role in Chaucer’s famous Canterbury Tales). It still deserves to be at the top of your list of days out from London today.

What’s there to see? How about one of England’s great cathedrals, ye olde English pubs and quaint little streets that look like they’ve been plucked straight from medieval times? Add to that a selection of cool museums and some scenic walks and you’ve got an excellent day trip in the making.

Train departs from: London Victoria and St Pancras International

Average journey duration: 1 hour from St Pancras, 1.5 hours from Victoria

Hassle-free option: Book this day trip to Canterbury and the White Cliffs of Dover

Read more: One Day in Canterbury Itinerary

Cambridge

Cambridge is beautiful. This world-famous university town is another popular day trip outside London – and for good reason.

Visiting impressive colleges such as Trinity College and King’s College (whose chapel you simply must see) would be enough to fill your day alone. But you should also take time to visit some of Cambridge’s other landmarks – The Fitzwilliam Museum and Botanical Gardens among them.

If you’re visiting in the warmer months be sure to hire a punt and indulge in the traditional pastime of gliding down the River Cam. Bonus points to you if you don’t fall in or lose your pole along the way.

Train departs from: Kings Cross and Liverpool Street

Average journey duration: 50 minutes from Kings Cross, 1 hour 20 minutes from Liverpool Street

Hassle-free option: Book this London to Cambridge Day Trip

Brighton

We think that Brighton is South East England’s coolest beach destination. 

First thing’s first – the beach is pebble – so don’t get your hopes up with dreams of golden sands. It’s still perfectly good for plumping down on your towel and soaking a few rays of the rare British sun.

Away from the beach, Brighton’s history as the seaside escape for the UK’s rich and famous has left its mark.

Long rows of Regency houses, the long-standing Pier, not to mention the out-and-out fabulous Brighton Pavillion stand as testament to Brighton’s colourful past.

There’s a thriving dining and drinking scene – and a number of cool little independent shops clustered in The Lanes area. Just be sure not to have so much fun that you miss the last train home (this has totally happened to me).

Train departs from: St Pancras International (also stops at Farringdon, Blackfriars and London Bridge) and London Victoria

Hassle-free option: Book a bike tour of Brighton (doesn’t include transport to Brighton)

Read Next: 21 Brilliant Beaches Near London

Hampton Court

Hampton Court is one of the easiest day trips from London – easy transport connections and short travel time make it perfect for an impromptu trip.

Hampton is pretty much all about the palace – which was first built by the ill-fated Cardinal Wolsey before being pinched by Henry VIII.

All six of Henry’s wives lived here at some point or another, before it passed through a number of hands and was finally opened to the public during the Victorian times.

Wonderful as Hampton Court’s interiors are, we would recommend visiting during the summer months when the gardens are at their best (avoid the summer holidays if you can though, when it’s always busy). Don’t miss the maze, which is the oldest surviving hedge maze in the world.

Train departs from: London Waterloo

Average journey duration: 50 minutes

Hassle-free option: Buy your Hampton Court tickets in advance

Bath Abbey

A trip to the Georgian spa town of Bath is like stepping straight into the pages of a Jane Austen novel (not surprising, seeing as she set so many of them there).

Jaunt around town, checking out the city’s many historical sites. Start with the immersive experience of the Roman Baths (unfortunately you’re not actually allowed to bathe there any more) and the Pump Room.

You can even “take the water” at the Pump Room – sipping on the supposedly restorative waters in the fashion of the hoi polloi of old.

We should warn you that the water tastes absolutely gross though.

Just across the road, Bath Abbey is one of the UK’s most beautiful cathedrals – make sure that you take a look inside too, it’s just as spectacular.

Small but entertaining, The Fashion Museum walks you through the catwalk of British fashion through the centuries.

Don’t think that Bath’s spa heritage is dead and gone – it’s still home to more than its fair share of spas that are perfect for a spot of pampering.

The reasonably-priced Thermae Bath Spa is a popular option thanks to its rooftop pool and indulgent massages, while the high-end Gainsborough Bath Spa is the place to go when you really want to push the boat out.

Train departs from: London Paddington

Average journey time: 1hr 30 minutes

Hassle-free option: Book this Bath & Stonehenge Day Trip

Windsor Castle, Near London

The fact that it’s the home of the royal residence Windsor Castle means that Windsor’s many other charms often get overlooked.

Windsor is well-known as one of the best day trips from London. Even so, many visitors disembark from the train, make a beeline for Windsor Castle, have a nose around and then head straight back home. It’s a shame as Windsor is a rather charming riverside town that merits your attention.

Sure, you should start your visit with a look at the castle, which just so happens to be the oldest inhabited castle in the world. The State Rooms and beautiful grounds take some time to explore.

However, you shouldn’t make the mistake of dashing home the moment that you are finished. Stick around to visit the Royal Windsor Racecourse and its more famous counterpart Royal Ascot Racecourse next door.

Or why not walk around the expansive Windsor Great Park then test your skills on the water rowing or kayaking along the Thames?

Train departs from: London Waterloo and Paddington Station

Average journey time: 50 minutes

Hassle-free option: Half-Day Windsor Day Trip and Tour

Read More: 15 Must-Visit Castles Near London

The Lake District

Lake District

The Lake District is a long day trip from London but it’s just about doable and worth the effort if you’re short on time and can’t stay overnight.

With its gorgeous green pastures, towering fells and chocolate-box villages, it’s no surprise that the Lake District tops the list of Britain’s beautiful regions. The fastest train to the Lake District takes around 2.5 hours to Oxenholme, so is easiest to tackle on a day trip from London.

Luckily, the area surrounding Oxenholme is ripe for exploration.

There are frequent buses to Kendal, a pretty Lakeland town with lots of cute shops and tea rooms. You can also catch a local train (or taxi) to Windermere – the most famous of the Lakes – the walks around the lake are superb.

As we have already mentioned – The Lake District is not close to London, so you will need to start early and come back late to make it worth the effort.

Don’t even think about doing it by car either – you can just about do it by train but you’re really much better off staying overnight if you want to drive. Or you can go the full mile and head off on a road trip to a few British national parks .

Train departs from: Euston

Average journey time: 2 hrs 45mins

Hassle-free option: A 10 lake day tour

Read more: Walking in the Lake District

York

Despite being pretty far from London, York is actually not a difficult day trip.

Trains take just a smidge under two hours and run frequently enough that you can just turn up and go.

The walled city is best-known for the Gothic masterpiece that is York Minster but, with more attractions per square mile than any other UK city, there’s a lot to see here.

It’s tough to cover it all in one day – start with York Minster, the fascinating Yorkshire Museum and York Castle Museum (which comes complete with a restored street of Victorian shops) then add in a few other spots if time allows.

Chocolate-lovers will want to head to Chocolate Story – where you can learn about York’s important role in the history of British chocolate and, more importantly, gorge yourself on your own handmade chocolate bar.

Train departs from: King’s Cross

Average journey time: 1 hour 50 minutes

Hassle-free option: See the best sights on foot

Lewes (pronounced Lewis ) often sits in the shadow of nearby Brighton, but there’s a lot to charm in the county town of East Sussex on a one day trip from London.

The town itself is pretty, with a few spots like Lewes Castle, the remains of Lewes Priory and the timber-framed Anne of Cleves House to lure you in for an hour or two.

A surprising number of Lewes’ medieval buildings have survived the test of time – there’s history around every corner.

Personally, we think the spectacular walks in the area surrounding Lewes are also worth the trip. We recommend the six-mile walk to Glynde – there are a couple of steep hills but each step comes with views out over the South Downs.

You can extend the walk to Southease and back to Lewes if you’re feeling really energetic – then quench your thirst with a locally-brewed pint of Harvey’s when you’re finished.

Train departs from: London Victoria

Average journey time: 1 hour

Hassle-free option: This is a DIY trip – but it’s really easy

Read More: Fantastic Hikes Near London You Shouldn’t Miss

Colchester is Britain’s oldest recorded town. With a long history that dates back beyond the Roman times, it was a Roman city and traces of that heritage can still be found dotted all over Colchester today.

Walking in the footsteps of the Romans, visit the remains of the Roman wall, as well as the Roman Circus – the only verified Roman chariot-racing track still standing.

Move onto Colchester Castle, which while not Roman itself, displays a few Roman mosaics and many Roman artifacts in the large Norman keep.

The castle is actually the largest Norman keep in Europe – testament to the fact that you can pretty much spy architecture from every single period in British history in Colchester.

Away from the past Colchester also happens to be the home of some very good tea shops. It would be rude not to indulge in a cream tea before you hop on the train back home again.

Train departs from: Liverpool Street

Hassle-free option: Book onto one of the frequent tours run by Visit Colchester

Whitstable

There haven’t been nearly enough seaside towns in this guide to day trips around London – time to fix that. Where better to head to than Whitstable with its picturesque, cobbled streets and famous oyster eateries?

There’s not a tonne to do in Whitstable – you can visit Whitstable Castle, but really, most of the appeal is wandering around the gorgeous town, seafront and harbour.

Seafood-lovers will be in their element – there’s no better place to tuck into a pint of fresh prawns or guzzle down half-a-dozen oysters.

If you’re really keen, time your visit for the annual knees up that is the Whitstable Oyster Festival .

Not only can you eat all the oysters you can ever dream of (20 is our personal best), but there’s live music and markets selling local wares and wine.

Train departs from: St Pancras International, London Bridge and London Victoria

Average journey time: 1 hour 25 minutes

Hassle-free option: None – but it’s a really easy trip

Henley on Thames

More than just the annual regatta that sees it burst into life, Henley on Thames is one of England’s traditional market towns.

The best way to explore Henley on Thames is on a self-guided walking tour – be sure to stop by the River & Rowing Museum for a walk through the history of the famous sport.

It contains an immersive Wind in the Willows experience that’s just as fun for adults as it is for kids – you’re led through the eccentric world of Mr Toad, Badger, Ratty and Mole.

Henley also used to hold the dubious title of having more pubs per head than any other town in the south east. While those days are gone, the upshot is that there are still a number of cool little pubs for you to explore.

Train departs from: London Paddington, change at Twyford

Average journey time: 1 hour 10 minutes

Hassle-free option: Just hop on a train and go and explore

Margate’s renaissance has been a marvel to behold. Once the darling of the British seaside, it had a bit of a slump before transforming itself into one of the UK’s coolest seaside spots.

That transformation is complete – these days you’re more likely to hear Margate being compared with Copenhagen than with any shoddy seaside town.

There’s the Turner Contemporary of course, which turned heads when it opened in 2011 and is still doing so several years later.

Add to that an assortment of chic independent shops, contemporary restaurants and even a gorgeous tidal pool for a quick dip and you’ll start to understand why it charms the pants off of so many people.

Average journey time: 1 hour 45 minutes

Hassle-free option: Check out the Thanet Tourist Board’s Page for Inspiration

Manchester

Manchester is the small city that packs a big punch. With a strong culture and identity (think the Industrial Revolution and Oasis and you’re on the right track) a visit to Manchester is a breath of fresh air.

There’s too much to see in one day – Manchester Art Gallery, Imperial War Museum North, a guided tour of the BBC, the Museum of Science & History among them. If you’re a footie fan, a visit to Old Trafford is a must.

Seeing as you’re short on time, we recommend stopping off at a few museums, visiting Manchester Cathedral and fuelling up from one of the city’s cool eateries. Then, if you’re so inclined, stay for a taste of Manchester’s legendary nightlife before you head back home.

Average journey time: 2 hours 30 minutes

Hassle-free option:  Book a private tour with a local (transport to Manchester not included)

Bristol

Bristol is one of our favourite cities. The chilled-out, easygoing city (which just so happens to be the largest in the southwest) is a brilliant day trip from London.

Bristol is a city of contrast – on the one hand, there are plenty of big landmarks to see – the Clifton Suspension Bridge, the SS Great Britain being two. On the other hand, a lot of the city’s appeal is the cool and quirky culture it’s fostered over the years.

A hive of street art, indie cafes (where you can guarantee you’ll get a great flat white) and alternative music venues – Bristol is just so damned cool.

It’s perhaps no surprise that one of the city’s biggest claims to fame is that the street artist Banksy hails from there.

Hassle-free option: Book this Self Guided Tour

View this post on Instagram A post shared by Visit Lincoln (@visitlincoln)

Although it was previously a bit far for a day trip, LNER has launched new trains to Lincoln after the success of their Lincoln Experience event, which was part of a Visit Lincoln week celebrating the city. 

This is big news. It means that in just two hours you can escape London and make your way to the city steeped in Roman history.

The day trip alone is worth it for Lincoln castle and the picturesque grounds surrounding it, but you’ve also got plenty of shops, cafes, and pubs to make your way through in the city centre between museum hopping.  

Train departs from: London King’s Cross

Average journey time: 2 hours 19 minutes

Hassle-free option Book a guided walking tour of the city

View this post on Instagram A post shared by Stonehenge (@stonehenge)

As one of the strangest day trips from London, a visit to the mysterious Stonehenge is a must for everyone. This is a rock formation that has puzzled historians for centuries.

How did the stones get there? Nobody is quite sure, but experts reckon that they were carried for over 160 miles, so they must be pretty special. 

We highly recommend booking a guided tour of the site, so you get to hear about all the interesting theories surrounding the mystical Stonehenge – and you can ask any burning questions (trust me, you’ll have a few).

Bear in mind that post-lockdown you need to book your entry time slot for Stonehenge well in advance, and remember to bring your booking confirmation with you.

Train departs from: Waterloo

Average journey time: 2 hours 15 minutes

Hassle-free option: A morning tour of Stonehenge with London transfers

Harry Potter Studios

Hogwarts

From the mystical to the pure magical – if you haven’t visited the Harry Potter Studios yet, what are you waiting for? 

This is one of the best family days out near London and whether you’re a Potterhead or not, it’s so fun to go behind the scenes of arguably the most popular franchise to ever exist.

If the idea of heading to a city and wandering aimlessly doesn’t appeal to you, book yourself a ticket to the studios and experience Hogwarts for yourself.

If you want the full lowdown on the studio tour, including how to get there, tickets, and what to expect when you arrive, check out this article.

Train departs from: London Euston

Average journey time: 30 minutes

Hassle-free option: Entry tickets and London transfers all rolled into one

Cheltenham

This old spa town is one of the prettiest in Gloucestershire and can be reached in around 2 hours from London. Cheltenham boasts Regency buildings in abundance, including the Pittville pump room which was incredibly important in Cheltenham’s spa town history. 

Famed for hosting both the Cheltenham Horse Racing Festival and the Jazz Festival, this historic town is incredibly lively during the summer months. 

Don’t get us wrong, it’s equally beautiful in winter – but there’s just something so magical about hanging out in Montpellier Gardens in the sunshine.

Make sure to visit The Wilson Museum for fine art and catch a movie at the Everyman Theatre – the ornate Victorian ceiling is divine.

Average journey time: 2 hours

Hassle-free option: Take a self-guided tour

Cardiff

Explore two capitals in one day by taking a day trip to Cardiff. It’s surprisingly easy thanks to the high speed train from London Paddington, and Cardiff Castle is beautiful and well worth the journey alone.

Other things to do in Cardiff include taking a trip to the famous Wales Millenium Centre – an arts centre which hosts plenty of live performances and workshops – and exploring the harbour nearby, as well as trying a famous Welsh Cake. Fabulous Welshcakes (opposite the castle) is our top pick for the best.

Hassle-free option: Take a day trip tour from London

Guildford

Guildford is a picturesque medieval town with a castle at its heart. It’s a surprisingly quick day trip here from London and one we implore you to make – after all, it’s one of our favourite places to visit outside London.

Nestled in the Surrey countryside, it may be small but this town certainly packs a punch when it comes to things to do. Not to mention it’s filled with plenty of brilliant pubs for a well-deserved pint.

What to do? Our top picks include Guildford House, a 17th-century townhouse gallery with rotating exhibitions, hikes along dapdune walk, and a visit to the hilltop cathedral that boasts views of the town.

Hassle-free option: Take a walking tour

Day Trips from London by Car

Easy as it is to hop out of London on a train, some places are more suited to day trips from London by car.

The Cotswolds

Cotswolds

It’s a rare event indeed when the words picture-perfect and Cotswolds aren’t mentioned in the same breath.

The Cotswolds is the kind of England you find on the postcards – twee villages with thatched cottages in golden hues, rolling green hills, steaming piles of scones piled high with jam and clotted cream for your afternoon tea.

If it all sounds perfectly lovely, it is.

There’s a reason that the Cotswolds find themselves on many a travel itinerary. Bibury and Burford are two of the prettiest villages- be sure to visit them during your trip.

If you want to see as many villages as possible, I’d recommend starting in Burford and finishing in Winchcombe, meandering through Northleach, Lower and Upper Slaughter, Moreton-in-Marsh and Chipping Camden along the way.

It’s an easy drive, but it means you don’t get much time any one spot.

Alternatively, you can narrow it down to a couple of villages and add in a long walk and some afternoon tea for a much more relaxed trip.

Average driving time from central London: 2 hours

Hassle-free option: Book this full-day Cotswolds four-village tour

Read Next: Pretty Spots You Have to Visit in the Cotswolds

Stratford Upon Avon

Stratford Upon Avon

Stratford Upon Avon – the birthplace of Britain’s famous bard, Shakespeare and a twee little Tudor town set around the River Avon.

The Royal Shakespeare Company’s Theatre dominates the town – rightly so. There’s always something fantastic to see on one of its several stages.

Away from the theatre, Stratford Upon Avon’s Tudor architecture offers a glimpse into days of yore. You can visit Shakespeare’s birthplace, as well as the home that he retired to after the bright lights of London proved too much.

His final resting place, Holy Trinity Church is said to be the most visited parish church in the country.

But Stratford isn’t just Shakespeare – hop onto a boat and row along the Avon, go on a river walk out of town, hole up in an old pub for a pint or two and appreciate the sleepy appeal of this quaint little town.

Seven Sisters Country Park

Seven Sisters

There are few landscapes as striking as the sight of the chalk faces of the Seven Sisters rising up from the coast.

These gorgeous cliffs form the focal point of the larger Seven Sisters Country Park, part of the South Downs National Park.

Strap on your hiking boots and set off on a walk along the Sisters for a refreshing day out from London. Park at the Visitor Centre (where you can also pop in to learn about the history of the country park) and take the path to Seaford Head View Point for the classic view of the cliffs.

Alternatively, why not tackle the part of the South Downs Way that runs through the country park and over the sisters themselves.

Hassle-free option: Seven Sisters and South Downs day trip

The New Forest

New Forest

The New Forest might be less than 100 miles outside of London but it feels like a world away. It’s the largest stretch of unenclosed pasture land and forest in the country and is famous for the wild ponies that roam across its lands.

In terms of attractions, The New Forest has surprisingly varied arsenal of things to see. Beaulieu, a vintage car museum, stately home and medieval monastery rolled into one is one such destination and worth seeing if you’re not a complete petrolhead.

Still, a lot of the appeal is in getting outdoors and onto the many walking trails that crisscross the region. Be sure to wear some comfortable shoes.

Hassle-free option: Train to Lymington or Brockenhurst and hop onto the New Forest tour bus

Leeds Castle

Leeds Castle

London has plenty of castles nearby that make for great day trips, and, despite its name, Leeds Castle is actually in Kent.

This castle is no stranger to royalty with 6 medieval queens previously residing here, and Queen Elizabeth I was even imprisoned at the castle before her coronation. If you fancy stretching the day trip into an overnight experience and live the life of a royal yourself (who wouldn’t?) you can even book a place to sleep in the Maiden’s Tower.

Humbly labelling itself as the “loveliest castle in the world”, you’ve got over 900 years of history to uncover at Leeds Castle – if you can make it past the moat!

Tickets cost £28 for adults and £19.50 for kids, but you get a better deal if there’s a group of you, which is definitely worth looking into.

Average driving time from central London: 1 hour 15 minutes

Hassle-free option: Tour Leeds Castle, Canterbury Cathedral and Dover with transfers from London

Highclere Castle

Highclere Castle

Yes, this is the Downton Abbey Castle. I can’t guarantee that you’ll run into any of the Crawley family while you’re there, but I can promise you a brilliant day trip from London at Highclere Castle .

Take a walk around the grounds and make sure to snap some all-important insta pics of the Jacobethan facade, before you enter the castle and soak in all the history.

Admission tickets cost £24 for adults and £14 for children but check out the website as they host plenty of special events throughout the year, including Downton Abbey Tours and quaint Afternoon Teas.

Average driving time from central London: 1 hour 30 minutes Hassle-free option: Combine Highclere Castle with Oxford

Cirencester

Cirencester

Looking for the best day trip from London? Technically Cirencester is in the Cotswolds, but we think it’s so nice that it’s worth us raving about it separately. It has, like many other English cities, a distinctive Roman history that you can explore in the Corinium Museum.

Cirencester is also great when it comes to shopping – it boasts plenty of independent boutiques and dreamy bookshops that you could spend an entire day exploring alone. 

Cirencester Park is the perfect place to spend an hour or two if the sun decides to make a much-welcomed appearance. You might just catch a game of Polo here, too.

Average driving time from central London: 2 hours 15 minutes

Hassle-free option: There isn’t one – though this is an easy DIY

So, there we are – 28 day trips outside London. We hope that you have found more than a few things to inspire your next jaunt out of the city.

PS: Looking for a longer trip? You’ll want to scope out our guide to Weekend Getaways from London .

Practical Tips for Planning Day Trips Out of London

  • It’s always worth checking your train times but you should be sure to do so if you are planning to do your day trip on a Sunday. Sunday train service is notoriously bad – with rail replacement buses, less frequent services or indirect connections often popping up to mess up your travel plans.
  • If you are travelling by train, try and book your tickets as far ahead as possible for the best prices. You should also consider whether it’s worth purchasing one of the many railcards available if there are a few of you travelling or you plan to do several excursions within a short period of time.

Best London Day Trips: Map

Discover More Day Trips From London Guides

  • 2 8 Fabulous Beaches Near London
  • National Parks Near London for a Weekend Break
  • Caves in and Around London That You Have to See

Love this? Save and share on Pinterest.

London Day Trips

24 Hours in Oxford – insidersoxford.com

Wednesday 5th of May 2021

[…] looking for a short break or escape in the United Kingdom within easy reach of London, Oxford is a perfect day trip. Even if you aren’t, you should go […]

Wednesday 27th of May 2020

Juliana - thank you for all of your posts. We have one weekend left in London coming up before returning to the US. We've been here 3 months and enjoyed exploring London by foot and the city cycles.

I'd love a recommendation on a day trip knowing we have to take the train and that we are still in lock down (somewhat).

In the last weeks we visited Cambridge, Hastings, Greenwich and Seven Sisters. Prior to lock down we have visited the Cotswalds and the Lake District and Oxford.

I look forward to your reply! Beth

Julianna Barnaby

Thursday 28th of May 2020

A total pleasure Beth - sounds like you've been exploring a lot! If you haven't been to Bath, I'd normally recommend a trip there - it's very pretty but obviously destinations like the Roman Baths and the Pump Rooms will be closed. I would say the city is pretty enough to more than justify a trip to spend some time walking around. That said, I think the official guidance is only to use transport for necessary journeys, so I'd check that before you book anything.

Sunday 3rd of February 2019

What a great assortment of day trips! I've bookmarked this post for when I'm visiting London later this year - so handy. Thanks very much!

Tuesday 5th of February 2019

Thanks Lesley - I hope you get to head on at least a couple of the day trips while you're in London. Have an awesome trip!

LET'S GET SOCIAL!

London x London is the insider’s guide to discovering the best of London.

We delve into the cool, interesting and quirky spots that make London such a dynamic city, telling you the best things to do, eat and drink along the way. 

Tired of the same old dull suggestions? Want to know where to find London’s secret bars, tastiest eats and weirdest finds? We provide practical guides that help you do just that.

Find Out More

Recently Published

  • Eltham Palace: Discovering South London’s Gorgeous Art Deco Secret
  • Staying At: The Laslett, Notting Hill Review
  • Carreras Cigarette Factory: A Curious Reminder of London’s Egyptian Art Deco Craze

A Lady in London

A Lady in London

And Traveling the World

Lady’s 35 Weekend Trips from London You’ll Want to Take

Today I want to bring you my list of the best weekend trips from London. There are a lot of great places to travel in and around Britain. Whether you love city breaks, country escapes, or coastal adventures, there’s a 2-day trip in the UK that will fit your style. If you’re looking for your next weekend getaway from London, my list will help you find the ideal spot for you. I’ve included a map, too.

Weekend Trips from London

Weekend Trips from London

My guide to weekend trips from London contains a variety of travel destinations. Whether you love the English countryside or the British seaside, the most exciting cities or the loveliest villages, there’s a short break for you.

Edinburgh View

From England to Scotland, Wales, and Northern Ireland, these trips will take you to the best places to visit in the UK . I’ve included several weekend getaways to Europe as well.

Castle Combe

I’ve been to all the places on my list (a lot of them more than once), and I can personally vouch for how great they are. There are a lot more ideas in the book 52 Great British Weekends , too. You can get it on Amazon here .

Brighton Pier

1. Weekend in Bath

Bath is one of the most beautiful cities in England , which is why it ranks at the top of my list of the best weekend trips from London. Known for its golden stone buildings and deep historical roots, it’s one of the most popular places to visit in the United Kingdom.

The ancient Roman Baths are awe-inspiring, and the city’s Jane Austen connections offer an additional draw. That’s to say nothing of the Royal Crescent and The Circus, where the curves and columns always have me reaching for my camera.

Bath, England

There are lots of independent restaurants and shops in Bath that make the city worth a trip, too. From bookstores to cafes, there’s enough to fill a weekend in Bath .

There’s plenty to see outside the city, too. If you have a car, you can explore Bath and the Cotswolds , taking in some of the prettiest villages in Wiltshire and other counties as you go.

If you want to take this UK city break , you can book a hotel in Bath here . I’ve stayed at The Yard in Bath and I adore its stylish atmosphere. You can book a room here .

Bath Abbey

2. Weekend in Kent

Next on my list of the best weekend trips from London is Kent . This county in England’s southeast is brimming with destinations to escape to for a couple days.

From oyster-famous Whitstable to picture-pretty Rochester , hipster Margate , lovely Deal , beachfront Broadstairs , harborside Ramsgate , underrated Folkestone , castle-topped Dover , and cathedral-graced Canterbury , there’s an abundance of places to visit in Kent .

Rochester Street in Kent, England

You can even go wine, cider, and beer tasting in Kent . It’s a fun way to explore the county through some of the most famous English drinks . Many of the best vineyards near London are located here.

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in Kent here . I’ve stayed at The Bay Tree in Broadstairs, The Relish in Folkestone, and The Sun Inn in Faversham, and I recommend all of them.

Margate Vintage Shop

3. Weekend in Edinburgh

Next on my list of the best weekend trips from London is Edinburgh . The capital of Scotland is one of the most beautiful cities in the UK , and there’s plenty to do here to fill two days.

Edinburgh is renowned for its beautiful streets, historic castle, and village-like areas. The views from Calton Hill and the Scott Monument are stunning, the restaurants are world-class, and the Royal Mile is steeped in heritage.

Fountain and Edinburgh Castle in Princes Street Gardens

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in Edinburgh here . I’ve stayed in the city many times and my favorite is the Radisson Collection Hotel, Royal Mile Edinburgh . It’s in a great location right by Edinburgh Castle. You can book a room here .

Victoria Street, Edinburgh

4. Weekend in The Cotswolds

When it comes to scenery, it’s hard to beat the Cotswolds. This Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty firmly deserves a place on my list of the best weekend trips from London.

With chocolate-box villages , pastoral landscapes, and pretty towns, it also makes for one of the best romantic weekend getaways from London.

Broadway Tower, Cotswolds

Whether you drive or travel to the Cotswolds without a car , you can do and see a lot in a weekend.

From exploring villages like Painswick and Upper Slaughter to visiting National Trust properties in the Cotswolds , there’s no shortage of ways to spend your time.

Burford High Street, Cotswolds

There are great Cotswolds walks you can take in places like Moreton-in-Marsh and Burford , too. They’re fun ways to discover the area on foot.

If you’re traveling in a specific season, my spring weekend in the Cotswolds , autumn weekend in the Cotswolds , and winter weekend in the Cotswolds guides can help. My interactive Cotswolds map is a good resource, too.

Westonbirt Abroretum in the Cotswolds in Autumn

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in the Cotswolds here . There are lots of great places to stay in the area.

5. Weekend in Salcombe

Down in Devon, Salcombe is a great place for a weekend trip from London. With otherworldly scenery, stunning rock formations, and secret coastal coves, this seaside gem is the perfect place to get away from the city.

Salcombe has everything from walking trails to beaches. North Sands beach is home to the famous Winking Prawn restaurant and a historic castle steeped in English Civil War history.

Coastal Cove in Salcombe, England

If you like the water, you can take a ferry ride to South Sands beach or go sailing in Salcombe.

If not, there’s plenty to do in town. Shops and boutiques line the high street, and secret stairways lead up and down the hills. The local seafood is delicious, too.

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in Salcombe here . I’ve stayed at South Sands Hotel and I’m a fan of the beach-themed rooms and views across the water. You can book a room here .

Colorful Houses in Salcombe, England

6. Weekend in Brighton

Down on the south coast in East Sussex, Brighton is one of the best weekend trips from London by train .

Along with neighboring Hove, this city is celebrated for its pebble beaches, pleasure pier, Royal Pavilion, and narrow streets packed with restaurants and shops.

Brighton Beach, England

Just an hour by train from the UK capital, it’s one of my favorite places to go to the seaside near London .

With 2 days in Brighton you can see everything from the English Channel to the shopping streets and main attractions. You’ll have time to hit the beach and take in the city’s famous nightlife and street art scenes, too.

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in Brighton here . I’ve stayed at the Brighton Harbour Hotel and Spa and I love its sea-themed decor and location directly on the waterfront. You can book a room here .

North Laine, Brighton

7. Weekend in Southwold

Out in Suffolk, Southwold is another of my favorite weekend trips from London. This coastal town has wide beaches, a fun pleasure pier, and picturesque streets with idyllic cottages.

Southwold has a great mix of waterfront entertainment, retail therapy, and good pubs and restaurants. It’s also famous for its colorful beach huts, which always make for great photo opportunities.

Southwold Pier, England

There are so many things to do in Southwold that it’s an ideal place to go for a weekend getaway.

If you want to take this trip, you can book accommodation here . From cottages to hotels, there are a lot of good options.

Southwold Fish and Chip Shop in England

8. Weekend in West Sussex

Next on my list of weekend trips from London is West Sussex . This county in the south of England is an easy trip from the UK capital and an ideal place to escape to for a couple days.

There are lots of options when it comes to West Sussex weekend breaks . I particularly like the South Downs National Park, the Chichester Harbour Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty, and Arundel with its stunning castle.

Arundel Castle

Petworth, a chocolate-box town full of pretty streets and shops, is also great. The town is home to the impressive Petworth House, a 17th-century stately home near London .

Petworth House has an amazing art collection and grounds designed by renowned landscape architect Lancelot ‘Capability’ Brown.

There are a lot of great West Sussex walks you can do as well. From Knepp Castle Estate to Cissbury Ring and West Chiltington, you’ll be spoiled for choice.

Knepp Castle, West Sussex

And that’s to say nothing of the wineries, many of which welcome visitors. From Tinwood Estate to Kinsbrook Vineyard, I’ve enjoyed tours and tastings at a number of them.

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in West Sussex here . There are lots of great places to stay in the area.

Vineyard in West Sussex, England

9. Weekend in Brecon Beacons National Park

Brecon Beacons National Park in Wales is another of my favorite weekend trips from London. I’ve traveled here many times, and on each visit I’ve gained a greater appreciation of its wealth of walking paths, stunning waterfalls, and pretty towns and villages.

From hiking Pen y Fan to indulging at the Abergavenny Food Festival , the area has something for all the weekend breaks in Wales you can imagine.

View from Pen y Fan in the Brecon Beacons National Park

If you’re going in a particular season, you can take a look at my blog posts about a summer weekend in Wales and a winter weekend in Wales .

If you want to take this trip, you can book accommodation here . There’s a variety of options when it comes to places to stay for the weekend.

Waterfall in Brecon Beacons, Wales

10. Weekend in Yorkshire

Yorkshire is another fun place to go on a weekend trip from London. Up in the north of England, this region is graced with pretty cities, lovely towns, and dramatic landscapes.

York is the ideal place to visit if you enjoy urban getaways. It has some of the most photogenic streets in Britain, and lots of good shopping to boot. York Minster makes it one of the most important cathedral cities in England , too.

York Minster, England

The historic spa town of Harrogate is also a fun place for a weekend in Yorkshire. It’s packed with heritage architecture and pretty parks.

Harrogate Street, England

I once combined it with a trip to Leeds , where I had a good time exploring the shopping arcades and going to see a play with friends.

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in Yorkshire here . I’ve stayed at a number of places in the area, and my favorite one is The Lawrance in Harrogate. You can book a room here .

Leeds Shopping Arcade

11. Weekend in Hampshire

Hampshire is another of my favorite weekend trips in the UK . This county is packed with everything from pretty villages to scenic countryside, enchanting woodlands, and impressive cities. You can even visit Jane Austen’s house here.

There are lots of places you can go for a weekend in Hampshire. If you love urban escapes, Winchester is a great pick. It’s a stunning cathedral city with beautiful streets.

Hospital of St Cross, Winchester, England

If villages are your thing, places like East Meon are hard to beat. The colorful thatched-roof cottages here are straight out of a storybook.

If you love the outdoors, the South Downs National Park and the New Forest are great places to go. The latter has great hotels and restaurants like The Pig in Brockenhurst.

If you want to spend a weekend in Hampshire, you can book a hotel here . I’ve stayed at The Greyhound on The Test Hotel in Stockbridge and I love its chic country style. You can book a room here .

River in Hampshire, England

12. Weekend in the Wye Valley

On the border of England and Wales, the Wye Valley is another fun weekend trip from London. The first organized tour in Britain took place here, leading to the area being known as the birthplace of British tourism.

This Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty is packed with beautiful towns and scenic countryside. From shopping for antiques in the market town of Ross-on-Wye to admiring the ruins of Tintern Abbey in Monmouthshire, there’s a lot to do here.

Tintern Abbey in the Wye Valley in Spring

If you like the outdoors, Symonds Yat Rock is a great place to walk and take in the panoramas over the River Wye. There are trails through the Forest of Dean from Symonds Yat, too.

If you want to take this trip, you can book accommodation in the Wye Valley here . There are lots of good places to stay.

Wye Valley Walk in Ross-on-Wye

13. Weekend in St Ives

St Ives is next on my list of weekend trips from London. This pretty town in Cornwall is one of my favorite places to go to the seaside in England. With scenic coastline, excellent food, and postcard-perfect beaches, it’s hard to beat.

St Ives is known for art, too. From Tate St Ives to the Barbara Hepworth Museum and Sculpture Garden, it’s the perfect place to channel your inner art enthusiast. There are lots of local art galleries in town, too.

Boat in St Ives, Cornwall

I did a weekend trip to St Ives by sleeper train from London, and it was an ideal way to take a weekend trip from London without a car. I highly recommend it for 2 days in Cornwall .

If you want to take this trip, you can book accommodation in St Ives here . From hotels to cottages, there are lots of great places to stay.

Cottages in St Ives, Cornwall

14. Weekend in Rye

Out in East Sussex, Rye comes next on my list of weekend trips from London. This jewel of a town is full of cobblestone streets, half-timbered houses, haunted inns, and swoon-worthy cottages. It’s one of the prettiest towns in England .

There are a lot of great things to do in Rye . From climbing the church’s bell tower to visiting the former home of writer Henry James, the town has a lot to offer.

Mermaid Inn, Rye

Rye is also a short walk from Camber Castle, a historic fortress with Henry VIII connections. It’s one of the top castles near London . And that’s to say nothing of the town’s proximity to Camber Sands, one of the best beaches in East Sussex .

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in Rye here . If you want something unique, the Mermaid Inn is said to be haunted. You can book a room here .

Rye, East Sussex Street

15. Weekend in Stratford-upon-Avon

A weekend in Stratford-upon-Avon is another great getaway from London. Located in Warwickshire, this town is known for its Shakespeare connections.

Stratford is full of houses The Bard and his family lived in, theaters showing his plays, and historic streets and heritage pubs for drinking and dining.

Street in Stratford upon Avon

Spending 2 days in Stratford-upon-Avon will give you ample time to visit all the Shakespeare houses, see a play one evening, and discover the historic streets and pretty riverfront.

If you want to go on this trip, you can book a hotel in Stratford here . There are lots of good places to stay.

Stratford Upon Avon Garden in England

16. Weekend in Chester

Up in northwest England, Chester is next on my list of weekend getaways from London. It’s hard to top this city for history and charm. Chester has Roman walls, medieval churches, and a half-timbered high street that makes me swoon.

Building in Chester, UK

Add to that lovely side streets, colorful doors, and one of the most impressive cathedrals in the UK, and Chester is stunning everywhere you look. There’s a famous zoo here, too.

If you want to take this city break, you can book a hotel in Chester here . There are plenty of options when it comes to accommodation.

View of Chester, England

17. Weekend in Durham

Durham is next on my list of the best weekend trips from London. This city in the north of England is worth a visit for its eye-catching cathedral, renowned university, castle, cobblestone streets, and riverside scenery.

Durham Cathedral, England

Brimming with heritage, the side streets around Durham University are ideal places to get a glimpse of Britain’s past. The city has fun cafes and river walks as well.

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in Durham here . I’ve stayed at a few places in the city, and my top pick is The Townhouse . I like its themed rooms and historic surroundings. You can book a room here .

Market Place, Durham

18. Weekend in Manchester

Manchester is another of the best weekend getaways from London. That’s not least because it’s one of the UK’s best student cities. With lively restaurants, shops, and streets to discover, it has a fun atmosphere and a great nightlife scene.

Manchester city street with contemporary architecture

There’s heritage as well. The Castlefield area’s 18th-century canal system is just the place to take in Manchester’s textile history.

The Salford Quays dockyards are home to the Daniel Libeskind-designed Imperial War Museum North and The Lowry arts center, too.

If you want to take this city break, you can book a hotel in Manchester here . I’ve stayed at the Malmaison Manchester , and I like its lively atmosphere and central location. You can book a room here .

Manchester, England, UK

19. Weekend in Newcastle-upon-Tyne

Up in the north of England, Newcastle-upon-Tyne is another of the top weekend trips from London. Like Manchester, this city is known for its student population and lively nightlife scene.

But that’s not all. Grey Street was once voted the finest street in Britain by BBC Radio 4 listeners, and museums like BALTIC ensure Newcastle has a good mix of art exhibitions throughout the year.

Church in Newcastle, UK

The bridges here are worth seeing, too. They span both the River Tyne and the centuries. Then come Newcastle’s pubs, many of which have heritage interiors and exciting atmospheres.

While here, you can also see the highlights of the local area. Taking a Hadrian’s Wall tour from Newcastle is a great way to get into Britain’s ancient Roman past. Seeing Antony Gormley’s Angel of the North is a must for sculpture lovers, too.

Angel of the North

If you want to take this city break, you can book a hotel in Newcastle here . I’ve stayed at Hotel Indigo , and I like its central location. You can book a room here .

Gateshead Millennium Bridge in Newcastle, England

20. Weekend in Eastbourne

Down on the south coast, Eastbourne is another fun weekend trip from London. If you love the English seaside, there are great beaches all around, a fun pleasure pier to explore, and live music right on the waterfront.

A weekend in Eastbourne will give you enough time to discover this resort town and the surrounding area at a leisurely pace.

Eastbourne Pier on Eastbourne Beach

Places like Beachy Head and its famous lighthouse are worth the short drive or bus ride. And that’s to say nothing of the chalk cliffs of the Seven Sisters.

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in Eastbourne here . I’ve stayed at The Lansdowne Hotel and it has an ideal waterfront location. You can book a room here .

Eastbourne Waterfront, England

21. Weekend in Nottingham

Nottingham may be more famous for Robin Hood than weekend breaks, but it’s still one of my favorite places to spend two days in the UK.

Home of the University of Nottingham and Nottingham Trent University, Nottingham is known for being a student city.

Old Market Square, Nottingham, UK

Beyond the universities, there’s a stunning castle, one of the oldest pubs in England, lots of historic streets, good shopping, and a famous statue of Robin Hood.

If you want to go on this trip, you can book a hotel in Nottingham here . I’ve stayed at the Lace Market Hotel , and I’m a fan of the unique rooms and great location. You can book a room here .

Ye Olde Trip to Jerusalem Pub in Nottingham, England

22. Weekend in Belfast

Belfast is another of the top weekend breaks from London. Famous for everything from the Titanic Quarter to the Peace Wall, there’s a lot to see and do here.

Titanic Belfast Museum

Add to that fun pubs, lively restaurants, and stunning scenery along the Causeway Coastal Route , and Belfast makes for a great weekend escape.

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in Belfast here . I’ve stayed at the Malmaison Belfast and I like its beautiful exterior and city center location. You can book a room here .

Sculpture in Belfast, Northern Ireland

23. Weekend in Birmingham

Up in the Midlands, Birmingham is an underrated weekend trip from London. This city has everything from centuries-old pubs to colorful creative districts.

Birmingham’s contemporary library gets my inner architecture (and book) lover excited, and I love the pre-Raphaelite masterpieces in the Birmingham Museum and Art Gallery.

Great Western Arcade, Birmingham

This city first won me over when I visited for the Birmingham Christmas markets . Since then, it’s tempted me back for its heritage buildings, historic shopping arcades, canals, and colorful streets.

If you want to go on this trip, you can book a hotel in Birmingham here . There’s a wide variety of accommodation on offer in the city center.

Vintage Shop at the Custard Factory, Birmingham

24. Weekend in Aberdeen

Up in Scotland, Aberdeen is another of my favorite weekend trips in the UK. This port city is an ideal place to visit if you love a mix of urban attractions and coastal castles.

Known as the Granite City for its stone buildings, Aberdeen offers visitors everything from a beautiful university to a charming old fishing village to explore. There’s a colorful street art scene here as well.

University of Aberdeen, UK

Seaside fortresses like Dunnottar Castle are quick and easy train trips from Aberdeen, too. They add a legendary element to a trip to Scotland.

If you want to go on this city break, you can book a hotel in Aberdeen here . There are lots of good places to stay in the city center.

Dunnottar Castle, UK

25. Weekend in Derry / Londonderry

Back over in Northern Ireland, Derry / Londonderry is another great weekend trip from London. There are direct flights from the UK capital, so it’s easy to get here for a city break.

Derry / Londonderry is known for its riverfront scenery, lively pubs and restaurants, and panoramic views.

Derry Londonderry Street

It’s a fun place to do everything from stand-up paddle boarding on the River Foyle to exploring the side streets and hidden courtyards with their independent shops and cafes.

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in Derry / Londonderry here . I’ve stayed at the Bishop’s Gate Hotel , and I like the friendly staff, decor, and central location. You can book a room here .

Derry Londonderry Building

26. Weekend in Norfolk

Norfolk is one of the best weekend trips from London by car. Whether you love stately homes, shopping, beaches, or pubs, there’s something here for you.

From Burnham Market to Wells-next-the-Sea , this area is brimming with great places to stay for a weekend in Norfolk . Add to that pretty cities like Norwich and famous stretches of sand like Holkham Beach, there’s a lot to love about this part of England.

Norwich Street

If you want to go on this trip, you can book accommodation here . I’ve stayed at a number of hotels in the area, and my top pick is The Hoste . You can book a room here .

House in Burnham Market, Norfolk, England

27. Weekend in Cambridge

Cambridge is next on my list of the top weekend trips from London. One of the best university cities in the UK , this place is not only picture-pretty, but also an important center of British heritage and academics.

If you have 48 hours in Cambridge , you can see the city and experience the main things to do. From exploring the colleges to punting on the River Cam and attending evensong at King’s College Chapel, there’s a lot to keep you entertained.

Mathematical Bridge, Cambridge

You can also do my self-guided walking tour of Cambridge if you want to see the big attractions and hidden side streets. It will give you a good overview of the city.

You can even take the train or drive from Cambridge to Ely while you’re visiting. This city has a famous cathedral and lots of historic streets to explore.

Ely Cathedral in England

If this trip sounds good to you, you can book a hotel in Cambridge here . I’ve stayed at the Clayton Hotel and I’m a fan of its contemporary decor and proximity to the train station. You can book a room here .

Vintage Car in Cambridge, England

28. Weekend in Oxford

Cambridge’s rival Oxford is next on my list of weekend getaways from London. Not only is it known for academics, but also architecture.

From Christ Church to St John’s and Magdalen, there are a lot of famous college buildings within the University of Oxford. You can do my self-guided walking tour of Oxford to see the highlights.

Magdalen College, Oxford

And there’s more. The city is full of heritage pubs, museums, and markets. Oxford is also popular for its Harry Potter filming locations and Alice in Wonderland connections.

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in Oxford here . I’ve stayed at the Malmaison Oxford , which is unique in that it’s housed in a former prison. You can book a room here .

Radcliffe Camera, Oxford

29. Weekend in Glasgow

Up in Scotland, Glasgow is another of the top weekend trips from London by train. My grandmother grew up here and I’ve been visiting this part of the UK all my life.

This spirited city features an eye-catching mix of historic and contemporary architecture, a delicious food scene, and lively nightlife.

Glasgow Cathedral

Glasgow is also known for friendly locals, great markets, street art, and world-class museums. It’s a great place to go for weekends in Scotland .

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in Glasgow here . I’ve stayed at the Grand Central and I like the convenient location by the train station. You can book a room here .

Kelvingrove Art Gallery and Museum

30. Weekend in Bristol

Bristol is another of the best weekend getaways from London . Out in southwest England, Bristol is known for its independent spirit and riverside attractions.

Bristol Church

Converted 19th-century riverfront warehouses shelter lively restaurants, shops, and galleries, and Harbourside is home to the contemporary M Shed museum, which explores Bristol’s social and industrial heritage.

Clifton is full of elegant crescents, Georgian townhouses, and the eye-catching Clifton Suspension Bridge.

Courtyard with a Fountain in Bristol, England

The city is an easy train ride from London, and with 2 days in Bristol you can see all the highlights.

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in Bristol here . I’ve stayed at the Hotel du Vin and I’m a fan of its spacious rooms and city center location. You can book a room here .

Deck chairs at Cabot Circus in Bristol

31. Weekend in Leicester

Leicester comes next on my list of weekend trips from London. This city in the Midlands is has fascinating Richard III connections. The former king died here, and there’s a museum dedicated to him in the city. He’s buried in Leicester Cathedral, too.

Richard III Statue by Leicester Cathedral in the UK

Leicester is also known for its Arts and Crafts Movement connections. The Leicester Museum and Art Gallery houses an important collection, and leading figures like architect-designer Ernest Gimson were born in the city.

Furthermore, Leicester has impressive historic architecture to take in. If you look up as you walk around during your weekend in Leicester , it will impress you. There are even ancient Roman ruins here.

Shopping Street in Leicester, England

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in Leicester here . I’ve stayed at St Martins Lodge , which is housed in a renovated Grade II-listed building in the heart of the city center. You can book a room here .

New Walk, Leicester, England

32. Weekend in Paris

Outside the UK, Paris is my top pick for a weekend trip from London. The City of Light makes a great escape from the UK capital, and it’s one of my favorite romantic weekend getaways to Europe .

Seine in Paris

There’s a lot to do and see in Paris, including famous museums, world-class shopping and dining, great nightlife, and Paris landmarks like the Eiffel Tower and Notre Dame. It’s worth spending a weekend in Paris to see the highlights.

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in Paris here . I’ve also written about the best areas to stay in Paris if you want specific recommendations.

Place des Vosges, Paris

33. Weekend in Brussels

Also on the continent, Brussels is one of the easiest weekend trips from London to Europe . I spent a summer living and working here, and I can vouch for its worthiness as a travel destination.

Grand Place, Brussels

Brussels is known for everything from excellent food and drinks to great museums, vibrant street art, elegant Art Nouveau architecture, and bustling markets. The Grand Place is one of the most awe-inspiring city squares in all of Europe, too.

If you want to spend a weekend in Brussels , you can book a hotel in the city here . I’ve visited many times, and my top pick for a place to stay is the Hilton Brussels Grand Place . You can book a room here .

Rue des Bouchers in Brussels

34. Weekend in Amsterdam

With direct rail services and short flights between London and Holland, Amsterdam is another of the best weekend trips from London. This city in the Netherlands is known for its picturesque canals, unique houses, art museums, and great nightlife scene.

Dutch Shoe Magnets in Amsterdam

Two days in Amsterdam will give you plenty of time to walk through the streets, browse the markets, go on a canal boat ride, and cycle out to the countryside. If it’s spring, you can visit the beautiful Keukenhof Gardens , too.

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in Amsterdam here . I’ve visited several times, and my favorite place to stay is the Amsterdam Marriott Hotel . You can book a room here .

Cheese Sculpture in Amsterdam

35. Weekend in Dublin

Dublin is another of my favorite weekend trips from London. The Irish capital is known for its lively pubs, buzzing riverfront, historic castle and cathedral, and expansive parks.

Trinity College, Dublin

A weekend in Dublin is enough time to see the highlights and take in treasures like The Library of Trinity College Dublin and the Book of Kells.

If you want to take this trip, you can book a hotel in Dublin here . I’ve stayed at a number of hotels here, and The Westin Dublin is my favorite. I love its great location and luxurious atmosphere. You can book a room here .

Trinity College Library, Dublin

Map of Weekend Trips from London

Below is an interactive map of all the places I mentioned in this blog post. If you click on the blue pins, you can find more information about each one. I hope it helps you plan your getaway!

Scott Monument, Edinburgh

Best Weekend Trips from London

I hope you’ve liked my list of weekend trips from London, and that it’s helped you discover new places to travel from the UK capital and beyond.

If you have more time to travel, you can take a look at my blog post about 3-day trips from London for ideas. It includes popular places like the Lake District , the Yorkshire Dales , and the Isle of Wight . Happy travels!

Find this post helpful? Buy me a coffee!

New here? Join thousands of others and subscribe to the A Lady in London blog via email .

Some of the links in this blog post are affiliate links. At no cost to you, I earn a small commission when you click on them and make a purchase. It doesn’t affect the way you shop, and it’s a great way to support the A Lady in London blog.

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

© Copyright A Lady in London 2007 - 2024. Privacy Policy.

Deals of the Week   European Long Weekends   Up to 50% OFF

England (South) Tours & Trips

Find the right tour for you through England (South). We've got 41 adventures going to England (South), starting from just 3 days in length, and the longest tour is 13 days. The most popular month to go is September, which has the largest number of tour departures.

41 England (South) tour packages with 180 reviews

5-Day Devon & Cornwall Small Group from London Tour

  • In-depth Cultural
  • Christmas & New Year

5-Day Devon & Cornwall Small Group from London

I had a great time on the tour. Our driver Francis really added to the experience with his very extensive knowledge of the places we visited. He was always on hand to assist whichever one of us required a little bit of help to climb the various hills and tors. It was amazing to reach the summit and experience such majestic views.

Best of Devon and Cornwall (6 Days) Tour

  • Coach / Bus

Best of Devon and Cornwall (6 Days)

Wonderful tour Thoroughly enjoyed every minute
  • €100 deposit on some dates Some departure dates offer you the chance to book this tour with a lower deposit.

3-Day Stonehenge, Glastonbury, Bath & the South West Coast Small-Group Tour from London Tour

3-Day Stonehenge, Glastonbury, Bath & the South West Coast Small-Group Tour from London

Dan was our tour guide who did an excellent job. Over & above. We were very happy and saw areas not expected

Highlights of South-West England Tour

Highlights of South-West England

Cornwall tour starting in London Tour

Cornwall tour starting in London

A fantastic small tour of Cornwall with a really fun and informative guide. The Cornwall coast is superb.

Stonehenge, Devon & Cornwall - 5 days Tour

Stonehenge, Devon & Cornwall - 5 days

Stonehenge, Devon & Cornwall (Hotel) - 5 days Tour

Stonehenge, Devon & Cornwall (Hotel) - 5 days

Cycle the Cotswolds: Oxford to Bath Tour

Cycle the Cotswolds: Oxford to Bath

Cycle Devon - Coast to Coast Tour

Cycle Devon - Coast to Coast

  • 10% deposit on some dates Some departure dates offer you the chance to book this tour with a lower deposit.

Corners of Cornwall Tour

Corners of Cornwall

  • €150 deposit on some dates Some departure dates offer you the chance to book this tour with a lower deposit.

Isle of Wight Cycle Tour

  • Self-Guided Cycling

Isle of Wight Cycle

Cycling the Cantii Way Tour

Cycling the Cantii Way

Walking South Devon\'s Coastal Path Tour

  • Hiking & Trekking

Walking South Devon's Coastal Path

Kent: The Garden of England Tour

Kent: The Garden of England

Bath, Devon & Cornwall Small Group Rail Tour Tour

Bath, Devon & Cornwall Small Group Rail Tour

Such a lovely part of Britain (Bath, Devon and Cornwall), the accommodations were wonderful, and tour leader (Barry) was knowledgeable, entertaining and made everything go smoothly.

What people love about England (South) Tours

We thoroughly enjoyed our Devon and Cornwall tour with Jack. Jack is extremely knowledgeable about the area, so engaging with a lot of humour and an excellent driver! We would love to join another tour on our next visit to the UK.
It was a great adventure and experience, especially due to our excellent director Helen, an extremely cultured and warmhearted woman with a lot of historical and literary knowledge, not to forget her humour. Very intense six days with a full but balanced programme, including nature, culture and good food and fellowship. Thank you!
We had a wonderful time! Our tour guide, Kate, was knowledgeable and accommodating for all of our interests and needs. I would highly recommend this trip.
  • England Travel Guide | All You Need to Know

The Wandering Quinn Travel Blog

21 Perfect Road Trips From London & Short Trips From London By Car!

Categories England , London , U.K

There are so many places to visit near London! There are many day trips from London by train that you can do, but if you really want to get out of the big smoke, into nature and somewhere new, a road trip from London is the answer !

Below are ideas from myself and my blogging friends on short trips from London and the best places to visit in the UK .

These include road trips from London that you can do as day trips from London and 2-5 day trips from London if you want to make a London road trip into a UK Staycation !

Road trips are all about getting into nature so these road trip from London ideas are based on visiting the coast , countryside and small villages  outside of London to provide a more exciting road trip from London adventure!

Whether you live in London, or you are visiting London as a tourist, here are UK road trip ideas from London and the best road trips from London to help you start planning your London getaway!

Road Trips from London

Road Trip From London

Find What You're Looking For Easily Here!

Road Trip From London Map

Here is a map with the below road trip from London destinations on it to help you work out which part of the UK will be best for your London Road Trip depending on the time you have!

Car Hire From London

If you don’t have a car as most Londoners don’t, I’ve found the best place to hire a car from in London is from one of the London Airports ! I recommend using Rental Cars as they search all the top car hire companies!

Search for the best car hire prices in London here!

TRAVEL TIPS

🏘️Book your accommodation

Booking.com and Hostelworld will help you to book accommodation and check availability in advance

🚘To get your car rental in advance

and to make your trip more convenient, you can use Rentalcars.com and find the most suitable option for you

🧾Get your tickets and guided tours

with Viator and GetYourGuide to get the most out of your journey

Best Road Trips From London

Here are the best recommendations for road trips from London!

The Channel Island of Jersey is a great island escape form London and the UK, without leaving the UK. Drive down to Poole and catch the 4 Hour 40 Minute scenic car ferry from Poole to Jersey Channel Island .

Jersey works perfectly as a 3 day road trip from London!

Jersey is a small island which makes road-tripping around Jersey a lot of fun because you can see so much!

However although small, Jersey is packed with natural attractions, historic attractions and amazingly good food, perfect for a weekend road trip from London!

Things to do in Jersey:

On your Jersey Channel Island itinerary , I recommend trying a surf lesson on the West Coast of the Island. Going hiking along the North Coast of the Island and going out on a RIB Boat Trip Adventure on the East Coast in search for seals!

I also really recommend having dinner at The Boat House in the pretty village of St Aubin. You’ll be sure to return back to London refreshed and relaxed from all that island air!

Diving Distance from London: 7 Hours by Road & Ferry

Suggested By: The Wandering Quinn

Road Trip from London, Jersey Channel Island

2. Cotswolds Villages

If you’d like to escape London for some peace and relaxation, there’s no better place to go than the beautiful English countryside !

Not too far away from London is the Cotswolds “Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty”, a collection of charming little villages surrounded by rolling green hills and stunning scenery. 

Whether you’re looking to take a day trip from London or searching for the perfect weekend getaway, visiting a few of the Cotswolds villages makes an excellent choice when it comes to planning a road trip from London, no matter the length you choose.

Some of the most picturesque villages to visit in the Cotswolds region are Bibury, Lower Slaughter, Stow-on-the-Wold, and Castle Combe (but there are so many more!).

The beauty of the Cotswolds villages is that they are all located close to one another and they are easy to reach from London in just a few hours making it a great road trip in England from London.

The best things to do when visiting any of the villages are exploring the pretty cobbled streets admiring the beautiful historic buildings, popping into a cosy historic pub for a bite to eat, and taking a scenic walk around the countryside to soak up the peaceful atmosphere!

Diving Distance from London: 87 Miles. 2 Hours.

Suggested By: The Road is Life

Click here to book a full day tour to Cotswolds from London via get your guide

Road Trip from London, The Cotswolds

3. Jurassic Coast

The Jurassic Coast is a 95-mile stretch of jagged coastline in southern England. Famed for its beautiful beaches, iconic country landscapes and captivating coastal hiking paths, it’s the ideal setting for a weekend from London where being in nature is your top priority.

Doing a r oad trip from London along the Jurassic Coast will encapsulate the best places in Dorset and Devon for a full Dorset and Devon Road Trip !

The defining icon of the Jurassic Coast is Old Harry Rocks ; a collection of dazzling white limestone stacks arranged along the coast like a jigsaw puzzle waiting to be assembled.

It’s the perfect place to unwind and watch the sun go down in front of iconic scenery.

Lulworth Cove is a circular cove surrounded by a sweeping arc of pebbles, backed by steep cliffs. It’s a beautiful part of England and the best way to see it is on a stroll along the coast to Durdle Door.

This walk, with towering cliffs on one side and bucolic countryside on the other, is one of the best short walks on the Jurassic Coast .

Corfe Castle , an 11th-century ruin, is an engrossing and atmospheric spot to catch the sunrise and Lyme Regis is a lovely seaside town to visit.

From the short but steep climb up nearby West Hill, the view as the sun lights up the decaying stone is a mesmerising way to experience the Jurassic Coast, a fantastic UK road trip from London!

Diving Distance from London:  125 Miles. 2 Hours 45 Minutes.

Suggested By: Anywhere We Roam

Road Trip from London, Jurassic Coast

We know that staycations are all the rage right now so also see these 15 UK Staycation Ideas for this year!

4. Suffolk Coast

At about 2.5 hours from London , the Suffolk coast is a great choice for a day trip from London, but it’s such a beautiful part of the world and so quiet that you’ll want to stay for a weekend.

Suffolk is one of the most unspoiled parts of the UK and with over 50 miles of heritage coastline, there’s plenty of space to go and stretch your legs on its many beautiful and uncrowded beaches.

On a Suffolk road trip from London, the most popular beaches to visit are Aldeburgh, Southwold and Thorpeness , but if you’re looking to completely get away from it all, then Dunwich, situated in an Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty, is a great choice.

It’s home to the National Trust owned Dunwich Heath, which is a beautiful spot for walks.

If you’re looking to do an overnight road trip from London by car, the Cliff House Holiday Park is a lovely campsite right on the cliffs where you can pitch a tent, caravan or hire a lodge

Diving Distance from London: 100 Miles. 2 Hours 30 Minutes.

Suggested By: UK Family Travel

Road Trip from London, Suffolk Coast

Devon is often overlooked because of the popular county of Cornwall but a Devon road trip is a brilliant trip to do and the benefit of visiting Devon from London instead of Cornwall from London is that going to Devon will shave off a good 1-2 hours from your journey!

Devon has a North Coast and South Coast to visit plus inland places like Dartmoor National Park , I spent 3 days in Devon exploring all 3 areas and it was enough time to see a lot!

Devon still has the Jurassic Coast , just like Dorset so walking From Branscombe to the pretty village of Beer along the coast is a popular thing to do. So is going to the Victorian seaside town of Sidmouth and visiting the nearby Donkey Sanctuary.

On the North Coast of Devon there is Woolacombe beach , a popular place for surfing and families to visit and it isn’t too far from the edge of Cornwall where Bude is, so you can do a Devon and Cornwall Road Trip in one go!

Diving Distance from London: 180 miles / 3 hours 40 minutes

Suggested By:   The Wandering Quinn

Road Trips from London, Devon

6. Brecon Beacons, Wales

A road trip from London to the Brecon Beacons will take you through some beautiful spots in England and Wales and it’s easily accessible via the M4!

Once in the Brecon Beacons National Park , you can spend a few days hiking. Popular hikes are to the top of Pen Y Fan , the biggest peak in South Wales and South England, there’s also a great Brecon 4 Waterfalls Walk .

Because you’ll have your car you should drive along the Black Mountain Road which offers stunning views and is known as the Top Gear Road.

For relaxing the Brecon Beacons is filled with lovely towns and villages like Hay on Wye which is perfect for those who like literature and unique places!

Afterwards, you can stop in Cardiff and check our Cardiff Castle and Cardiff Bay before going back to London!

Diving Distance from London: 180 miles / 4 hours

Road Trips from London, Brecon Beacons Wales

7. Pembrokeshire, Wales

The drive from London to Pembrokeshire isn’t the shortest so this is best if you have at least 3 days or even 1 week to spend on a short trip from London.

However, Pembrokeshire is an amazing part of Wales and the most visited for holidays because of its endless beaches , a full coastal walk linking every beach, family fun activities, a huge amount of campsites, holiday parks and pretty Welsh villages.

Tenby is the most popular place to visit in Pembrokeshire and there are lots of cottages in Tenby and campsites near Tenby to stay.

Saun dersfoot Beach and Barafundle Bay are also popular beaches to visit.

Bosherston Lilly Ponds , Stack Rock Fort and St Govans Chapel are my recommended hidden gems in Pembrokeshire to visit to make your short trip from London to Wales really memorable!

Diving Distance from London: 240 miles / 4 hours 40 minutes

Road Trips from London, Pembrokeshire Wales

8. Barry Island, Wales

Visiting South Wales is a great idea for a road trip from London as both places are either end of the M4 and takes around 3.5 hours by car .

One of the best places to visit on a road trip from London in Wales is Barry Island especially if you’re looking for a trip to the seaside for some tasty fish and chips and easy hikes around the coast. 

When going on a road trip to Barry Island from London, there’s cheap and all-day parking in close walking distance to the attractions and two accessible roads because it’s not an actual island (anymore).

The best things to do on Barry Island include riding the fairground , indulging on candy floss and stick-a-rocks, making sandcastles, renting a colourful beach hut and playing crazy golf on the promenade. Here are the best beaches in Barry !

If you’re brave enough, you could dip in the freezing ocean for a swim or attempt to win prizes in the arcade grabbers.

The unmissable thing to do on Barry Island, however, is enjoy everything Gavin and Stacey which was set and filmed around the area.

On your visit, be sure to read this guide to Gavin and Stacey filming locations and take a selfie with the cast billboard at Marco’s cafe for a memorable weekend road trip from London!

Diving Distance from London: 160 Miles. 3 hours 15 minutes.

Suggested By:   The Happy Days Travels

For Wales ideas also see: Places to Visit on a Wales Road Trip & Places for Staycations in Wales !

Road Trip from London, Barry Island Wales

9. Isle of Wight

One of the most unique places you can visit on a road trip from London is the Isle of Wight .

Located just a stones throw away from the southern coast of England is a great place to spend a weekend away with friends and family.

From a few amazing beaches like Ryde beach to unusual experiences like visiting the Garlic Farm – there are so many things to do on the Isle of Wright.

Don’t forget to drive the famous Military Road , full of stunning cliffs views and to visit the Needles – one of the main landmarks on the Isle of Wight.

It’s better not to visit the isle of Wight during Bank Holidays in May but apart of that little island is a less touristy place – perfect for everyone willing to have great walks without crowds.

Diving Distance from London: 90 Miles. 3 Hours 10 Minutes.

Suggested By: Darek and Gosia

Road Trip from London, Isle of Wight

10. Ashdown Forest, Sussex

Ashdown Forest is a great place to stop on a road trip from London. For those who don’t know, Ashdown Forest is the real-life inspiration for the Hundred Acre Wood where Winnie the Pooh lives.

A. A. Milne stated that he believed Ashdown Forest was enchanted, and spent many hours wandering through it.

Today, visitors can also walk through various parts of the forest and even try to find different characters from the books. The most popular activity is playing Poohsticks by the river.

Nearby is, of course, Pooh Corner the sweetshop where A. A. Milne would take Christopher Robin.

In addition to getting out and enjoying nature, it is worth stopping by many of the surrounding towns. In  East Grinstead  you can learn about the town’s fascinating connection to WWII or stand on the Meridian Line.

Or head South to Fletching and take an alpaca for a walk. The beautiful Tudor Hever Castle is just a 20 minute drive away!

Diving Distance from London:  36 Miles. 1 hour 20 minutes.

Suggested By: Cultura Obscura

Road Trip from London, Ashdown Forest

Campervan Hire for UK Road Trips

Before we get into all of the best UK road trip ideas from London. If you want to go on a memorable road trip with the freedom and flexibility to stop and camp where you want , why not hire a Camper??

Let me introduce to you Indie Campers ! They provide Campervan hire in the UK and Europe and their London depot is close to Heathrow Airport which is the perfect place to start and end your London road trip! 

Indie Campers own a range of high-quality Campervans and provide a high level of assistance before your booking and during your booking. Best of all, you can change the dates of your booking FOR FREE up to 48 hours in advance in case your plans change, or the weather looks like it could be bad and you can reschedule for a sunnier trip!

When planning a road trip around the UK, visiting less-visited places  like the suggestions below, and staying self-contained is going to be the future of travel for a while, but that’s not a bad thing as it provides a new adventure! So be sure to look into Indie Campers for a unique Road Trip from London !

Road Trip From London

11. Camber Sands, East Sussex

Camber Sands in East Sussex is a wonderful day out or weekend away from London. The beach is over two miles long so there’s plenty of space for everyone to spread out.

In summer time Camber Sands is a wonderful spot for a swim or a paddle. Children love to visit for sandcastle building or flying a kite.

In wintertime, the beach is popular with horse riders and dog walkers and the sunsets are magnificent making this an all year round road trip from London!

Camber Sands is located just outside the medieval town of Rye near the border with Kent. There are plenty of interesting walks in the area as well as some good places to buy a take away lunch.

If you don’t want to stray too far from the beach, there are several restaurants next to the beach although most of Camber Sands is backed by sand dunes, making it very picturesque.

Ensure you arrive early at Camber Sands, on warm days the car parks can get very busy so plan your London road trip accordingly.

Diving Distance from London: 80 Miles. 2 Hours 10 Minutes.

Suggested By: Smudged Postcard

Road Trip from London, Camber Sands

12. Lyme Regis, Dorset

When looking for a trip out of London, there is no greater escape from the crowds than the beach. A few hours drive from London and you can find yourself in the tranquil county of Dorset.

Famed for the beaches, cliffs and fossils , the charming seaside town of Lyme Regis is a great place to base yourself.

Due to the long drive, I would recommend spending at least a night, or perhaps even a weekend, in Lyme Regis  on this road trip from Lonon.

There are many things to do in Lyme Regis , the beach here is naturally pebbled, and you will often see people searching under the cliffs for fossils. There is also a man-made sand beach, great for when the sun comes out.

The main street of Lyme Regis is dotted with independent shops , and there is also an old working mill. In the summer, there is also the opportunity to take a boat trip from the harbour, wither for sightseeing or fishing.

In addition to this, there are some wonderful walks in the area. Many offer amazing views of the southern coastline.

Diving Distance from London: 154 Miles. 3 Hours.

Suggested By: Around The World With Her

13. Kent Villages

Kent isn’t known as “The Garden of England” for nothing. Kent is home to many quaint villages, amazing landscapes, historic castles, award-winning seaside resorts and breathtaking coastline views. 

There are indeed many beautiful villages in Kent to visit within 1-2 hours drive of London. You can reach Aylesford village in an hour which is on the River Medway, 4 miles to the northwest of Maidstone.

There are free car parks for visitors where you can find a walking path which leads you to the village and the countryside around it making Kent one of the great London road trip ideas for scenic drives near London.

Or, you can go to Godmersham, where you can find Godmersham Park. Keep in mind this park is not like any other parks, it is featured on 10 pounds notes. 

Fordwich, the smallest town in the UK With a population of 381 is also located in Kent on the River Stour. You can rent a boat and go on the river or just have a walk around. 

For the coastal walk, you can drive to Broadstairs, a pretty town on the Isle of Thanet, where you can visit Charles Dickens’ favourite holiday spot.

Diving Distance from London: 36 Miles. 1 Hour.

Suggested By:  Travel With Mansoureh

Road Trip from London, Kent Villages

14. Peak District

Nestled between the big cities of Manchester, Sheffield and Derby, The Peak District National Park is the oldest National Park in the UK.

It’s only a 3-hour drive from London , and standing on the craggy edge of one of the Peak District’s escarpments, overlooking the expansive landscape of green rolling hills and quaint villages below, you will feel a million miles away from life in the Capital.

Grab your Ordnance Survey map and hiking boots and head for a hike in the hills. Whilst Mam Tor in the North, or Dovedale Stepping Stones in the South, are popular hiking destinations, perhaps head to Curbar Edge or the rolling hills around Monyash, which will be much quieter.

Alternatively, bring your bike in your car and cycle along the miles upon miles of disused railway tracks that criss-cross the National Park. These have been transformed into gravel paths that are entirely traffic-free.

Whilst it is very doable to do a day trip from London with an early start and late finish, a visit to the Peak District is all about connecting with nature and slowing the pace.

So really, you want to book in at least a full weekend to reap the benefits of this road trip from London.

Diving Distance from London: 150 Miles. 2 Hours 50 Minutes.

Suggested By: Peak District Kids

Road Trip from London, Peak District

15. New Forest

The New Forest is a great place for a day trip from London or weekend road trip from London. There are several campsites in the area, where you can truly unwind and enjoy being close to nature.

You can take bikes with you or rent some, as the area has some great cycling trails. It is also a good destination for people, who want to go hiking near London .

You will most likely spot some wild horses on your outing. They are a common sight in the New Forest National Park. You can also book horse riding lessons and tours at most stables.

In the summer wild swimming is quite popular. There are several rope swings hung up by locals along the Lymington River.

Brockenhurst has a nice little area by the river, which is suitable for small children to paddle in the water. Families often come for a picnic at the river bank so this is a great option if you’re wanting to take a family road trip from London.

Diving Distance from London:  88 Miles. 1 Hour 40 Minutes.

Suggested By:  Travel Hacker Girl

Road Trip from London, New Forest

16. Cornwall

A Cornwall road trip is best enjoyed on a long weekend road trip from London.

National Trust members can park for free in the specified car parks scattered around Cornwall, and the coastal paths are the best way to see the rugged Cornish coastline. 

One of the most scenic routes on the Cornish coastal path is the route from Sennen Cove to Lands End , which gives walkers views over the beautiful Sennen beach and harbour area.

It’s the perfect spot to see Cornish wildlife, including red-billed choughs, peregrines, kestrels and grey seals. Further along the Mayon Cliffs coastal path, you can also walk to Maen Castle and see the lighthouses/shipwrecks lining the path. 

As well as the coastal path walks, Cornwall has a plethora of beaches and coves to visit where you will find secluded spots to enjoy minus the other tourists.

Even tourist favourite, Kynance Cove has a variety of coves and rock pools to enjoy away from other tourists. The coastal path from Kynance Cove to Lizard Point takes 47 minutes to walk or 15 minutes to drive. 

Timing is often everything when it comes to visiting places like Cornwall, and getting up early to explore or visiting the beaches in the late afternoon/early evening are a great way to get around and see the sights without hordes of other tourists.

Cornwall has various National Trust and English Heritage sites to visit, including the legendary Tintagel, as well as waterfalls and green areas to visit. 

There’s no doubt that Cornwall is a tourist hotspot, it is the place to visit if you want to get a taste of The Med without leaving England, but there are plenty of places to visit minus the crowds so looking into a London to Cornwall road trip !

Diving Distance from London: 260 Miles. 5 Hours.

Suggested By: The Life of a Social Butterfly

Also see: Hidden Gems in Cornwall to Visit & Things to do in Padstow !

Road Trip from London, Cornwall

17. Norwich

Norwich is the perfect road trip destination from London as it is not as far as you think, just over 2 hours from Central London . It is one of the best-preserved medieval cities in the country, and has a thriving independent food and shopping scene.

Home to one of the largest open-air markets in the UK , a 12th-century castle, two cathedrals and a maze of cobbled stone streets.

It is a city that offers everything! After a day of exploring there are plenty of pubs, cocktail bars and restaurants serving local produce for you to enjoy.

Norwich also provides a great starting point to discover some of Norfolk’s most stunning countryside.

The beautiful North Norfolk coastline stretches for over 100 miles and things to do in Norfolk include discovering gorgeous beaches, adorable coastal villages and some amazing wildlife – the seals live here all year round!

Closer to the city you can find the Norfolk broads . A man-made warren of waterways which provide beautiful views and a great day trip out! A perfect weekend getaway with a mix of country and city. 

Diving Distance from London: 118 Miles. 2 Hours 25 Minutes.

Suggested By: Where Charlie Wanders

Road Trip from London, Norwich

18. Stonehenge

A Stonehenge day trip from London is both easy and fun because you can easily drive from London to Stonehenge and I recommend stopping in Salisbury, a town with a wonderful cathedral, along the way.

Once you get there, you may be surprised by the fact you can’t actually enter the stone circle, but only see it from a distance.

The only time of the year when you can enter is Summer Solstice when you can access Stonehenge for free on a first come first served basis to see the sunrise aligning perfectly with the rocks.

All other times of the year, you can learn about Stonehenge at the visitor centre, where you’ll discover theories about how and why it was built, plus see a 360° audiovisual view, allowing you to stand virtually in the centre of the stone circle and see how it changes in different seasons. 

Visiting Stonehenge, touring the visitor centre and admiring the stone circle from different angles takes about 3/4 hours, making this destination ideal for a day trip from London by car.

For a weekend away, you could add Salisbury and nearby Avebury so you have enough to do to fill two days on your road trip from London.

Diving Distance from London: 88 Miles. 1 Hour 40 Minutes.

Suggested By: The Crowded Planet

Click here to book yourself a Stonehenge Tour via get your guide!

Road Trip from London, Stonehenge

19. Glastonbury

Most people think of the festival when they hear the name ‘Glastonbury’; few know that the town is well worth visiting in its own right. If you like nature, history and unique shops, you’re in the right place!

Quirky Glastonbury is a fantastic day trip from London or weekend road trip from London – it’s manageable in a day, but if you have time, it’s best to camp out nearby, or stay in one of the lovely guesthouses in town to make it a weekend trip. 

The drive from London to Glastonbury enjoys lush green scenery as you cross the beautiful rural counties of Wiltshire and Somerset.

Glastonbury is surrounded by nature, and plenty of hiking opportunities can be had close to the town, including the famous Glastonbury Tor, a hill that is awash with Pagan and Christian legend and has spring water that is said to be healing running out from underneath.

In the town, there are the ruins of Glastonbury Abbey, and lots of shops, where amongst the usual clothes and books, you can also buy tarot cards and crystal balls!

Its culture and history have given it the title of ‘England’s most magical town’; and any tourists there will definitely feel a mystical air as they walk around!

Suggested By: Go South West

Book yourself a full day tour of Glastonbury via Viator!

Road Trip from London, Glastonbury

20. Avebury

Take a day trip from London and visit the largest stone circle in the world at Avebury in Wiltshire. Avebury Stone Circle has been there for since between 2850 and 2200 BC.

Avebury is set on a mound with a ditch running around it. The area has been used for farming for nearly 6,000 years and sheep still roam round the stones. Unlike Stonehenge, you can get up close and even touch the stones.

If you want a break from walking, you can stop for a bite to eat in the café at the barn or the Red Lion Pub, or have a look around the shops in the village.

The Alex Keiller Museum in the Museum Barn gives you an insight into the history of Avebury and the archaeological finds that have been made.

Walking tours around the stones can be booked at the museum too. The stones are free to walk round, though there is a charge for entering the Museum.

There is a large carpark which costs £4 per day for non-National Trust members and is free for members. The ticket machine only takes coins, so make sure you have change with you. There is parking for the disabled in the Old Farmyard.

Driving Distance from London: 83 Miles. 2 Hours

Suggested by: The Silver Nomad

Road Trip from London, Avebury

21. London To Scotland

Finally, for something a bit different, if you have the time, and especially if you are flying into the UK for this UK Road Trip, why not look into a London to Scotland Road Trip or a Scotland to London Road Trip.

Indie Campers who I mentioned in this post have a depot near London Heathrow Airport and Edinburgh Airport which means you could start in Edinburgh and do a road trip to London visiting lots of places in Scotland and England in between, or a London to Edinburgh Road Trip. 

It would be best to do this as a 3-7 day road trip in the UK!

Diving Distance from London: 400 Miles. 7 Hours.

Road Trip from London, Edinburgh

FAQs About Road Trips from London:

Here the answers to frequently asked questions about road trips from London:

What are good day trips from London?

Good day trips from London are those down to the South Coast to see the White Cliffs, Brighton, Kent and Bournemouth. More day trips from London that are great are to towns and cities like Windor, Bath, Bristol, The Cotswolds.

Where can you drive from London?

Once you get out of London driving is much easier so there are many places to drive from London like the South Coast of England, Essex, Kent, and to the West like South Wales, Somerset, Dorset, Devon and Cornwall.

Where can I go close to London?

The best places close to London to go are places in Kent, Brighton and Surrey

Where should I go within 2 hours in London?

You can get very far into South England with a 2 hour drive from London, you can get to Kent, Dorset, Surrey, Somerset and into The Cotswolds.

What are scenic road trips from London?

Scenic Road trips from London to go on are to the Jurassic Coast, the Sussex Coast, into Surrey, into The Cotswolds and the New Forest National Park.

Now you’re set with plenty of ideas for epic road trips from London!

More of my trips from London posts:

  • 25 Day Trips from London by Train!
  • 10 Alternative Day Trips from London to do!
  • Things To Do in Oxford on a Day Trip from London.
  • Things To Do in Brighton on a Day Trip from London.
  • How to Visit the White Cliffs of Dover from London.

This post is in collaboration with Indie Campers.

If you liked this please share it! 🙂

  • Click to share on Facebook (Opens in new window)
  • Click to share on Twitter (Opens in new window)
  • Click to share on Pinterest (Opens in new window)
  • Click to email a link to a friend (Opens in new window)

By using this form you agree with the storage and handling of your data by this website. *

When is Eid al-Fitr 2024 and how is it celebrated?

The three-day festival celebrates the completion of the fasting month of Ramadan by Muslims across the world.

Interactive_Eid_2024_outside image

As a new moon was not sighted on Monday evening after Maghrib prayers, Muslims in Saudi Arabia and neighbouring countries will fast one more day, completing 30 days of Ramadan. The first day of Eid will then be celebrated on Wednesday, April 10.

The first day of Eid al-Fitr is determined by the sighting of the crescent moon marking the start of the month of Shawwal, the 10th month of the Islamic (Hijri) calendar.

Keep reading

A ramadan no palestinian will ever forget, the cost of a ramadan iftar meal around the world, ramadan 2024: where do your dates come from, in washington, dc: celebrating ramadan, protesting israel’s siege of gaza.

Lunar months last between 29 and 30 days so Muslims usually have to wait until the night before Eid to verify its date.

Other countries follow independent sightings.

When the sighting has been verified, Eid is declared on television, radio stations and at mosques.

Muslim worshippers prepare to take part in a morning prayer on the first day of Eid al-Fitr, which marks the end of the holy fasting month of Ramadan, at the Blue Mosque in Istanbul, on April 21, 2023 [Yasin Akgul /AFP]

How do Muslims celebrate Eid?

Traditionally, Eid is celebrated for three days as an official holiday in Muslim-majority countries. However, the number of holiday days varies by country.

Muslims begin Eid day celebrations by partaking in a prayer service that takes place shortly after dawn, followed by a short sermon.

Palestinian Muslims perform the morning Eid al-Fitr prayer, marking the end of the holy fasting month of Ramadan in Gaza City on May 2, 2022 [Mahmud HAMS / AFP]

On their way to the prayer, which is traditionally held in an open area, Muslims recite takbeerat, praising God by saying “Allahu Akbar”, meaning “God is great”.

Interactive_Eid_2024-How is Eid celebrated-1712214441

It is customary to eat something sweet before the prayer, such as date -filled biscuits known as maamoul in the Middle East. This particular festival is known as the “sweet” Eid – and the distribution of sweets is common across the Muslim world.

Muslims usually spend the day visiting relatives and neighbours and accepting sweets as they move around from house to house.

Each country has traditional desserts and sweets that are prepared before Eid or on the morning of the first day.

Interactive_Eid_2024-foods of Eid

Children, dressed in new clothes, are offered gifts and money to celebrate the joyous occasion.

Children ride a swing on the first day of Eid al-Fitr, which marks the end of the Muslim holy fasting month of Ramadan, in the rebel-held town of Maaret Misrin in Syria's northwestern Idlib province, on April 21, 2023 [Abdulaziz Ketaz / AFP]

Girls and women in many countries decorate their hands with henna. The celebration for Eid begins the night before as women gather in neighbourhoods and large family gatherings for the application of henna.

A girl shows her hand decorated with henna at a market area ahead of Eid al-Fitr, which marks the end of the Muslim holy festival of Ramadan, in Srinagar, on April 20, 2023 [Tauseef Mustafa / AFP]

In some countries, families visit graveyards to offer their respects to departed family members right after the morning prayers.

It is common for Muslim-majority countries to decorate their cities with lights and hold festivities to commemorate the end of the fasting month.

A general view shows the Alif Ki mosque illuminated during the holy month of Ramadan, ahead of Eid al-Fitr, in Ahmedabad on April 19, 2023 [Sam Panthaky/AFP]

Eid amid the onslaught in Gaza

For some 2.3 million Palestinians in Gaza this Eid, this will be the first Muslim religious holiday after more than 33,000 people have been killed in Israeli attacks. With little food aid, and very limited water, Gaza’s Eid al-Fitr will be mired in destruction amid the continuing attacks.

Interactive_Eid_2024_Destruction

What are common Eid greetings?

The most popular greeting is “Eid Mubarak” (Blessed Eid) or “Eid sa’id” (Happy Eid). Eid greetings also vary depending on the country and language.

The video below shows how people say Eid Mubarak in different languages around the world.

Awesome, you're subscribed!

Thanks for subscribing! Look out for your first newsletter in your inbox soon!

The best of London for free.

Sign up for our email to enjoy London without spending a thing (as well as some options when you’re feeling flush).

Déjà vu! We already have this email. Try another?

By entering your email address you agree to our Terms of Use and Privacy Policy and consent to receive emails from Time Out about news, events, offers and partner promotions.

  • Things to Do
  • Food & Drink
  • Coca-Cola Foodmarks
  • Attractions
  • Los Angeles

Get us in your inbox

🙌 Awesome, you're subscribed!

Docklands Light Railway, DLR, London

Blackwall Tunnel and DLR closures this weekend: everything you need to know

There’s going to be major travel disruption in southeast London

India Lawrence

Once again, this weekend (April 13-14) is going to be a weekend full of travel disruption.  One of London’s busiest river crossings, the  Blackwall Tunnel, is closing on Saturday and Sunday . Meanwhile, the DLR is also going to be shut across the majority of its services.

If you live in southeast London you might have trouble getting around, so here's everything you need to know about the planned closures.    

Blackwall Tunnel closures this weekend

The southbound route of the Blackwall Tunnel will be shut for planned maintenance of the northbound route. Traffic will still be able to travel northbound, but it will be re-routed into the southbound tunnel. On April 13-15 the tunnel will be shut southbound between 12.01am on Saturday morning and 5am (at the latest) on the following Monday morning.

Alternative nearby route options include the M24 Dartford Crossing, Tower Bridge and the Rotherhithe tunnel ( which could close itself later this year ), though drivers of HGVs as well as vans of higher than two metres tall are encouraged to avoid central London during these periods and beware of size restrictions. 

The 108 bus route, the only one which operates through the tunnel, will be temporarily split in two when the tunnel is partially closed, operating between Lewisham and North Greenwich and between Canning Town and Stratford. Passengers will have to instead use the Jubilee line to get across the river, though will be automatically refunded for this part of the journey. 

You can  check for regular traffic updates in the area on the TfL website here .

What’s going on with the DLR?

The majority of the Docklands Light Railway will be closed at the same time as the Blackwall Tunnel so new trains can be tested on the network. 

Services between Lewisham-Bank, Canary Wharf-Stratford and Tower Gateway-Canning Town will all be cancelled on both Saturday and Sunday. However, the Woolwich Arsenal to Stratford International service will still run.

Other cross-river transport links, such as Thameslink, the London Overground through Canada Water and the Elizabeth Line, will run as normal, although the Jubilee Line will have engineering works at the other end of the line, between Stanmore and West Hampstead.

London train strikes April and May 2024: everything you need to know .

Listen to Time Out’s brilliant podcast ‘Love Thy Neighbourhood’:   the newest episode with Milton Jones in Richmond is out now .

Stay in the loop: sign up to our   free Time Out London newsletter   for the best of the city, straight to your inbox.

  • India Lawrence Contributing writer

Share the story

An email you’ll actually love

Popular on Time Out

More on travel restrictions

Discover Time Out original video

  • Press office
  • Investor relations
  • Work for Time Out
  • Editorial guidelines
  • Privacy notice
  • Do not sell my information
  • Cookie policy
  • Accessibility statement
  • Terms of use
  • Modern slavery statement
  • Manage cookies
  • Claim your listing
  • Time Out Offers FAQ
  • Advertising
  • Time Out Market

Time Out products

  • Time Out Offers
  • Time Out Worldwide
  • International edition
  • Australia edition
  • Europe edition

passengers silhouetted in a train carriage

Aslef’s final strike day disrupts rail services in south and east England

Cancellations or reduced service on many routes on Monday including commuter lines into London

Rail passengers on many routes in the south and east of England including key commuter lines into London can expect significant disruption on Monday as train drivers stage the last strike in three days of action.

Aslef union members began a 24-hour strike at eight operating companies on Monday: c2c, Gatwick Express, Greater Anglia, Great Northern, Southeastern, Southern, South Western Railway and Thameslink. The action is part of a long-running dispute over pay and conditions that began in 2022.

Great Northern, c2c and the Gatwick Express have confirmed that they will not be running any services across the day.

Southern will run only one shuttle service throughout the day, calling at Gatwick airport and London Victoria only, while Thameslink will be operate two shuttle services, one calling at London St Pancras, Luton Airport Parkway and Luton only, and one between London King’s Cross and Cambridge only.

Southeastern said it would be running a limited service, with only 29 of the 165 stations it serves open. Greater Anglia will also have much-reduced services, running only hourly trains between London Liverpool Street and Southend, Norwich and Stansted Airport.

South Western has said it will continue to operate an extremely limited timetable, running on a small number of lines to and from London Waterloo. All services would stop by 7pm and it warned passengers to travel only if absolutely necessary.

All companies have said the strikes could lead to some services on Tuesday being disrupted.

The strikes coincide with an overtime ban called by the union at 16 operators across England on Monday and Tuesday after similar action between Thursday and Saturday.

It is expected that ban will increase the likelihood of short-notice cancellations and disruption. Train drivers in Scotland and Wales are not involved in the dispute or the industrial action, but cross-border rail services could be disrupted.

The strikes on the remaining eight operating companies follow two days of action on other parts of the network on Friday and Saturday.

In a video posted on Aslef’s X account on Friday, the general secretary of the union, Mick Whelan, said: “As we’ve seen from the 17 pay deals we have done, and the recent resolution on London Underground shows that when people come to the table there is a resolution, there is a way forward and we are willing to find one.

after newsletter promotion

“It’s now time for the government and employers to come back to the table, to work with us to resolve this long-running dispute.”

A spokesperson for the Rail Delivery Group, which represents train operators, said it was sorry the strikes called by Aslef’s leadership risked disrupting journeys.

“While we are doing all we can to keep trains running and we will work with our industry partners to keep as many trains running as possible, unfortunately there will be reduced services between Thursday 4 April to Tuesday 9 April,” it added. “Our advice is to check before you travel and follow the latest travel information.”

A Department for Transport spokesperson said: “Aslef is the only rail union continuing to strike, targeting passengers and preventing their own members from voting on the pay offer that remains on the table.”

  • Rail strikes
  • Rail industry
  • Trade unions
  • Industrial action

More on this story

trip south london

Aslef says more train strikes likely as drivers’ pay row continues

trip south london

Rail passengers face rolling strikes but London Underground action called off

trip south london

Train drivers at Northern and LNER to strike in March, Aslef union announces

trip south london

Weekend rail strikes: travel disrupted across Great Britain

trip south london

Train drivers will keep striking to ‘raise profile’ of pay dispute, says Aslef boss

trip south london

Weekend rail strikes and overtime ban disrupt UK travel

trip south london

Rail strikes: trains in south-east England halted as rolling stoppages begin

trip south london

North of England faces travel disruption amid train drivers’ strike

trip south london

Train drivers call off extra strike days after LNER minimum service law U-turn

trip south london

LNER train drivers to strike for five extra days in minimum service row

Most viewed.

Train drivers strike for third time in four days

Members of the Aslef union are walking out in an almost two-year dispute over pay with no sign of a breakthrough.

trip south london

News reporter @niamhielynch

Monday 8 April 2024 08:20, UK

Signage at Victoria station, London, as train drivers from the Aslef union launch a wave of fresh walkouts in a long-running dispute over pay. Train drivers at 16 rail companies are holding a rolling programme of one-day walkouts between April 5 and 8, coupled with a six-day ban on overtime. Picture date: Friday April 5, 2024.

Passengers on some of the UK's busiest rail routes will face travel chaos on Monday as train drivers are set to strike for the third time in four days.

Members of Aslef will walk out resulting in significant reductions in services, especially in East Anglia and the South East.

Train strikes: Full list of who will strike when

Aslef is embroiled in a near two-year long dispute over pay, with no sign of a breakthrough and no talks planned.

The strike will hit c2c, Gatwick Express, Greater Anglia, Southeastern, Southern, South Western Railway, Great Northern and Thameslink.

What train operators are affected?

No c2c trains will run on Monday, with its managing director Rob Mullen saying he was "really disappointed" an agreement hadn't been reached.

"The impact of this ongoing action is significant for our customers and colleagues," he said.

"I'm hopeful that further meetings with the unions are productive and see progress made toward concluding this challenging time for the railway."

Gatwick Express

There will be no Gatwick Express services but Gatwick Airport will continue to be served by the limited non-stop Southern shuttle.

Great Northern

There will be no Great Northern services on Monday.

Greater Anglia

Greater Anglia said its first trains of the day will start later and last trains finish earlier than normal, excluding the Stansted Express.

An hourly train service will operate on the following Greater Anglia routes: Norwich/Colchester and London Liverpool Street, Southend Victoria and London Liverpool Street, and Stansted Airport and London Liverpool Street

A bi-hourly train service will run between Cambridge and London.

No other Greater Anglia services will operate on any other routes.

Southeastern

The operator said most of its routes and stations will be closed. There will be an extremely limited service where trains are running and the operator advised customers not to travel.

A statement said: "If you do travel, expect severe disruption, plan ahead and allow much more time for your journey.

"Trains that are running will be extremely busy, they start later and finish early.

"You may be unable to board trains at some stations, and we estimate that there could be queues for up to two hours due to the very limited service.

"Only 29 out of 165 Southeastern stations will be open. No rail replacement buses will serve stations that are closed."

Southern said there will be no trains running across the vast majority of its network, with a limited shuttle service running non-stop between London Victoria and Gatwick Airport.

South Western Railway

South Western Railway said a significantly reduced service will operate on a small number of lines, while the rest of its network will be closed.

Trains will only run between 7am and 7pm.

There will be no Thameslink services running, except for a limited shuttle service calling at Luton, Luton Airport Parkway and London St Pancras and another limited non-stop shuttle service between London Kings Cross and Cambridge.

The union says the dispute has cost the industry over £2bn, far more than it would have cost to resolve the conflict.

Aslef members at 16 train companies are also banning overtime on Monday and Tuesday which will further disrupt services.

More on Rail Strikes

trip south london

Train strikes in April and May 2024: Full list of dates and lines affected

trip south london

Train drivers at five companies vote to continue strike action for another six months - ASLEF

An Azuma rail LNER train at Kings Cross Station, London. File pic

Rail strikes: LNER train drivers to walk out for five extra days in February

Related Topics:

  • Rail strikes

Picket lines will be mounted outside the railway stations of operators affected by the strike.

Aslef general secretary Mick Whelan said his members remained solidly behind the industrial action and criticised the government and rail companies for the lack of contact over the past year.

Aslef general secretary Mick Whelan on the picket line at Euston train station in London, as members of train drivers union are launching a wave of fresh walkouts in a long-running dispute over pay. Train drivers at 16 rail companies are holding a rolling programme of one-day walkouts between April 5 and 8, coupled with a six-day ban on overtime.  Picture date: Friday April 5, 2024. PA Photo. See PA story INDUSTRY Strikes. Photo credit should read: Jordan Pettitt/PA Wire

The government introduced a new law last year aimed at ensuring minimum levels of service during strikes, but none of the train companies have opted to use it.

A Rail Delivery Group spokesperson said: "Train companies are working through plans to manage the unnecessary disruption to our passengers caused by this damaging industrial action.

"Minimum service levels are one potential tool for that but they are not a silver bullet.

"In the meantime, we remain committed to resolving this dispute and our offer, which would take average driver salaries to £65,000 for a four-day week without overtime, remains on the table."

Read more from Sky News: Man wanted over fatal stabbing of woman with pram 'Hardest Geezer' runs length of Africa Man arrested after human torso found

Follow Sky News on WhatsApp

Keep up with all the latest news from the UK and around the world by following Sky News

A Department for Transport spokesperson said: "Aslef is the only rail union continuing to strike, targeting passengers and preventing their own members from voting on the pay offer that remains on the table.

Be the first to get Breaking News

Install the Sky News app for free

trip south london

"Having resolved disputes with all other rail unions, the transport secretary and rail minister have ensured that a pay offer is on the table - taking train drivers' average salaries from £60,000 up to £65,000."

Related Topics

IMAGES

  1. SOUTH BANK (Londra): 2023

    trip south london

  2. 5 best places to live in South London

    trip south london

  3. SOUTH KENSINGTON (London)

    trip south london

  4. Your visit

    trip south london

  5. South London

    trip south london

  6. South London walks

    trip south london

VIDEO

  1. South London 2: The MOST INTENSE BEEF Ever!😱

  2. Best London Day Trips

  3. London Trip

  4. Into the Heart of England: A London Travel Guide #travel #london

  5. FINAL PREPARATIONS FOR ROAD TRIP TO LONDON 😍| LIST OF ITEMS EPISODE : 4 (नमस्ते LONDON)

  6. Trip to London 23.03.2024 #london #trip #travel

COMMENTS

  1. 27 Best Things To Do In South London

    27 brilliant things to do in south London. Photograph: Frank's Cafe. 1. Sip on rooftop cocktails at Frank's. Bars and pubs. Cocktail bars.

  2. 30 Things To Do In South London: Exploring The Best Of The City

    Yes, South London is rich in historical sites. You can visit landmarks such as Tower Bridge, Shakespeare's Globe, the Imperial War Museum, the Old Vic Theatre, and the Royal Observatory. These sites offer a glimpse into London's history and provide an immersive experience for history enthusiasts. 4.

  3. Best Things to do in South London: An Insider's Area Guide

    Famous for hosting some of the best musicians and bands of the last decades, paying a visit to the O2 is a must-do when in South London. The O2 Arena, originally built as the Millenium Dome in the year 2000, is a major highlight of the Greenwich Peninsula.. A 52-meter climb to the top of the O2's roof undoubtedly provides the best views of London - you can book this activity here.

  4. 13 Best Things To Do In South London

    With all the incredible places to see, London is the kind of city you visit and never fully see it all - in fact, I think that task is almost impossible. - 13 Best Things To Do In South London - Travel, Travel Advice - England, Europe, London, United Kingdom - Travel, Food and Home Inspiration Blog with door-to-door Travel Planner! - Travel Advice, Travel Inspiration, Home Inspiration, Food ...

  5. South London

    In addition to places in the areas listed above, south London has individual attractions that are worth visiting. Eltham Palace is a historic royal residence and Ham House is a National Trust property in London with great gardens. As far as markets go, south London has some of the best in the city. Borough Market and Maltby Street Market are ...

  6. Where to Stay in South London: The 8 Best Neighborhoods

    Midrange ($200-$400/night): The Hilton London Tower Bridge - This is a stylish, modern hotel located just a short walk away from the Tower Bridge and the Tower of London. It provides all the amenities you'd expect from the Hilton brand and boasts impressive views of the London skyline. Book on Booking.com or Hotels.com.

  7. Five of south London's best sightseeing walks

    2. South Bank. Distance: 3 miles. Start: Westminster Bridge. End: Tower of London. Terrain: Flat and nicely pathed. For this walk, which ticks off lots of the capital's must-sees, start at the ...

  8. 36 Hours in London: Things to Do and See

    Most of all, it's an exercise in efficiency: Highlights of the hour-long walk, in addition to views of the Thames, include HMS Belfast, London Bridge, the Clink Prison Museum, Shakespeare's ...

  9. Best things to do in south London

    Is south London the most underrated part of the city? When it comes to where tourists will venture, I think it is. In this London travel guide, I'll talk you...

  10. The Best Museums To Visit In South London

    Horniman Museum and Gardens. Just over a 10 minute walk from Forest Hill station, the Horniman Museum and Gardens houses taxidermy and natural history specimens, collections of musical instruments and an aquarium. Set in a 16 acre landscaped garden, the museum was opened in 1901, three years after Frederick John Horniman initially commissioned it.

  11. 20 Best Hidden Gems in South London, Unusual Views & Food

    Best Hidden Food Gems in South London: Mercato Metropolitano, Elephant & Castle. Photo: Design My Night. Mercato Metropolitano now has several branches in London, namely one in Mayfair and the original one in Elephant & Castle. Located just a stone's throw away from Elephant & Castle, Mercato Metropolitano is one of the only places you can ...

  12. Home

    Explore the vibrant culture, dining, and entertainment of South Bank. Discover iconic landmarks, world-class theatre, diverse cuisine, and memorable experiences in London's favourite riverside neighbourhood. What's On.

  13. South England road trip

    We've planned the ultimate south England road trip just for you. It's an epic 12 day round trip from London, taking in some of the major cities like Oxford, Bath, Bristol and Exeter, before cruising along the Jurassic Coast, hitting up Stonehenge, and heading along the south coast to Brighton. Read on for all the best restaurants to eat at ...

  14. The Ultimate 2 Week South West England Road Trip Itinerary

    Day 9 - Port Isaac & Tintagel, Cornwall. Day 10 - St Nectan's Glen, Boscastle & Bodmin Moor, Cornwall. Day 11 - Wells & Glastonbury. Day 12 - Bath. Day 13 - Castle Combe, Lacock Abbey & Bath. Day 14 - Bath to London via Stonehenge. Planning a South West of England Road Trip. Getting to London.

  15. Southern England Itinerary: Your Guide to an Epic British Road Trip

    Discover the ultimate Southern England road trip with this itinerary that takes in the major gems of South England.

  16. 26 Best Seaside Day Trips From London

    Broadstairs, Kent - a popular seaside day trip from London. As well as a huge beach, there are kids rides on the seafront, a mini golf course, a few art galleries, charming cafes, independent shops and even an annual food festival. Drive from London: 1 hour 50. Train journey from London: 1 hour 30.

  17. England Road Trip: 50 Unmissable ideas (for every UK itinerary)

    Best places to visit on a North East coast England road trip. Saltburn-by-the-Sea (to search for fossils) Lemon top ice-cream - Its legacy goes back over 100 years!) Staithes- picturesque fishing village. Whitby Abbey - the inspiration behind Bram Stoker's Dracula.

  18. 28 Brilliant Day Trips from London

    Tickets cost £28 for adults and £19.50 for kids, but you get a better deal if there's a group of you, which is definitely worth looking into. Average driving time from central London: 1 hour 15 minutes. Hassle-free option: Tour Leeds Castle, Canterbury Cathedral and Dover with transfers from London.

  19. Lady's 35 Weekend Trips from London You'll Want to Take

    6. Weekend in Brighton. Down on the south coast in East Sussex, Brighton is one of the best weekend trips from London by train. Along with neighboring Hove, this city is celebrated for its pebble beaches, pleasure pier, Royal Pavilion, and narrow streets packed with restaurants and shops.

  20. 10 Best England (South) Tours & Trips 2024/2025

    England (South) Tours & Trips. Find the right tour for you through England (South). We've got 41 adventures going to England (South), starting from just 3 days in length, and the longest tour is 13 days. ... 3-Day Stonehenge, Glastonbury, Bath & the South West Coast Small-Group Tour from London. 4.7 (21 reviews) award winner. John was a very ...

  21. 21 Perfect Road Trips From London & Short Trips From London By Car!

    Doing a road trip from London along the Jurassic Coast will encapsulate the best places in Dorset and Devon for a full Dorset and Devon Road Trip!. The defining icon of the Jurassic Coast is Old Harry Rocks; a collection of dazzling white limestone stacks arranged along the coast like a jigsaw puzzle waiting to be assembled.. It's the perfect place to unwind and watch the sun go down in ...

  22. When is Eid al-Fitr 2024 and how is it celebrated?

    Lunar months last between 29 and 30 days so Muslims usually have to wait until the night before Eid to verify its date. Other countries follow independent sightings.

  23. Blackwall Tunnel & DLR Closures This Weekend: Dates and Times

    Once again, this weekend (April 13-14) is going to be a weekend full of travel disruption. One of London's busiest river crossings, the Blackwall Tunnel, is closing on Saturday and Sunday ...

  24. Aslef's final strike day disrupts rail services in south and east

    Rail passengers on many routes in the south and east of England including key commuter lines into London can expect significant disruption on Monday as train drivers stage the last strike in three ...

  25. Train drivers strike for third time in four days

    An hourly train service will operate on the following Greater Anglia routes: Norwich/Colchester and London Liverpool Street, Southend Victoria and London Liverpool Street, and Stansted Airport and ...